Manual Del Operador CNS-6201

Operator’s Manual
Central Monitor
CNS-6201
Op No. 01K
0614-907490O
About This Manual
In order to use this product safely and fully understand all its functions, read this manual before using the
product. Keep this manual near the instrument or in the reach of the operator and refer to it whenever the
operation is unclear.
Accompanying Documentation
The central monitor comes with the following manuals. Refer to the manual depending on your needs.
Operator’s Manual (this manual)

Describes the operation and settings of the central monitor. Read this manual before use.
Administrator’s Guide
For administrators. Describes how to install the central monitor. Read the Operator’s Manual together
with this guide.
Service Manual
For qualified service personnel. Describes information on servicing the central monitor. Only qualified
service personnel can service the central monitor.
Copyright Notice
The entire contents of this manual are copyrighted by Nihon Kohden. All rights are reserved. No part of this
document may be reproduced, stored, or transmitted in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical,
photocopied, recorded, or otherwise) without the prior written permission of Nihon Kohden.
This product stores personal patient information. Manage the information appropriately.
Patient names on the screen shots and recording examples in this manual are fictional and any resemblance to
any person living or dead is purely coincidental.
The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice. If you have any comments or suggestions
on this manual, please contact us at: https://www.nihonkohden.com/
Contents 1
GENERAL HANDLING PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................. i 3

WARRANTY POLICY.......................................................................................................... ii
EMC RELATED CAUTION...................................................................................................iii 4
Conventions Used in this Manual and Instrument............................................................... v
Warnings, Cautions and Notes.................................................................................. v 5
Text Conventions in this Manual................................................................................ v
Explanations of the Symbols in this Manual and Instrument.................................... vi
6
7
Section 1 General.................................................................................... 1.1 8
Introduction....................................................................................................................... 1.3
Features.................................................................................................................. 1.4 9
About the Central Monitor Processing Unit Type.................................................... 1.6
Central Monitor Composition............................................................................................ 1.7 10
Network Composition Example......................................................................................... 1.8
Operation Restrictions Depending on Monitored Bed Type.................................... 1.9 11
Alarm Function............................................................................................. 1.9
Parameter, Personal and Other Setups........................................................ 1.9 12
Operation Restrictions Depending on Whether Data Is Stored in the Central
Monitor.................................................................................................................. 1.10
13
Dual Display Monitoring.................................................................................................. 1.11
14
Number of Patients on Each Display.................................................................... 1.11
Expand Individual Bed Screen ............................................................................ 1.12
15
Clone Mode.......................................................................................................... 1.13
Types of Screens and Windows...................................................................................... 1.14 16
Touch Keys, Keyboard, Mouse and Remote Controller Operation.................................. 1.17
Touch Keys Operation........................................................................................... 1.17 17
Keyboard Operation.............................................................................................. 1.17
Mouse Operation.................................................................................................. 1.17
Remote Control Operation.................................................................................... 1.18
Basic Operation.............................................................................................................. 1.19
Basic Operation on the All Beds Screen.............................................................. 1.19
Basic Operation on the Individual Bed Window.................................................... 1.20
Setting the Items................................................................................................... 1.20
Entering Letters and Numbers.............................................................................. 1.21
Using the Screen Keyboard........................................................................ 1.21
Using the Hard Keyboard........................................................................... 1.21
Using the Setting Bar................................................................................. 1.21
Caution Mark.................................................................................................................. 1.23
PU-621R Central Monitor Processing Unit........................................................... 1.23
Rear Panel of Type I................................................................................... 1.23
Rear Panel of Type II.................................................................................. 1.23
WS-960P Recorder Unit....................................................................................... 1.23
Transport Function.......................................................................................................... 1.24
Patient Transfer..................................................................................................... 1.24
Operator’s Manual CNS-6201 C.1

CONTENTS
Review Data Transfer............................................................................................ 1.25

Review Data that can be Transferred.......................................................... 1.25
Display of Transferred Data........................................................................ 1.26
Precautions on Data Transfer..................................................................... 1.26
WLAN Transport................................................................................................... 1.28
Preparation................................................................................................. 1.29
Starting WLAN Transport............................................................................ 1.30
Ending WLAN Transport............................................................................. 1.30
Important Safety Information.......................................................................................... 1.32
General................................................................................................................. 1.32
CPU Reset............................................................................................................ 1.33
Installation............................................................................................................ 1.33
Network................................................................................................................ 1.34
Turning the Power On or Off................................................................................. 1.35
Transmitter............................................................................................................ 1.36
Admission, Discharge and Changing the Receiving Channel.............................. 1.36
Pause Monitoring.................................................................................................. 1.37
Changing Monitor................................................................................................. 1.37
Patient Transfer and Bed Exchange...................................................................... 1.37
Recorder Unit....................................................................................................... 1.38
Remote Controller................................................................................................ 1.38
Alarm.................................................................................................................... 1.39
ECG Monitoring.................................................................................................... 1.41
Respiration Measurement.................................................................................... 1.42
SpO2 Monitoring................................................................................................... 1.42
NIBP Measurement.............................................................................................. 1.43
Temperature Monitoring........................................................................................ 1.43
CO2 Monitoring..................................................................................................... 1.43
Extended Units..................................................................................................... 1.44
Transport Function................................................................................................ 1.45
Maintenance......................................................................................................... 1.45
Section 2 Panel and Parts Descriptions............................................... 2.1

Central Monitor Composition............................................................................................ 2.2
PU-621R Central Monitor Processing Unit....................................................................... 2.3
Front Panel of Type I............................................................................................... 2.3
Rear Panel of Type I............................................................................................... 2.3
Front Panel of Type II.............................................................................................. 2.4
Rear Panel of Type II.............................................................................................. 2.4
LCD Display (Locally Purchased Display)........................................................................ 2.5
YL-611P or YL-612P Alarm Indicator................................................................................ 2.6
WS-960P Recorder Unit................................................................................................... 2.7
Front Panel............................................................................................................. 2.7
Rear Panel.............................................................................................................. 2.7
RY-910PA Remote Controller............................................................................................ 2.8
Laser Printer (Network Printer)......................................................................................... 2.9
C.2 Operator’s Manual CNS-6201

CONTENTS
Section 3 Preparation............................................................................. 3.1 1

Installation Conditions....................................................................................................... 3.3
Connecting the Central Monitor to Other Instruments and Systems................................ 3.4 2
Connecting the Monitor to Other Instruments......................................................... 3.4
Standard Instruments................................................................................... 3.4
3
Optional Instruments.................................................................................... 3.4
4
Connecting to a Network System..................................................................................... 3.5
Flowchart Before Starting Monitoring............................................................................... 3.6
5
Loading the Recording Paper........................................................................................... 3.7
Handling the Recording Paper................................................................................ 3.7 6
Loading the Recording Paper................................................................................. 3.7
Loading Paper in the WS-960P Recorder Unit....................................................... 3.8 7
Loading Paper in the Laser Printer......................................................................... 3.8
Preparing the Remote Control.......................................................................................... 3.9 8
Installing the Batteries............................................................................................ 3.9
Setting the Remote Control.................................................................................. 3.10 9
Setting the Remote Control Channel.......................................................... 3.10
Attaching the Remote Control Channel Label to the Central Monitor................... 3.10 10
Turning the Power On or Off........................................................................................... 3.11
Preparation Before Power On............................................................................... 3.11 11
Turning the Central Monitor Processing Unit Power On....................................... 3.11
12
Turning the Power Off........................................................................................... 3.12
Turning the Power Off with the Touch Key.................................................. 3.12
13
Preparation After Turning the Power On......................................................................... 3.13
Changing Settings on the System Setup Screen................................................. 3.13
14
Before Starting Monitoring.................................................................................... 3.14
Daily Check..................................................................................................................... 3.15 15
Check Before Turning On the Monitor................................................................... 3.15
Check After Turning On the Monitor and During Monitoring................................. 3.15 16
Check After or Before Turning Off the Monitor...................................................... 3.16
17
Section 4 Admitting and Discharging Patients.................................... 4.1

Admitting a Patient............................................................................................................ 4.2
Patient Information List........................................................................................... 4.5
Importing Patient Information from the Hospital Network....................................... 4.5
Entering Patient Information Using a Bar Code Reader......................................... 4.6
Replacing the Current Patient Information with Patient Information
from a Bar Code Reader.............................................................................. 4.7
Readmitting a Recently Discharged Patient........................................................... 4.9
Discharging a Patient...................................................................................................... 4.11
Pausing Monitoring of a Patient...................................................................................... 4.14
Pause Timer.......................................................................................................... 4.16
When the Bed Is Paused............................................................................ 4.17
Resume Monitoring.............................................................................................. 4.18
Transferring a Patient to a Different Bedside Monitor..................................................... 4.20
Transferred Data................................................................................................... 4.20
Patient Information and Settings................................................................ 4.20
Review Data............................................................................................... 4.20

CONTENTS
Transfer Limitation................................................................................................ 4.21

Transferring a Patient............................................................................................ 4.22
Moving Data from One Monitor to a Different Monitor.................................................... 4.25
Exchanging Two Beds..................................................................................................... 4.29
Changing the Receiving Channel Number..................................................................... 4.32
Section 5 Alarm Function....................................................................... 5.1

Overview of Alarms........................................................................................................... 5.2
Alarm Types............................................................................................................ 5.4
Alarm Level............................................................................................................. 5.4
Alarm Indication...................................................................................................... 5.5
Alarms on Each Screen.................................................................................................... 5.7
Alarms for Monitored Beds..................................................................................... 5.7
Vital Signs Alarm/ST Alarms........................................................................ 5.7
Arrhythmia Alarms........................................................................................ 5.8
Technical Alarms.......................................................................................... 5.9
Alarms for the Central Monitor................................................................................ 5.9
Alarm Priority.................................................................................................................. 5.10
Alarm Sound and Indicator................................................................................... 5.10
Screen Message................................................................................................... 5.10
Temporarily Silencing or Suspending Alarms................................................................. 5.11
Temporarily Silencing Alarms............................................................................... 5.11
Alarm Silence Time.................................................................................... 5.12
Temporarily Suspending All Alarms...................................................................... 5.13
Alarm Suspend Time.................................................................................. 5.13
Suspending All Alarms at the Transmitter............................................................. 5.14
Deactivating Alarms at the Bedside Monitor or Vital Sign Telemeter.................... 5.14
Alarm Status Icons.......................................................................................................... 5.15
Turning the Alarm Limits Off Icon Display On or Off............................................. 5.16
Alarm Recording............................................................................................................. 5.17
Recorded Data and Necessary Settings of the Alarm Recording........................ 5.17
Starting Automatic Alarm Recording.................................................................... 5.17
Recording Example.................................................................................... 5.17
Setting Alarms................................................................................................................ 5.18
Setting Alarm Limits.............................................................................................. 5.18
Manually Setting the Alarms....................................................................... 5.19
Alarm Limits Range.................................................................................... 5.21
Setting Alarm Limits Automatically (Auto Alarm Setting)............................ 5.22
Limit Setting Changed Icon........................................................................ 5.24
Setting the Arrhythmia Alarm................................................................................ 5.25
Setting the ST Alarm............................................................................................ 5.28
Manually Setting the Alarms....................................................................... 5.28
Setting ST Alarms with Auto Alarm Setting Functions............................... 5.30
Setting All Alarms to a Preset Pattern (Alarm Master)......................................... 5.31
Adjusting the Alarm Sound Volume................................................................................ 5.33
Alarm Notice................................................................................................................... 5.35

CONTENTS
Using an Alarm Notice.......................................................................................... 5.35 1

Technical Icon................................................................................................................. 5.37
Checking the Proper Functioning of the Alarm............................................................... 5.38 2
3
Section 6 All Beds Screen...................................................................... 6.1
Overview........................................................................................................................... 6.2
4
Displaying the All Beds Screen............................................................................... 6.3
5
Description of All Beds Screen......................................................................................... 6.4
Monitored Group..................................................................................................... 6.5
6
Transmitter Battery Status Icon.............................................................................. 6.5
Wandering Detection and Falling Down Detection Icons........................................ 6.6
7
Changing the All Beds Screen Display Settings............................................................... 6.7
Displaying All Beds Screen Setup Window............................................................. 6.7 8
Setting the All Beds Screen Setup......................................................................... 6.8
Setting Items........................................................................................................... 6.9 9
Wave Selection............................................................................................. 6.9
Numerical Selection................................................................................... 6.10 10
Other.......................................................................................................... 6.11
Function Keys............................................................................................. 6.11 11
Setting Parameter Priority............................................................................................... 6.12
Displaying the Parameter Priority Window............................................................ 6.12 12
Setting Parameter Priority..................................................................................... 6.13
Recording on the All Beds Screen.................................................................................. 6.14 13
Manual Recording................................................................................................ 6.14
14
Settings for Manual Recording................................................................... 6.14
15
All Beds Recording............................................................................................... 6.14
Settings for All Beds Recording.................................................................. 6.15
16
Other Recordings................................................................................................. 6.15 17
Section 7 All Beds Alarms Window....................................................... 7.1

Overview of All Beds Alarms Window............................................................................... 7.2
Displaying an All Beds Alarms Window.................................................................. 7.2
All Beds Alarm Events Window......................................................................................... 7.4
Displaying an All Beds Alarm Events Window........................................................ 7.4
Changing the Display Type..................................................................................... 7.5
About the Technical Status..................................................................................... 7.6
All Beds Limits Window..................................................................................................... 7.7
Displaying the All Beds Limits Window................................................................... 7.7
Printing on the All Beds Alarms Window.......................................................................... 7.8
Section 8 Individual Bed Window.......................................................... 8.1

Overview........................................................................................................................... 8.2
Displaying the Individual Waveforms Window......................................................... 8.2

CONTENTS
Displaying the Individual Numeric Vital Signs Window or the ECG 12 Leads
Window................................................................................................................... 8.3
Description of the Individual Bed Window......................................................................... 8.4
Individual Waveforms Window................................................................................ 8.4
Individual Numeric Vital Signs Window................................................................... 8.5
ECG 12 Leads Window.......................................................................................... 8.6
Changing the Individual Bed Window Display Settings..................................................... 8.7
Setting the Individual Bed Window Setup............................................................... 8.8
Setting Items........................................................................................................... 8.9
Wave Selection............................................................................................. 8.9
Numerical Selection................................................................................... 8.10
Other.......................................................................................................... 8.11
Recording on the Individual Bed Window....................................................................... 8.12
Settings for Manual Recording................................................................... 8.12
Individual Bed Window Printing............................................................................ 8.13
Other Recordings................................................................................................. 8.13
Section 9 Review Windows.................................................................... 9.1

Overview of Review Windows........................................................................................... 9.4
Displaying the Review Window............................................................................... 9.5
Basic Operation on the Review Window ................................................................ 9.8
Registering Comments........................................................................................... 9.9
Checking Comments.............................................................................................. 9.9
Trend............................................................................................................................... 9.10
Changing the Trend Window................................................................................. 9.11
Changing the Display Format of the Trendgraph.................................................. 9.11
Setting the Number of VPCs Display.................................................................... 9.13
Setting the Displayed Parameters and Events..................................................... 9.13
Setting the Displayed Parameters.............................................................. 9.13
Setting the Displayed Event........................................................................ 9.14
Setting the Scale of a Displayed Parameter......................................................... 9.15
Setting the Customized Scale.................................................................... 9.16
Displaying High Frequency Range Compressed Graph....................................... 9.16
Trendgraph Types and Scale................................................................................ 9.17
Recording the Trendgraph.................................................................................... 9.20
Printing the Trendgraph........................................................................................ 9.20
Tabular Trend.................................................................................................................. 9.21
Adding the NIBP Values....................................................................................... 9.22
Setting the Number of VPCs Display.................................................................... 9.22
Setting the Displayed Parameters........................................................................ 9.23
Recording the Tabular Trend................................................................................. 9.24
Printing the Tabular Trend..................................................................................... 9.24
Full Disclosure................................................................................................................ 9.25
Setting the Stored Waveforms.............................................................................. 9.26
Setting the Displayed Waveforms......................................................................... 9.27
Single Wave, ECG 12 Lead, All Waves...................................................... 9.28

CONTENTS
Custom....................................................................................................... 9.28 1
Setting the Alarm Display in the Alarm Priority Color........................................... 9.30
Turning Pacing Mark On or Off............................................................................. 9.30 2
Printing the Full Disclosure Waveform.................................................................. 9.31 3
Creating a Recall File of Desired ECG................................................................. 9.31
Outputting Waveforms in MFER Format............................................................... 9.33 4
Expanded Waveform....................................................................................................... 9.34
Setting the Displayed Waveform........................................................................... 9.35 5
Single Wave, ECG 12 Lead, All Waves...................................................... 9.35
Custom....................................................................................................... 9.36
6
Selecting the Expanded Waveform Sweep Speed............................................... 9.37
7
Setting the Alarm Display in the Alarm Priority Color........................................... 9.38
Turning Pacing Mark On or Off............................................................................. 9.38
8
Measuring a Waveform......................................................................................... 9.39
Caliper Measurement................................................................................. 9.39 9
Divider Measurement................................................................................. 9.41
Setting the Scale of a Displayed Parameter......................................................... 9.41 10
Recording the Expanded Waveform..................................................................... 9.42
Recording Caliper Measurement Values with the Expanded Waveform..... 9.42 11
Printing the Expanded Waveform......................................................................... 9.43
Event List........................................................................................................................ 9.44 12
Recording the Event List....................................................................................... 9.46
Printing the Event List........................................................................................... 9.46 13
ST Recall........................................................................................................................ 9.47
Setting the Displayed Lead................................................................................... 9.48 14
Setting the Sensitivity........................................................................................... 9.49
Recording the Waveform of ST Recall File........................................................... 9.49
15
Printing the ST Recall Window............................................................................. 9.50
16
Arrhythmia Recall............................................................................................................ 9.51
Arrhythmia Classification and Priority................................................................... 9.52
17
QRS Waveform Classification............................................................................... 9.53
Outputting a Screen Image of an Arrhythmia Recall File...................................... 9.53
Recording the Waveform of an Arrhythmia Recall File......................................... 9.53
Printing the Arrhythmia Recall Window................................................................. 9.54
SpO2 Trend...................................................................................................................... 9.55
Displaying the Histogram Window........................................................................ 9.57
Changing the SpO2 Trend Window....................................................................... 9.58
Changing the Display Format of the SpO2 Trendgraph......................................... 9.58
Setting the SpO2 Trend Threshold........................................................................ 9.58
Threshold................................................................................................... 9.59
Setting the Displayed Parameters and Events..................................................... 9.59
Setting the Displayed Parameters.............................................................. 9.59
Setting the Displayed Events...................................................................... 9.60
Setting the Customized Scale.................................................................... 9.61
SpO2 Trend Types and Scale................................................................................ 9.62
Printing the SpO2 Trendgraph............................................................................... 9.62
ECG 12 Lead Analysis.................................................................................................... 9.63

CONTENTS
Analysis Wave Window......................................................................................... 9.65

Averaged Wave Window....................................................................................... 9.65
Analysis Wave Comparison Window.................................................................... 9.66
Averaged Wave Comparison Window................................................................... 9.66
Setting the Sensitivity........................................................................................... 9.67
Setting the Rhythm Waveform Lead..................................................................... 9.68
Measuring an Analysis Waveform and Average Waveform.................................. 9.68
Caliper Measurement................................................................................. 9.68
Divider Measurement................................................................................. 9.70
Outputting ECG 12 Lead Analysis Results in ECTP Format................................ 9.71
Automatic Transfer...................................................................................... 9.71
Manual Transfer.......................................................................................... 9.71
Printing the ECG 12 Lead Analysis Window......................................................... 9.71
Hemodynamics List........................................................................................................ 9.72
Abbreviations........................................................................................................ 9.73
Printing the Hemodynamics List........................................................................... 9.74
Alarm Events.................................................................................................................. 9.75
Setting the Displayed Event.................................................................................. 9.76
Event List.................................................................................................... 9.77
Technical Icon Function........................................................................................ 9.78
About Action Messages........................................................................................ 9.79
Printing the Alarm Events Window....................................................................... 9.79
Discharged Patients List................................................................................................. 9.80
Displaying the Discharged Patients List Window.................................................. 9.80
Section 10 Recording............................................................................. 10.1

Overview......................................................................................................................... 10.3
Types of Recording and Printing........................................................................... 10.3
Recording................................................................................................... 10.3
Printing....................................................................................................... 10.3
Description of Recording Modes.......................................................................... 10.4
Manual Recording...................................................................................... 10.4
Waveform Printing...................................................................................... 10.4
All Beds Alarm Management Printing......................................................... 10.4
Review Recording or Printing..................................................................... 10.5
Automatic Recording.................................................................................. 10.6
Remote Recording..................................................................................... 10.6
Recording Priority................................................................................................. 10.7
Recorder Unit (WS-960P).......................................................................... 10.7
Printer......................................................................................................... 10.7
Recorded/Printed Data......................................................................................... 10.7
Manual Recording........................................................................................................... 10.9
Necessary Settings for Manual Recording................................................. 10.9
Starting Manual Recording......................................................................... 10.9
Waveform Printing........................................................................................................ 10.10
Individual Waveforms Printing............................................................................ 10.10
All Beds Waveforms Printing.............................................................................. 10.10

CONTENTS
Starting All Beds Waveforms Printing....................................................... 10.10 1

Stopping All Beds Waveforms Printing..................................................... 10.11
All Beds Alarm Management Printing........................................................................... 10.12 2
Review Recording and Printing..................................................................................... 10.12
Automatic Recording..................................................................................................... 10.13 3
Periodic Recording............................................................................................. 10.13
Necessary Settings for Periodic Recording.............................................. 10.13 4
Clock Time Periodic Recording........................................................................... 10.13
Necessary Settings for Clock Time Periodic Recording........................... 10.13 5
Alarm Recording................................................................................................. 10.14
Remote Recording........................................................................................................ 10.15
6
Call Recording.................................................................................................... 10.15
7
Necessary Settings for Call Recording..................................................... 10.15
Remote Delayed Waveform Recording............................................................... 10.16
8
Necessary Settings for Remote Delayed Waveform Recording............... 10.16
Changing Recording Settings....................................................................................... 10.17 9
Changing Settings on the [Recording] of the Setup Window.............................. 10.17
Overview of Reports..................................................................................................... 10.18 10
Report Settings............................................................................................................. 10.19
Report Setting on the Setup Window................................................................. 10.19 11
Printing a Report........................................................................................................... 10.21
Printing a Report in Manual Mode...................................................................... 10.21 12
Printing a Report in Periodic Mode..................................................................... 10.21
Printing Example................................................................................................ 10.22 13
14
Section 11 Overview Bed Window......................................................... 11.1
15
About the Overview Bed Window................................................................................... 11.2
Displaying the Overview Bed Window and Selecting the Overview Bed........................ 11.3
16
Recording and Printing the Overview Bed Data................................................... 11.4
17
Section 12 Parameter Setup................................................................... 12.1

Overview of Parameter Setup......................................................................................... 12.2
Displaying Each Parameter Setup Window.......................................................... 12.2
ECG Settings.................................................................................................................. 12.4
Main Settings........................................................................................................ 12.4
Learning ECG....................................................................................................... 12.5
Setting Arrhythmia Alarms.................................................................................... 12.5
Setting ST Alarms................................................................................................. 12.5
Arrhythmia Analysis Setting.................................................................................. 12.5
ST Point Settings.................................................................................................. 12.9
QTc/QRSd Settings............................................................................................ 12.10
Other Settings..................................................................................................... 12.11
RESP Settings.............................................................................................................. 12.15
Main Settings...................................................................................................... 12.15
Display Settings.................................................................................................. 12.16
Other Settings..................................................................................................... 12.16
SpO2 Settings............................................................................................................... 12.17

CONTENTS
Main Settings...................................................................................................... 12.17

NIBP Settings............................................................................................................... 12.18
Main Settings...................................................................................................... 12.18
PRESS Settings............................................................................................................ 12.21
Main Settings...................................................................................................... 12.21
Label Name List....................................................................................... 12.23
Other Settings..................................................................................................... 12.23
TEMP Settings.............................................................................................................. 12.24
Main Settings...................................................................................................... 12.24
Label Name List....................................................................................... 12.25
Anesthesia Gas Settings.............................................................................................. 12.26
Section 13 System Setup Screen.......................................................... 13.1

Overview of the System Setup Screen........................................................................... 13.2
Displaying the System Setup Screen................................................................... 13.3
Sound Control................................................................................................................. 13.4
Alarm.................................................................................................................... 13.4
Sync Sound.......................................................................................................... 13.4
Section 14 Error Messages and Troubleshooting................................ 14.1

Troubleshooting............................................................................................................... 14.2
System.................................................................................................................. 14.2
CPU Reset................................................................................................. 14.3
Network................................................................................................................ 14.3
Measurement Value.............................................................................................. 14.5
Alarm.................................................................................................................... 14.5
Admitting or Discharging...................................................................................... 14.5
All Beds Screen and Individual Bed Window........................................................ 14.7
Trend Window....................................................................................................... 14.8
Tabular Trend Window........................................................................................... 14.8
Full Disclosure and Expanded Waveform Windows.............................................. 14.9
ST Recall Window................................................................................................ 14.9
Arrhythmia Recall Window.................................................................................. 14.10
ECG 12 Lead Analysis Window.......................................................................... 14.10
Hemodynamics List Window............................................................................... 14.10
Recording, Printing or Report............................................................................. 14.11
Overview Bed Window........................................................................................ 14.12
Parameter Setup................................................................................................. 14.12
Remote Control.................................................................................................. 14.12
Error Messages............................................................................................................ 14.13
Messages From Bedside Monitors, Vital Sign Telemeters and Multiple Patient
Receivers............................................................................................................ 14.13
Messages about Measurement Conditions of Each Parameter............... 14.13
Other........................................................................................................ 14.18

CONTENTS
Messages from Central Monitor......................................................................... 14.20 1

WS-960P Recorder Unit........................................................................... 14.20
Printer....................................................................................................... 14.20 2
Other........................................................................................................ 14.20
Messages from Multiple Patient Receiver.......................................................... 14.21 3
General..................................................................................................... 14.21
ECG Monitoring........................................................................................ 14.22 4
SpO2 Monitoring....................................................................................... 14.23
NIBP Monitoring....................................................................................... 14.24 5
CO2 Monitoring......................................................................................... 14.24
6
7
Section 15 Maintenance......................................................................... 15.1
Daily Check..................................................................................................................... 15.2 8
Checking Sound Generation from the Speaker.................................................... 15.2
Calibrating the Touchkeys..................................................................................... 15.2 9
Adjusting the LCD Display.................................................................................... 15.3
Inspection After Use....................................................................................................... 15.4 10
Cleaning and Disinfecting............................................................................................... 15.5
PU-621R Central Monitor Processing Unit........................................................... 15.5 11
Cleaning..................................................................................................... 15.5
Disinfecting................................................................................................. 15.5 12
LCD Display.......................................................................................................... 15.6
WS-960P Recorder Unit....................................................................................... 15.6 13
Panel.......................................................................................................... 15.7
14
Thermal Head............................................................................................. 15.7
Sensor........................................................................................................ 15.8
15
RY-910PA Remote Controller................................................................................ 15.8
Cleaning and Disinfecting the Remote Control........................................... 15.8
16
Replacing the Batteries.............................................................................. 15.8
Network Printer..................................................................................................... 15.8 17
Disposal.......................................................................................................................... 15.9
RY-910PA Remote Controller................................................................................ 15.9
Disposal of Batteries.................................................................................. 15.9
Regular Inspection........................................................................................................ 15.10
Periodic Replacement Parts......................................................................................... 15.12
Repair Parts Availability Policy...................................................................................... 15.12
Section 16 Factory Default Settings...................................................... 16.1

Factory Default Settings.................................................................................................. 16.2
Setup.................................................................................................................... 16.2
Admit/Discharge......................................................................................... 16.2
Alarm.......................................................................................................... 16.3
All Beds Screen Setup............................................................................... 16.3
Individual Bed Screen Setup...................................................................... 16.5
Parameter Priority....................................................................................... 16.5
Recording................................................................................................... 16.6
Report........................................................................................................ 16.6

CONTENTS
Parameter Setup........................................................................................ 16.7

Review.................................................................................................................. 16.9
Review Menu.............................................................................................. 16.9
Trend........................................................................................................ 16.10
Tabular Trend............................................................................................ 16.11
Full Disclosure.......................................................................................... 16.12
Expanded Waveform................................................................................ 16.13
Event List.................................................................................................. 16.14
ST Recall.................................................................................................. 16.14
Arrhythmia Recall..................................................................................... 16.14
SpO2 Trend............................................................................................... 16.15
ECG 12 Lead Analysis............................................................................. 16.16
Alarm Events............................................................................................ 16.16
All Beds Alarms........................................................................................ 16.16
System Setup..................................................................................................... 16.17
Sound Control.......................................................................................... 16.17
Section 17 Reference.............................................................................. 17.1

Specifications.................................................................................................................. 17.2
Display.................................................................................................................. 17.2
Full Disclosure Window........................................................................................ 17.3
Arrhythmia Recall Window.................................................................................... 17.3
ST Recall Window................................................................................................ 17.3
Trend Window....................................................................................................... 17.3
Hemodynamics List Window................................................................................. 17.3
ECG 12 Lead Analysis Window............................................................................ 17.4
Report Window..................................................................................................... 17.4
Overview Bed Window.......................................................................................... 17.4
Alarm.................................................................................................................... 17.4
Recording............................................................................................................. 17.4
Printing................................................................................................................. 17.5
Operation.............................................................................................................. 17.5
Sound and Light Output........................................................................................ 17.5
Data Output.......................................................................................................... 17.5
Network................................................................................................................ 17.5
System Settings.................................................................................................... 17.5
Saving Data.......................................................................................................... 17.6
Performance......................................................................................................... 17.6
LCD Display.......................................................................................................... 17.6
Environment......................................................................................................... 17.6
Power Requirements............................................................................................ 17.6
Acoustic Energy (noise)........................................................................................ 17.7
Mechanical Strength............................................................................................. 17.7
Dimensions and Weight (approximate, without protrusion).................................. 17.7
Safety Standard.................................................................................................... 17.7
Electromagnetic Compatibility.............................................................................. 17.8
Electromagnetic Emissions.................................................................................. 17.8
Electromagnetic Immunity.................................................................................... 17.9

CONTENTS
Recommended Separation Distances between Portable and Mobile RF 1

Communications Equipment............................................................................... 17.11
System Composition for EMC Test..................................................................... 17.11 2
European Community CE Notice........................................................................ 17.12
Standard Accessories................................................................................................... 17.13 3
PU-621R Central Monitor Processing Unit......................................................... 17.13
Options and Consumables........................................................................................... 17.13 4
PU-621R Central Monitor Processing Unit......................................................... 17.13
LCD Display........................................................................................................ 17.14 5
WS-960P Recorder Unit..................................................................................... 17.14
General Requirements for Connecting Medical Electrical Systems.............................. 17.15
6
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

GENERAL HANDLING PRECAUTIONS
This device is intended for use only by qualified medical personnel.

Use only Nihon Kohden approved products with this device. Use of non-approved products
or in a non-approved manner may affect the performance specifications of the device. This
includes, but is not limited to, batteries, recording paper, pens, extension cables, electrode
leads, input boxes and AC power.
Please read these precautions thoroughly before attempting to operate the instrument.
1. To safely and effectively use the instrument, its operation must be fully understood.
2. When installing or storing the instrument, take the following precautions:

(1) Avoid moisture or contact with water, extreme atmospheric pressure, excessive humidity and temperatures,
poorly ventilated areas, and dust, saline or sulphuric air.
(2) Place the instrument on an even, level floor. Avoid vibration and mechanical shock, even during transport.
(3) Avoid placing in an area where chemicals are stored or where there is danger of gas leakage.
(4) The power line source to be applied to the instrument must correspond in frequency and voltage to product
specifications, and have sufficient current capacity.
(5) Choose a room where a proper grounding facility is available.
3. Before Operation
(1) Check that the instrument is in perfect operating order.
(2) Check that the instrument is grounded properly.
(3) Check that all cords are connected properly.
(4) Pay extra attention when the instrument is combined with other instruments to avoid misdiagnosis or other
problems.
(5) All circuitry used for direct patient connection must be doubly checked.
(6) Check that battery level is acceptable and battery condition is good when using battery-operated models.
4. During Operation
(1) Both the instrument and the patient must receive continual, careful attention.
(2) Turn power off or remove electrodes and/or transducers when necessary to assure the patient’s safety.
(3) Avoid direct contact between the instrument housing and the patient.
5. To Shutdown After Use

(1) Turn power off with all controls returned to their original positions.
(2) Remove the cords gently; do not use force to remove them.
(3) Clean the instrument together with all accessories for their next use.
6. The instrument must receive expert, professional attention for maintenance and repairs. When the instrument is
not functioning properly, it should be clearly marked to avoid operation while it is out of order.
7. The instrument must not be altered or modified in any way.
8. Maintenance and Inspection

(1) The instrument and parts must undergo regular maintenance inspection at least every 6 months.
(2) If stored for extended periods without being used, make sure prior to operation that the instrument is in perfect
operating condition.
Operator’s Manual CNS-6201 i

(3) Technical information such as parts list, descriptions, calibration instructions or other information is available for
qualified user technical personnel upon request from your Nihon Kohden representative.
9. When the instrument is used with an electrosurgical instrument, pay careful attention to the application and/or
location of electrodes and/or transducers to avoid possible burn to the patient.
10. When the instrument is used with a defibrillator, make sure that the instrument is protected against defibrillator
discharge. If not, remove patient cables and/or transducers from the instrument to avoid possible damage.
WARRANTY POLICY
Nihon Kohden Corporation (NKC) shall warrant its products against all defects in materials and workmanship for one year
from the date of delivery. However, consumable materials such as recording paper, ink, stylus and battery are excluded
from the warranty.
NKC or its authorized agents will repair or replace any products which prove to be defective during the warranty period,
provided these products are used as prescribed by the operating instructions given in the operator’s and service manuals.
No other party is authorized to make any warranty or assume liability for NKC’s products. NKC will not recognize any
other warranty, either implied or in writing. In addition, service, technical modification or any other product change
performed by someone other than NKC or its authorized agents without prior consent of NKC may be cause for voiding
this warranty.
Defective products or parts must be returned to NKC or its authorized agents, along with an explanation of the failure.
Shipping costs must be pre-paid.
This warranty does not apply to products that have been modified, disassembled, reinstalled or repaired without Nihon
Kohden approval or which have been subjected to neglect or accident, damage due to accident, fire, lightning, vandalism,
water or other casualty, improper installation or application, or on which the original identification marks have been
removed.
In the USA and Canada other warranty policies may apply.
ii Operator’s Manual CNS-6201

EMC RELATED CAUTION
This equipment and/or system complies with IEC 60601-1-2 International Standard for electromagnetic
compatibility for medical electrical equipment and/or system. However, an electromagnetic environment that
exceeds the limits or levels stipulated in IEC 60601-1-2, can cause harmful interference to the equipment
and/or system or cause the equipment and/or system to fail to perform its intended function or degrade
its intended performance. Therefore, during the operation of the equipment and/or system, if there is any
undesired deviation from its intended operational performance, you must avoid, identify and resolve the
adverse electromagnetic effect before continuing to use the equipment and/or system.
The following describes some common interference sources and remedial actions:
1. Strong electromagnetic interference from a nearby emitter source such as an authorized radio station
or cellular phone:
Install the equipment and/or system at another location. Keep the emitter source such as cellular phone
away from the equipment and/or system, or turn off the cellular phone.
2. Radio-frequency interference from other equipment through the AC power supply of the equipment and/
or system:
Identify the cause of this interference and if possible remove this interference source. If this is not
possible, use a different power supply.
3. Effect of direct or indirect electrostatic discharge:

Make sure all users and patients in contact with the equipment and/or system are free from direct or
indirect electrostatic energy before using it. A humid room can help lessen this problem.
4. Electromagnetic interference with any radio wave receiver such as radio or television:
If the equipment and/or system interferes with any radio wave receiver, locate the equipment and/or
system as far as possible from the radio wave receiver.
5. Interference of lightning:
When lightning occurs near the location where the equipment and/or system is installed, it may induce
an excessive voltage in the equipment and/or system. In such a case, disconnect the AC power cord
from the equipment and/or system and operate the equipment and/or system by battery power, or use
an uninterruptible power supply.
6. Use with other equipment:

When the equipment and/or system is adjacent to or stacked with other equipment, the equipment
and/or system may affect the other equipment. Before use, check that the equipment and/or system
operates normally with the other equipment.
7. Use of unspecified accessory, transducer and/or cable:

When an unspecified accessory, transducer and/or cable is connected to this equipment and/or system,
it may cause increased electromagnetic emission or decreased electromagnetic immunity. The specified
configuration of this equipment and/or system complies with the electromagnetic requirements with the
specified configuration. Only use this equipment and/or system with the specified configuration.
Operator’s Manual CNS-6201 iii

Caution - continued
8. Use of unspecified configuration:
When the equipment and/or system is used with the unspecified system configuration different than
the configuration of EMC testing, it may cause increased electromagnetic emission or decreased
electromagnetic immunity. Only use this equipment and/or system with the specified configuration.
9. Measurement with excessive sensitivity:

The equipment and/or system is designed to measure bioelectrical signals with a specified sensitivity. If
the equipment and/or system is used with excessive sensitivity, artifact may appear by electromagnetic
interference and this may cause mis-diagnosis. When unexpected artifact appears, inspect the
surrounding electromagnetic conditions and remove this artifact source.
10. Use with radiation therapy equipment:

The equipment and/or system is designed to measure bioelectrical signals with a specified sensitivity. If
the equipment and/or system is used with excessive sensitivity, artifact may appear by electromagnetic
interference and this may cause mis-diagnosis. When unexpected artifact appears, inspect the
surrounding electromagnetic conditions and remove this artifact source.
If the above suggested remedial actions do not solve the problem, consult your Nihon Kohden
representative for additional suggestions.
iv Operator’s Manual CNS-6201

Conventions Used in this Manual and Instrument
Warnings, Cautions and Notes

Warnings, cautions and notes are used in this manual to alert or signal the reader to specific information.
WARNING
A warning alerts the user to possible injury or death associated with the use or misuse of the instrument.
CAUTION
A caution alerts the user to possible injury or problems with the instrument associated with its use or
misuse such as instrument malfunction, instrument failure, damage to the instrument, or damage to other
property.
NOTE
A note provides specific information, in the form of recommendations, prerequirements, alternative methods or
supplemental information.
Text Conventions in this Manual

• Names of items that are displayed on the screen are enclosed in square brackets: [Menu]
• Messages that are displayed on the screen are enclosed in quotation marks: “CHECK ELECTRODES”
Operator’s Manual CNS-6201 v

Explanations of the Symbols in this Manual and Instrument
The following symbols found in this manual/instrument bear the respective descriptions as given.
For the printer and bar code reader, refer to each manual.
On Screen
Symbol Description Symbol Description
Non-paced Change window
Print Settings
Record Filter display
QRS/pulse sync icon Display setup/change window
Return to previous window/All Beds

Enter a comment
screen*1
Display a comment Alarm notice
Close a window Alarm silence
Alarm silence with remaining minutes

Scroll
2 at the central monitor
Stop auto scroll Alarm suspend at the transmitter
Zoom Alarm suspended
Increase/decrease setting All alarms off/vital sign alarm limit off
Display onscreen keyboard Audio off
Call pre-registered items Off (Power)
Zoom in review Recorder open
Zoom out review Out of paper
Select review Recorder disconnected
vi Operator’s Manual CNS-6201

Printer disconnected
Recorder error
Printer error
Hard disk access Limit setting changed icon
Hard disk error (Failed/None/No ECG technical icon

Array) Replace the ECG electrodes
SpO2 technical icon

Touch key off
Check the SpO2 probe attachment
Alarm volume 1 to 3
Alarm volume 4 to 6
Transmitter battery status*2
Alarm volume 7
Pause elapse time display
Calibrate touch key Display/close individual function keys
Wandering detection icon*3 Data output in progress
Falling down detection icon*3 WLAN transport icon
*1 On the All Beds Alarms window and Discharged Patients List window only.
*2 Only available for transmitters with a transmitter battery status display function and setting on the transmitter is
required. Refer to the transmitter operator’s manual.
*3 Only available when a vital sign telemeter is used.
On PU-621R Central Monitor Processing Unit

Alternating current COM1/COM2 connector
On (Power) PS/2 keyboard connector
Off (Power) PS/2 mouse connector
Standby (Power button) MIC-IN connector
Power LED Sound output connector
Operator’s Manual CNS-6201 vii

HDD access LED LINE-OUT connector
Alarm LED LINE-IN connector
Reset switch Warning, high voltage
Analog VGA connector Serial number
LAN0/LAN1/LAN2 connector Date of manufacture
USB0/USB1/USB2/USB3/USB4/
Attention, consult operator’s manual
USB5 connector
The CE mark is a protected Products marked with this symbol
conformity mark of the European comply with the European WEEE
Community. The four digits after the directive 2012/19/EU and require
CE mark indicate the identification separate waste collection. For Nihon
number of the Notified Body involved Kohden products marked with this
in assessing the product’s conformity symbol, contact your Nihon Kohden
as a medical device. representative for disposal.
On WS-960P Recorder Unit
Serial number Out of paper
Date of manufacture This way up
Attention, see instructions for use/

Fragile
Caution
Manufacturer Keep away from rain
Stacking limit by number

European representative n
(“n” is the limiting number)
The CE mark is a protected

CSA mark conformity mark of the European
Community. The four digits after the
CE mark indicate the identification
number of the Notified Body involved
Follow instructions for use
in assessing the product’s conformity
Background color: blue
as a medical device.
viii Operator’s Manual CNS-6201

Section 1 General 1
Introduction........................................................................................................................................................... 1.3
Features..................................................................................................................................................... 1.4
About the Central Monitor Processing Unit Type........................................................................................ 1.6
Central Monitor Composition................................................................................................................................ 1.7
Network Composition Example............................................................................................................................ 1.8
Operation Restrictions Depending on Monitored Bed Type........................................................................ 1.9
Alarm Function................................................................................................................................. 1.9
Parameter, Personal and Other Setups........................................................................................... 1.9
Operation Restrictions Depending on Whether Data Is Stored in the Central Monitor............................. 1.10
Dual Display Monitoring...................................................................................................................................... 1.11
Number of Patients on Each Display........................................................................................................ 1.11
Expand Individual Bed Screen ................................................................................................................ 1.12
Clone Mode.............................................................................................................................................. 1.13
Types of Screens and Windows.......................................................................................................................... 1.14
Touch Keys, Keyboard, Mouse and Remote Controller Operation..................................................................... 1.17
Touch Keys Operation.............................................................................................................................. 1.17
Keyboard Operation................................................................................................................................. 1.17
Mouse Operation...................................................................................................................................... 1.17
Remote Control Operation....................................................................................................................... 1.18
Basic Operation.................................................................................................................................................. 1.19
Basic Operation on the All Beds Screen.................................................................................................. 1.19
Basic Operation on the Individual Bed Window........................................................................................ 1.20
Setting the Items...................................................................................................................................... 1.20
Entering Letters and Numbers................................................................................................................. 1.21
Using the Screen Keyboard........................................................................................................... 1.21
Using the Hard Keyboard............................................................................................................... 1.21
Using the Setting Bar..................................................................................................................... 1.21
Caution Mark...................................................................................................................................................... 1.23
PU-621R Central Monitor Processing Unit............................................................................................... 1.23
Rear Panel of Type I....................................................................................................................... 1.23
Rear Panel of Type II...................................................................................................................... 1.23
WS-960P Recorder Unit........................................................................................................................... 1.23
Transport Function.............................................................................................................................................. 1.24
Patient Transfer......................................................................................................................................... 1.24
Review Data Transfer............................................................................................................................... 1.25
Review Data that can be Transferred............................................................................................. 1.25
Display of Transferred Data............................................................................................................ 1.26
Precautions on Data Transfer......................................................................................................... 1.26
WLAN Transport....................................................................................................................................... 1.28
Preparation..................................................................................................................................... 1.29
Starting WLAN Transport............................................................................................................... 1.30
Ending WLAN Transport................................................................................................................. 1.30
Important Safety Information.............................................................................................................................. 1.32
Operator’s Manual CNS-6201 1.1

General..................................................................................................................................................... 1.32
CPU Reset............................................................................................................................................... 1.33
Installation................................................................................................................................................ 1.33
Network.................................................................................................................................................... 1.34
Turning the Power On or Off..................................................................................................................... 1.35
Transmitter................................................................................................................................................ 1.36
Admission, Discharge and Changing the Receiving Channel.................................................................. 1.36
Pause Monitoring..................................................................................................................................... 1.37
Changing Monitor..................................................................................................................................... 1.37
Patient Transfer and Bed Exchange......................................................................................................... 1.37
Recorder Unit........................................................................................................................................... 1.38
Remote Controller.................................................................................................................................... 1.38
Alarm........................................................................................................................................................ 1.39
ECG Monitoring........................................................................................................................................ 1.41
Respiration Measurement........................................................................................................................ 1.42
SpO2 Monitoring....................................................................................................................................... 1.42
NIBP Measurement.................................................................................................................................. 1.43
Temperature Monitoring........................................................................................................................... 1.43
CO2 Monitoring......................................................................................................................................... 1.43
Extended Units......................................................................................................................................... 1.44
Transport Function................................................................................................................................... 1.45
Maintenance............................................................................................................................................. 1.45
1.2 Operator’s Manual CNS-6201

1. GENERAL
This section explains basic information such as system composition, screen 1

composition and basic operation to operate the central monitor.
Introduction
The CNS-6201 Central Monitor is designed for use in various hospital

environments, including the ICU, CCU, recovery room, and general ward. The
central monitor allows hospital staff to monitor several patients’ vital signs.* The
central monitor is designed so the operator can directly touch the screen from the
operator position.
* Essential performance in EMC standard
A single central monitor can continuously monitor up to 8 beds (up to 16 beds

when QP-625P 16 Patient Software is installed, up to 24 beds when QP-626P
24 Patient Software is installed and up to 32 beds when QP-627P 32 Patient
Software is installed).
WARNING
Do not diagnose a patient based only on data acquired by the central
monitor. Overall judgement must be performed by a physician who
understands the features, limitations and characteristics of the
central monitor and by reading the biomedical signals acquired by
other instruments.
NOTE
Upgrade the central monitor processing unit and each optional unit
to the Nihon Kohden recommended software version. Only use the
specified configuration of units. If more than one CNS-6201 central
monitor is used in the same facility, make sure the central monitors have
the same software version. If CNS-6201 central monitors with different
software versions are used together, correct system operation cannot be
guaranteed.

1. GENERAL
For the parameter settings, refer to Section 6-1 of the Administrator’s Guide.
The PU-621R Central Monitor Processing Unit can be installed horizontally
or vertically. This manual shows it in the horizontal position. Refer to the
“Attaching the Rubber Feet” in Section 1 of the Administrator’s Guide.
The option number (Op No.) is printed on the name plate of the unit.
For simplicity, the suffix A/K is omitted in this manual. There is no difference in
operation among models with different suffixes unless otherwise specified.
Features
Read the manuals for the bedside monitors, transmitters and multiple patient
receiver together with this manual.
• Flexible system composition

You can compose a patient monitoring network with central monitors, bedside
monitors, multiple patient receivers and transmitters. The system offers
monitoring flexibility to best meet your clinical needs. For details, refer to
Section 1.
• Wide screen dual displays

Dual wide screen displays can show data of several patients and long
waveforms. Various display layouts are available for two displays. For details,
refer to Section 1.
• 32 patient monitoring
Up to 32 patients can be monitored with one display. (QP-627P 32 Patient
Software is required) For details, refer to Section 1.
• Remote control
When a YL-611P or YL-612P Alarm Indicator is connected to the PU-621R
Central Monitor Processing Unit, the central monitor can be operated with an
RY-910PA Remote Controller. For details, refer to Section 1.
• Importing patient information from the hospital network

Patient information can be entered from a bar code reader or from the hospital
network. For details, refer to Section 4.
• Readmitting a discharged patient

A patient who was discharged within 120 hours can be readmitted with no loss
of data. For details, refer to Section 4.
• Detailed individual patient data

You can select one of the monitored patients from up to 32 patients and
display the Individual Bed window such as a Numeric Vital Signs window
and Individual Waveforms window for more information. For details, refer to
Section 8.

1. GENERAL
• Review data 1
The past data of the selected patient can be displayed in various formats on the
review windows. Two review windows can be displayed on the same screen.
For details, refer to Section 9.
• Saving 120 hours of review data

Up to 16 waveforms and 120 hours of patient review data can be saved. For
details, refer to Section 9.
• Displaying review data of a patient who was discharged or the patient

whose data was deleted
Review data of a patient who was discharged or a patient whose data was
deleted within the past 120 hours can be viewed. (Discharged patients list) For
details, refer to Section 9.
• Recording and printing

The central monitor can print a wide variety of information on a thermal array
recorder and laser printer. For details, refer to Section 10.
• Temporarily display data of a patient who is not continuously monitored

The overview bed function allows you to temporarily monitor a bed that is on
the network but not continuously monitored by the central monitor. (Overview
Window) For details, refer to Section 11.
• Function keys
The All Beds screen and each monitored bed have functions keys. Central
monitor and other functions can be assigned to the function keys. For details,
refer to Administrator’s Guide.

1. GENERAL
About the Central Monitor Processing Unit Type

There are two types of PU-621R Central Monitor Processing Unit for the
CNS-6201 Central Monitor. The illustrations used in this manual are from type II
central monitor processing unit. There is no difference in operation between the
types unless otherwise specified.
Type I central monitor processing Type II central monitor processing

unit (older) unit (newer)
Front panel Rear panel Front panel Rear panel

1. GENERAL
1
Central Monitor Composition
CNS-6201 Central Monitor

PU-621R
LCD Display (local purchase)
Central Monitor Processing Unit
Type I Type II
YS-098P1/YS-098P2
YL-611P/YL-612P Alarm Indicator WS-960P Recorder Unit
Additional Alarm Indicator Unit
SC-611R WS-960P Power Supply Bar Code Reader Mouse
Keyboard RY-910PA Remote Controller Printer

Laser Printer (Network printer)
YS-097P5/YS-097P6 VL Cable Set (Main)
DVI Cable Speaker Cable USB Cable
YS-097P8/YS-097P9 VL Cable Set (Second) for Type I YS-113P8/YS-113P9 VL Cable Set (Second) for Type II
RGB Cable USB Cable DVI Cable USB Cable
Local Purchase Display

For a display, locally purchase either of the following:
• ET2400L-8CJM-1-RMJC-G display from Elo Touch Solutions
• ET2403LM-2CWA-1-MT-W-WH-NS-CL-RMJC display from Elo Touch Solutions
1. GENERAL
Network Composition Example
The central monitor shows data of any bed in the central monitor network. The
bedside monitor can show data of any bed in the network using the interbed
function.
The number of central monitors and bedside monitors that can be connected to
a central monitor network and the method of network communication depend
on the type of monitor used. For details, refer to the Network and System
Installation Guide.
Network group Central monitor
e.g. ICU Central monitor CNS-6201
Example: CNS-9601
Printer
Transmitter
(Access point) Interface
QI-910R
Multiple patient receiver Bedside monitor Vital sign telemeter Bedside monitor
Example: ORG-9100 series Example: GZ-130P Example: BSM-1700 series
BSM-2300 series BSM-8000 series
BSM-3000 series
bedside monitor
BSM-6000 series
Example: BSM-3101
CSM-1000 series
BSM-7000 series
BSM-9101
BSM-8000 series
PVM-2701/2703
Central monitor Central monitor Central monitor

Network group
e.g. CCU
Transmitter
Multiple patient receiver Transmitter Bedside monitor Bedside monitor Bedside monitor
The models for the monitor, transmitter and multiple patient receiver
are the same as those for the ICU group.
WARNING WARNING
Install all network devices, including printer and Check the software version number of the central
hubs, outside the patient environment. If they are monitor before connecting it to the network.
installed inside the patient environment, the Different software versions have different
patient or operator may receive electrical shock communication methods. More than one
or injury. For installation, contact your Nihon communication method in a network may cause
Kohden representative. communication failure. For details, refer to the
Network and System Installation Guide.

1. GENERAL
Operation Restrictions Depending on Monitored Bed Type 1

What the central monitor can do depends on the monitored bed type.
Alarm Function
Alarm Function
Monitored Bed Type Temporarily
Temporarily Turning Alarm
Silence Priority
Suspend alarms On or Off
Alarms
Multiple patient receiver Setting on the central
Available Not available
with transmitter monitor
The alarm priority at the
Not available.
central monitor coincides
The alarm suspend
with the alarm priority at the
functions on the
bedside monitor or vital sign
BSM/CSM series transmitter, bedside
Temporarily silence telemeter.
bedside monitor monitor or vital sign
any current alarms
Vital sign telemeter telemeter suspends Not available
The alarm priority settings
all alarm functions. When all alarms
are set to OFF on at the bedside monitor or
the bedside monitor vital sign telemeter are
which has a all synchronized.
alarms off function, The alarm priority at the
the alarm function is central monitor does not
Not available. OFF on the central coincide with the alarm
BSM series bedside The alarm suspend monitor. priority at the bedside
Temporarily silence
monitor through key suspends all monitor.
all alarm functions
QI-910R interface alarms when there
is no alarm. The settings at the bedside
monitor and central monitor
are not synchronized.
Parameter, Personal and Other Setups
Personal Setup
Monitored Bed Type
Alarm Settings Other Settings
BSM/CSM series
bedside monitor The settings at the bedside monitor
Some of the setting items that can be set on
Vital sign telemeter or vital sign telemeter and central
the bedside monitor or vital sign telemeter
BSM series bedside monitor are synchronized. Changing
can also be set on the central monitor.
monitor through one changes the other.
QI-910R interface
Multiple patient receiver
Can be set on the central monitor.
with transmitter
NOTE
BSM in the table includes bedside monitors that receive or display data
from a transmitter connected to the patient.

1. GENERAL
Operation Restrictions Depending on Whether Data Is Stored in the Central Monitor

When registering a patient as a monitored bed, you need to select whether or
not the patient’s data is saved in the central monitor. Some operations are not
available on beds whose data is not saved in the central monitor.
Operations available when data is saved in the central monitor
Screen/Window Unavailable Operations

• Alarm notice
All Beds screen
• Technical icon
• Admit*
• Readmit
• Discharge/Data deletion
• Pause monitoring
Admit/Discharge window • Patient transfer
• Change monitor/multiple patient
receiver
• Bed exchange
• Setting a receiving channel
• Deleting a recall file
Arrhythmia Recall window
• Creating arrhythmia recall files
Full Disclosure window Selecting saved waveforms
Expanded Waveform window Caliper measurement
• Deleting analysis result files
ECG 12 Lead Analysis window
• Caliper measurement
Report window Periodic report recording
* You can enter and edit patient data for an admitted bed whose data is not saved
in the central monitor. Changing a bed name or group operation cannot be
used.
Monitored bed
A monitored bed is a bed which is registered on the Monitor Setting window of
the System Setup and is continuously monitored at the central monitor.

1. GENERAL
1
Dual Display Monitoring
Monitoring with dual displays is available. For connecting two displays, refer to
Administrator’s Guide.
With dual display monitoring, you can select from 3 screen patterns.
Screen Description Displays

The main display shows
Extended mode:
the All Beds screen and
All Beds screen + Main Sub
the sub display shows a
All Beds screen
different All Beds screen.
Extended mode:
All Beds screen + Sub
the sub display shows the Main
Expand Individual (Individual)
Expand Individual Bed
Bed screen
screen.
it can also show another
window together with the
All Beds screen. The sub Main Sub
display shows only the (Clone)
Clone mode:
same All Beds screen as
All Beds screen
the main display. Main Sub
The active display in (Clone)
clone mode is set on the

[Monitor Setting] →
[Screen Composition] on
the System Setup screen.
Number of Patients on Each Display

Normally a total of 8 different patients can be displayed on both displays. For
example: one All Beds screen with 8 patients, or two All Beds screens with 4
patients each.
The total number of patients can be expanded to 32 with optional software.
Optional Software Description

None 8
QP-625P 16 Patient Software 16
The number and layout of patients on each All Beds screen can be set
independently. The number of patients on each display is set on the [Monitor
Setting] → [Screen Composition] on the System Setup screen. Refer to “Screen
Composition” in Section 6-1 of the Administrator’s Guide.

1. GENERAL
Number of Patients Settings

Main Display Sub Display
• 32 Patients • 24 Patients • 32 Patients • 24 Patients
• 16 Patients • 12 Patients • 16 Patients • 12 Patients
• 10 Patients • 10 Patients
• 8 Patients • 8 Patients (8 × 1) • 8 Patients • 8 Patients (8 × 1)
The total number of 32 patients can be monitored on the central monitor.

• If the main display shows 16 patients, the sub display can show 2 to 16
patients.
• When one All Beds screen shows 24 or 32 patients, only numeric data is
displayed; waveforms are not displayed.
• If the main display All Beds screen shows 32 patients, the sub display can only
show the Expand Individual Bed screen.
Expand Individual Bed Screen 

When monitoring with dual displays, you can set the main display to All Beds
screen and the sub display to Expand Individual Bed screen.
The Expand Individual Display is set on the [Monitor Setting] → [Screen

Composition] on the System Setup screen. Refer to “Screen Composition” in
Section 6-1 of the Administrator’s Guide.

1. GENERAL
Clone Mode 1
The main display shows the All Beds screen and it can also show another
window together with the All Beds screen. The sub display shows only the same
All Beds screen as the main display. In clone mode, you can operate either the
main display or the sub display but not both.
The clone mode can be set on the [Monitor Setting] → [Screen Composition] of
the System Setup screen.

1. GENERAL
Types of Screens and Windows
Monitoring
All Beds Screen (Refer to Section 6) Individual Bed Window (Refer to Section 8)
Temporarily Displaying Patient Data Not

Displaying Past Data of the Patient
Continuously Monitored
Review Window (Refer to Section 9) Overview Bed Window (Refer to Section 11)
Admitting/Discharging Patient Managing the Several Patients’ Alarms

Admit/Discharge Window (Refer to Section 4) All Beds Alarms Window (Refer to Section 7)

1. GENERAL
Displaying the Setting Window 1

Individual function keys (Refer to Section 1) Setup Window (Refer to Section 1)
All Beds Screen Individual Bed Window
All beds function keys (Refer to Section 1)

Menu (Refer to Section 1)
Setting Each Items
Alarm Setting Window (Refer to Section 5) Recording Window (Refer to Section 10)
Report Window (Refer to Section 10) Display Window (Refer to Section 6 and 8)

1. GENERAL
Parameter Setup Window (Refer to Section 12) System Setup Screen (Refer to Section 13)

1. GENERAL
1
Touch Keys, Keyboard, Mouse and Remote Controller
Operation
The operation of the central monitor is controlled through the touch keys, mouse,
keyboard and remote controller.
This manual describes in touch key operation in many examples.
Touch Keys Operation

When using the Nihon Kohden specified LCD display, you can operate the
central monitor through touch keys.
To operate, directly touch an area of the screen with your finger. When the key is
touched, there is a pip sound.
In this manual, directly touching the XX key on the screen with your finger is
referred to as “Touch [XX]”.
Example: Touch [Menu].
Keyboard Operation
From the keyboard, you can enter letters and numbers. When the ENTER key is
pressed, there is a pip sound.
In this manual, pressing the XX key on the keyboard is referred to as “Press the
XX key”.
Mouse Operation
Mouse input is also available throughout the screens. Click items and menus on
the screen to select them. This technique has basically the same effect on screen
operations as the touch keys operation.

1. GENERAL
Remote Control Operation

When the YL-611P or YL-612P Alarm Indicator is connected, you can use the
RY-910PA remote controller to operate the monitor from a distance. A pointer
appears on the screen when the monitor is operated by the remote control. The
remote control channel can be assigned to the monitor to prevent operating a
different monitor. Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the
central monitor.
Press the keys on the remote control to display or close a window. Move the
selection knob up, down, left or right to scroll the data or select a setting then
press the ENTER key to register the setting.
There is a pip sound when a key on the remote control is pressed or the selection
knob is moved to scroll the data.
NOTE
• Watch the monitor screen and check the operation when using the
remote control to avoid wrong operation.
• Make sure that the remote control is handled appropriately.
Transmitter
Point the transmitter to
the remote control sensor
on the alarm indicator
LED when operating the
Lights when the pointer on monitor with the remote
the screen is moved by the control.
selection knob. Blinks when a
key on the remote control is pressed.
Power button
POWER
Not available
Selection knob
Move this knob up, down,
left or right to move the cursor
MENU/HOME key or mouse pointer on the
SILENCE Enter key
Not available MENU/HOME ALARMS screen.
Registers the setting
selected on the screen.
SILENCE ALARMS
key
Customized keys
Not available
Not available
CHANNEL keys
DISPLAY
SELECT CHANNEL
Select the monitor when a
channel is assigned to
DISPLAY SELECT key the monitor.
Not available
Display
Displays the channel Battery cover
number and the display Contains two AAA
number. batteries.
Display number
Strap hole
Use a strap to prevent Channel number
dropping the remote control.

1. GENERAL
1
Basic Operation
Basic Operation on the All Beds Screen

Individual function keys
Displays the windows which are preset on the System
Setup screen. Touch [ ] on each bed to display the
Data area for each bed
Individual function keys. Touch [ ] to close the
Touch the data area of each bed to
Individual function keys.
display the individual bed window.
Menu
Displays each window.
All beds function keys

Displays the windows which are preset
on the System Setup screen.
For the function keys setting, refer to the Administrator’s Guide.

1. GENERAL
Basic Operation on the Individual Bed Window

The background of the selected bed is blue.

Touch the data display area of the
desired bed to change the Individual
Bed Window to another bed.
Menu
Same as the All Beds screen.
Displays the Review Menu. Displays the Admit/Discharge window.

Touch again to close the Review Menu. Starts or stops recording on the WS-960P Recorder Unit.
Displays the Review window.
Displays the All Returns to the previous

Beds screen. screen/window.
Displays the Individual Waveforms Starts or stops printing on
window. the printer.
Displays the Individual Bed Window Menu Displays the Setup Menu.
where you can change the window to the Touch each item to change the
Individual Waveforms window, Individual window. Touch again to close
Numeric Vital Signs window or ECG 12 the Setup Menu.
Leads window. Touch again to close the
Individual Bed Window Menu.
Setting the Items

1. On the Individual Bed screen or setting window, touch the tab to change the
window and display the setting item. Depending on the window the tab has
several hierarchies.
2. Touch the desired key. Depending on the setting item, select or deselect
changes or setting window is displayed.

1. GENERAL
Example: Setting [ECG] → [Other] → [Hum Filter] to [ON] on the System 1

Setup screen.
Tab
Touch [ECG] → [Other].
Touch [ON].
Entering Letters and Numbers

Using the Screen Keyboard
You can display onscreen keyboard by touching the keyboard icon ( ).
For some settings, the screen keyboard is automatically displayed. Touch a key
on the screen keyboard to enter patient information. Refer to Section 4 of the
Operator’s Manual.
Using the Hard Keyboard

Even when the screen keyboard is displayed, you can also use the hard keyboard
to input letters and numbers in the entry fields on the screen.
Using the Setting Bar

You can increase or decrease a setting value by touching the [ ] or [ ] key on
the screen.

1. GENERAL
Every touch of the [ ] or [ ] key, increases or

decreases the setting by one step. When touching the
key continuously, the setting continuously changed.
Setting bar
Touch the bar to change the settings.

1. GENERAL
1
Caution Mark
This section explains the caution mark on the instrument and indicates where
to find the information. Read the instructions to fully understand how to use the
instrument safely and appropriately.
PU-621R Central Monitor Processing Unit
Rear Panel of Type I
CAUTION
While the central monitor is on, do not touch unused sockets or cables
connected to the sockets. Failure to follow this instruction may damage
the central monitor by static electricity and cause malfunction.
Refer to the Section 3 “Connecting the Central Monitor to

Other Instruments and Systems”.
Rear Panel of Type II
Refer to the Section 3 “Connecting the Central Monitor to

Other Instruments and Systems”.
WS-960P Recorder Unit
Refer to the Section 3 “Loading the Recording Paper”.

1. GENERAL
Transport Function
BSM-6000 series, BSM-9101 and CSM-1000 series bedside monitors have a

transport function. With the transport function, the patient data (settings, patient
information and review data) can be transported from one monitor to another by
removing the input unit from the source bedside monitor and inserting it into the
destination bedside monitor.
When the input unit is transported between bedside monitors and the transport
function is enabled on the bedside monitors, patient transfer and review data
transfer are done on the central monitor automatically.
For details on transport function, refer to the bedside monitor manuals.
WARNING
When using the transport function:
• Do not connect or disconnect the network cable from the bedside
monitors and central monitor.
• Do not perform the following operations on the bedside monitor
which is being monitored and whose data is saved by the central
monitor. Patient data may be mixed together or lost in the following
cases:
- Removing the input unit while the bedside monitor power is off.
- Using transport function and wireless LAN at the same time.
WARNING
When using the transport function, use 10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX
switching hubs for the entire network. If you use another type of hub,
the network may intermittently lose connection and the patient
cannot be monitored on the central monitor.
Patient Transfer
When the transport function is enabled at the bedside monitors in the central
monitor network and the input unit is disconnected from the source bedside
monitor and connected to the destination bedside monitor, patient transfer is
automatically performed on the central monitor.
To transfer the alarm settings, setting on the bedside monitor is required.
CAUTION
If there are too many patient transfers, old review data might not be
displayed on the central monitor.

1. GENERAL
Review Data Transfer 1

When a patient is transferred and the input unit is connected to the destination
bedside monitor, any unsent review data in the input unit is sent to the central
monitor. The transferred review data is displayed on the central monitor together
with the current monitoring review data.
CAUTION
Do not remove the input unit from the bedside monitor while the
central monitor is receiving data from the bedside monitor. The data
may be lost.
Example is when transporting from Monitor A which is not connected to the

network to Monitor B which is connected to the network
Central monitor on the network
Review data from

Monitor A is transferred to
Review data from the central monitor.
Monitor A is saved
in the input unit.
Monitor A Input unit Monitor B

(not connected to network) (connected to network)
Review Data that can be Transferred

The following review data can be sent from the bedside monitor to the central
monitor by the transport function. The data is displayed on the central monitor
screen with the already monitored data.
• Trend
• Tabular Trend
• Hemodynamics List
• Arrhythmia Recall
• Full Disclosure
• ST Recall
• ECG 12 Lead Analysis
NOTE
• Only the data saved in the input unit can be transferred. Refer to the
bedside monitor operator’s manual.
• Alarm history data cannot be transferred.

1. GENERAL
Display of Transferred Data

In the review window below, you can change the background color of the area
where data transferred using the transport function is displayed.
It is only possible to change the background color when [Backfill Highlight] is

set to [ON] at [System Configuration] → [System] → [Screen] of the System
Setup screen. (Default setting: OFF. For details, refer to “System Configuration”
in Section 6-1 of the Administrator’s Guide.)
• Trend window • ST Recall

• Tabular Trend window • Arrhythmia Recall
• Full Disclosure window • ECG 12 Lead Analysis
• Expanded Waveform • Hemodynamics List
• Event List • Alarm Events
Example: Trend window
Transferred data
Precautions on Data Transfer

Input Unit
• If the input unit is removed from a bedside monitor which is being
monitored and whose data is saved by the central monitor, the central
monitor cannot display the old review data of the bedside monitor.
• When the input unit is removed from a bedside monitor:
- you cannot transfer a patient to or from that monitor, exchange the
monitoring beds or change the monitor.
- up to one minute of full disclosure waveform and trend data is not
saved in the central monitor.
Review Data
• The last 90 seconds of a full disclosure waveform which is sent from the
bedside monitor might not be displayed on the central monitor.
• The trendgraph data from the bedside monitor might not have the event
information.
• The full disclosure data from the bedside monitor does not have the
arrhythmia information. The waveforms might not be displayed with
arrhythmia color on the Full Disclosure window of the central monitor.

1. GENERAL
Other 1
• While data is being sent from a bedside monitor to the central monitor,
you cannot transfer a patient to or from that monitor, exchange the
monitoring beds or change the monitor.
• When the data of a bedside monitor which has “COMMUNICATION
LOSS” status is deleted on the central monitor and then that bedside
monitor is connected to the network, the data is sent to the central
monitor and part of the old review data for that bedside monitor may be
• When you pause monitoring of a bed while data is being sent from the
bedside monitor to the central monitor, the data sending may stop.
• If you change the date and time while sending data from a bedside
monitor, the data sending may stop.

1. GENERAL
WLAN Transport
When <WLAN TRANSPORT> is set to On in the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
screen on the BSM-1700 series bedside monitor, monitoring data from the
BSM-1700 series bedside monitor is displayed on the original host monitor
and central monitor during transport. This allows continuous monitoring of the
patient during transport from one monitor to a different monitor in the network.
Example: W
hen a BSM-1700 series bedside monitor is
transported from Monitor A to Monitor B
Before transport, the monitor operates as the input unit of Monitor A

Central monitor in the network Central monitor in the network
(Central monitor which saves (Central monitor which saves
the data of Monitor A) the data of Monitor B)
Monitoring data from Empty bed
Monitor A B
Central monitor network
Operates as input unit

of Monitor A
B
Monitor A Monitor B (in standby state)
After the BSM-1700 series bedside monitor is unmounted from Monitor A, it

continues monitoring the patient. Monitoring data is transmitted to the network
using wireless communication. The WLAN TRANSPORT window appears on
Monitor A and monitoring data is shown here during transport.
On the central monitor, the monitored bed switches from Monitor A to the
BSM-1700 series bedside monitor. This allows the monitoring data to be also
shown on the central monitor.*1
*1 The BSM-1700 series bedside monitor is automatically registered as a bed by

the central monitor. It is not necessary to manually register the monitor as a
monitored bed on the central monitor.
Monitoring data Empty bed

during transport B
Continues
monitoring as B
a standalone
bedside monitor
Monitor A During transport Monitor B (in standby state)

1. GENERAL
Transport ends when the BSM-1700 series bedside monitor is mounted onto 1
Monitor B and the patient is admitted on that monitor.*2 Monitor A closes the
WLAN TRANSPORT window and enters into a standby state. The monitored
bed on the central monitor changes back to Monitor A and is shown as an empty
bed.
Monitoring data
from Monitor B
A
Empty bed
Operates as input unit

for Monitor B
Monitor A (in standby state) Monitor B
*2 WLAN transport ends when any of the following occurs.

• Connecting a different input unit to Monitor A and starting monitoring of a
new patient.
• Ending WLAN transport on the ADMIT DISCHARGE window of the
BSM-1700 series bedside monitor. (Refer to the “Ending WLAN Transport”
section.)
• Touching [END] key on the screen of Monitor A or the central monitor.
• Turning off the power of any of the BSM-1700 series bedside monitor,
Monitor A or the central monitor.
• Discharging the patient (deleting patient data) from the BSM-1700 series
bedside monitor or the central monitor.
Preparation
Prepare the WLAN environment. Refer to the installation guide of the wireless
LAN system.
• WLAN transport can only be used with the following combination of

instruments.
Central monitor
- CNS-6201 central monitor: Ver. 05-06 or later
Host monitor
- BSM-6000K series bedside monitors: Ver. 08-01 or later
- CSM-1501, CSM-1502, CSM-1701 or CSM-1702 bedside monitor:
Ver. 02-12 or later
- CSM-1901 bedside monitor: Ver. 01-28 or later
Input unit
- BSM-1700 series bedside monitors:
Ver. 03-01 or later with a QI-170P wireless LAN station

1. GENERAL
• Change the transport setting on the host monitor.

- Set <DATA TRANSPORT USING INPUT UNIT> on the DATA
MANAGEMENT window of the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION screen to
ENABLE. (Transport settings of all instruments which use WLAN transport
must be set to Enable.) Refer to Section 2 of the administrator’s guide of the
host monitor.
• Change the WLAN transport settings on the BSM-1700 series bedside monitor.
For details, refer to the administrator’s guide of the BSM-1700 series bedside
monitor.
- Set <DATA TRANSPORT USING INPUT UNIT> on the DATA
MANAGEMENT window of the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION screen to
ENABLE.
- Set <WLAN TRANSPORT> to ON on the DATA MANAGEMENT window
of the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION screen.
- Set <WLAN> to ON on the WLAN window of the BSM-1700 series bedside
monitor.
NOTE
• A BSM-1700 series bedside monitor whose WLAN transport
functionality is set to ON cannot be registered as a monitored bed.
When the BSM-1700 series bedside monitor is removed from the host
monitor, it is automatically registered as a monitored bed on the central
monitor.
• A BSM-1700 series bedside monitor whose WLAN transport
functionality is set to ON cannot be registered as an interbed bed.
Starting WLAN Transport

To use the WLAN transport function, refer to the operator’s manuals of the host
monitor and BSM-1700 series bedside monitor.
When WLAN communication is established, a WLAN transport window appears

on the first host monitor, and a WLAN transport icon appears on the central
monitor and BSM-1700 series bedside monitor.
Ending WLAN Transport

To end WLAN transport on the central monitor, touch [WLAN Transport Cancel]
on the Admit/Discharge window.

1. GENERAL
NOTE 1
The following also ends WLAN transport. Refer to the operator’s manuals
of the host monitor and BSM-1700 series bedside monitor.
• Discharge the patient from the central monitor or BSM-1700 series
bedside monitor.
• Turning off the first host monitor, BSM-1700 series bedside monitor, or
central monitor during WLAN transport.

1. GENERAL
Important Safety Information
General
WARNING WARNING
Never use the central monitor in the presence of Never use the central monitor in a hyperbaric
any flammable anesthetic gas or high oxygen chamber. Failure to follow this warning
concentration oxygen atmosphere. Failure to may cause explosion or fire.
follow this warning may cause explosion or fire.
WARNING WARNING
Do not install or run any software not specified by Do not monitor the patients over the number of
Nihon Kohden in the central monitor. Nihon receivers in a multiple patient receiver (up to 8
Kohden does not warrant normal operation of the patients) by changing the channels. The patient’s
CNS-6201 system program if unspecified data will be mixed together. It can only monitor
software is installed or used. the patients who are set at the receiving channels
in the central monitor. You cannot know the
information if there is a sudden change in
condition of a patient who is not set in the central
monitor.
WARNING WARNING
After attaching electrodes, probes and sensors Do not diagnose a patient based only on data
on the patient and connecting cables to the acquired by the central monitor. Overall
bedside monitor and/or transmitter, check that judgement must be performed by a physician
there is no error messages and the waveforms who understands the features, limitations and
and numeric data are appropriately displayed on characteristics of the central monitor and by
the screen. If there is an error message, or reading the biomedical signals acquired by other
waveform or numeric data is not appropriate, instruments.
check the electrodes, probes and sensor
attachment, patient condition and settings on the
WARNING
bedside monitor and/or transmitter and remove
When monitoring with two displays, do not turn
the cause.
off either display. Some monitored beds cannot
be monitored.
WARNING
While the central monitor is on, do not connect
WARNING
any external devices such as USB memory.
Do not turn off the display to which the speaker
Nihon Kohden does not warrant the normal
cable is connected. The alarm sound cannot be
operation of the central monitor if an application
heard.
or software installation starts automatically.

1. GENERAL
1
CAUTION CAUTION
While the central monitor is on, do not touch If fluids are accidentally spilled into the central
unused sockets or cables connected to the sockets. monitor, take the central monitor out of service
Failure to follow this instruction may damage the and contact your Nihon Kohden representative.
central monitor by static electricity and cause The central monitor must be disassembled,
malfunction. cleaned, dried and tested for safety and function.
CAUTION
When receiving data from a transmitter
connected to the bedside monitor or a transmitter
which has a display, the measurement data and
waveforms may be different on the central
monitor depending on the detection setting and
display timing. Be aware of this when reading the
measurement data and waveforms.
CPU Reset
CAUTION
The central monitor CPU may be reset when
there is unit failure, considerable static electricity
or noise. If this occurs, there is a 5-beep alarm
sound for 5 seconds and monitoring stops for
about 3 minutes. To secure patient safety,
carefully observe the patients and alarm
information from the instruments which are
connected to the patients. After the central
monitor is reset, check that it is working properly.
Installation
WARNING WARNING
Install the central monitor outside the patient Make sure that the speaker cable is connected to
environment. If the central monitor are installed the display and main unit. Otherwise the alarm
inside the patient environment, the patient or sound cannot be heard.
operator may receive electrical shock or injury.
For installation, contact your Nihon Kohden
representative.

1. GENERAL
CAUTION CAUTION
Connect only the specified instrument to the When installing, connecting and assembling the
central monitor and follow the specified central monitor, only use specified instruments
procedure. Failure to follow this instruction may and parts and follow the specified procedure.
result in electrical shock or injury to the operator, Otherwise, the operator may receive electrical
and cause fire or instrument malfunction. shock or injury.
CAUTION CAUTION
Only use the provided power cord and connect it Keep the cable out of the way by running it along
to a 3-pin AC outlet which is properly grounded. the floor or wall. Otherwise people may trip over
Otherwise, it may result in electrical shock or it, causing the instrument to fall and injure the
injury to the operator. patient and operator.
CAUTION CAUTION
Before connecting or disconnecting instruments, Turn off the power of mobile phones, small
make sure that each instrument is turned off and wireless devices and other devices which
the power cord is disconnected from the AC produce strong electromagnetic interference
socket. Otherwise, the patient or operator may around a patient (except for devices allowed by
receive electrical shock or injury. the hospital administrator). Radio waves from
devices such as mobile phones or small wireless
devices may be mistaken as pulse waves and the
displayed data may be incorrect.
CAUTION CAUTION
Connect the power cord to an AC outlet which If the power is turned off while the central monitor
can supply sufficient AC current to the central is used, the hard disk may be damaged and data
monitor. The central monitor cannot function may be lost.
properly with low current. Also the breaker trips
and it causes electric power failure.
Network
WARNING WARNING
Connect the central monitor to the network as Install all network devices, including printer and
specified in the Network and System Installation hubs, outside the patient environment. If they are
Guide. Otherwise the patient and operator may installed inside the patient environment, the
receive electrical shock or injury. To connect the patient or operator may receive electrical shock
network, contact your Nihon Kohden or injury. For installation, contact your Nihon
representative. Kohden representative.

1. GENERAL
1
WARNING WARNING
Do not use a damaged network cable. The patient Check the software version number of the central
or operator may receive electrical shock when the monitor before connecting it to the network.
damaged part is touched. Different software versions have different
communication methods. More than one
communication method in a network may cause
WARNING
communication failure. For details, refer to the
Do not diagnose a patient based on alarm
Network and System Installation Guide.
information of an instrument which can view the
data by setting [Extended Network] to [ON].
There is a time delay. Confirm the alarm
information on this central monitor.
CAUTION CAUTION
The network and system must be managed by The network must be managed by the network
the network or system administrator. Incorrect administrator. Make sure that each instrument in
settings may cause instrument or network failure. the network has a different IP address.
Otherwise, data communication cannot be
performed properly. When adding an instrument
to an already operating network, set the IP
address on the instrument before connecting the
instrument to the network.
CAUTION CAUTION
The system should be used in a closed network When the monitor is connected to a central
to prevent computer viruses and unexpected monitor network, set the Bed Name or CNS
software updates. Name and Group Name on the monitor.
Otherwise, the default settings are used for the
names and the bed may be incorrectly identified
on the central monitor.
CAUTION
The central monitor communicates with specified
systems using the HL7 protocol via the hospital
network. Only connect the central monitor to the
network in the medical facility.
Turning the Power On or Off
CAUTION CAUTION
Follow the specified procedure to turn off the When the central monitor is first turned on and
central monitor. Otherwise, patient data will be periodically during operation, check that the red,
deleted and the storage device and data in the yellow, cyan and green alarm indicator lamps
storage device may be damaged. light and sound is generated.

1. GENERAL
Transmitter
WARNING
The following actions must be taken to properly
receive the transmitter signal of the correct
patient on the receiving instrument. Otherwise,
there may be signal loss or signals may mix
causing a serious accident, such as monitoring a
different patient.
• Assign a channel administrator in the hospital
and only he or she should manage channel
assignment.
• The channel administrator must manage the
channels in the facility so that there is no signal
interference.
• When the transmitter channel is changed,
the channel administrator must check that
the channel on the receiving monitor is also
changed and the signal is properly received.
• The channel administrator must replace the
channel number label on the transmitter with
the new one after changing the channel.
Admission, Discharge and Changing the Receiving Channel
WARNING WARNING
Check that the channel number of the transmitter After admitting a patient at a bedside monitor,
corresponds to the receiving channel (the confirm that the patient is also admitted at the
channel displayed on the monitor screen). central monitor and that the central monitor starts
Otherwise, the central monitor monitors a monitoring the patient.
different patient.
CAUTION CAUTION
When admitting a new patient, first discharge the When you change the receiving channel to
previous patient and delete all data of the monitor a new patient, discharge the previous
previous patient. Otherwise, the data of the patient and admit a new patient. If you only
previous patient and new patient will be mixed change the channel and does not delete the
together. previous patient data, the data of the previous
patient and new patient will be mixed together
and it will cause misunderstanding of the patient
history.

1. GENERAL
1
CAUTION
When admitting a new patient, check that the
patient information is entered correctly.
Pause Monitoring
WARNING
When the bed is set to automatically resume
monitoring after pause, check that monitoring is
resumed at the central monitor when the pause
condition is ended. Monitoring might not resume
if there is network failure.
Changing Monitor
CAUTION CAUTION
Keep the current bedside monitor and the new If the monitoring bed is changed to a different
bedside monitor power on and connected to the monitor on a central monitor other than
network until the monitor is changed. Otherwise CNS-6201, the monitoring bed does not change
the patient data is lost. After changing the on this central monitor. Register the bed again on
monitor, confirm that the data and settings before this central monitor. Otherwise, the patient data
changing the monitor are displayed in the new might not be displayed or data of a different
monitor. patient may be displayed on this central monitor.
Patient Transfer and Bed Exchange
CAUTION CAUTION
Keep the source bedside monitor and the When transferring a patient, confirm the
destination bedside monitor power on and destination bed you want to transfer by the
connected to the network until the patient transfer message on the screen. If you select the wrong
or bed exchange is complete. Otherwise the destination bed, the patient data of the source
patient transfer or bed exchange fails and the bed overwrites the patient data of the destination
data is lost. After transferring or exchanging the bed and the overwritten data cannot be
patient, confirm that the data before the patient recovered.
transfer or bed exchange can be displayed at the
destination bed.

1. GENERAL
Patient Transfer (When the destination bed’s data is

CAUTION saved on a central monitor other than CNS-6201)
After patient transfer, settings other than patient
information and alarm settings are returned to the
CAUTION
default settings. Change the settings if necessary.
If there are too many patient transfers, old review
data might not be displayed on the central
monitor.
Recorder Unit
CAUTION
Do not touch the thermal head inside the
recorder unit. The thermal head may be damaged
by static electricity or become dirty and cause
printing failure.
Remote Controller
WARNING
• Keep the batteries away from fire. They may
explode.
• Keep the batteries away from patients.
• Never short-circuit the + and – terminals on the
battery. It may cause overheating and fire.
• Do not damage, disassemble, drop or give
impact to the battery.
CAUTION
• Set the remote control channel on the monitor
to prevent the remote control from operating a
different monitor.
• When several monitors are installed close
together, check that the remote control
operates only the desired monitor. If the remote
control operates a different monitor, recheck the
channel setting.

1. GENERAL
Alarm 1
WARNING WARNING
When alarm is suspended at the transmitter, all When the [Communication Loss Alarm] is set to
alarms are turned off for that transmitter. Be [Only Message], there will be no communication
careful when you suspend the alarm. loss alarm. When it is set to [Only Message],
always pay careful attention to the
communication status.
WARNING WARNING
When admitting a new patient, confirm alarm When an alarm occurs:
settings. Also check the alarm settings during • Check the patient first and take necessary
monitoring and change the settings according to measure to ensure patient’s safety.
the patient condition. For a bed monitored • Remove the cause of the alarm.
through a multiple patient receiver, the alarm • Check the alarm settings on the central monitor
settings change to the [Alarm Master 1] settings and change the alarm settings if necessary.
in the following cases:
• When the bed is discharged
WARNING
• When you touch the [Delete Data] key on the
Do not diagnose a patient based on only the
Admit/Discharge window
alarm information of the central monitor. An alarm
• When you delete all data of the bed when the
may not be indicated due to alarm level or alarm
receiving channel is changed
on/off setting and critical changes on the patient
may be overlooked.
WARNING WARNING
A physician must be within the range where he/ If more than one medical equipment is used
she can hear the alarm sound of the central together in the same facility, make sure all
monitor while monitoring a patient on the central equipments have the same alarm default settings
monitor. If the physician cannot hear the alarm (alarm master). If the medical equipments have
sound, critical changes on the patient may be different alarm default settings and when
overlooked. initialized, the alarm settings differ with the other
equipments and alarm cannot be managed
appropriately in the facility. If using different alarm
default settings according to areas or wings in the
facility, manage the alarms appropriately.

1. GENERAL
CAUTION CAUTION
When the alarm limit is set to [OFF], there will be When the [Communication Loss Alarm] in the
no alarm for that limit. Be careful when you set [Single Sound] mode is silenced, an alarm for the
the alarm limit to [OFF]. same alarm condition does not occur again while
communication is still lost. In [Single Sound]
mode, always pay careful attention to the
CAUTION
communication status.
When the alarm is turned [OFF] for an
arrhythmia, there will be no alarm for that
arrhythmia type. There is no message or icon to
indicate that a certain arrhythmia alarm is turned
off. Therefore, be careful when you turn off an
arrhythmia alarm.
CAUTION CAUTION
When receiving bedside monitor data through a While the “SIGNAL LOSS” message is displayed,
ZB-800P, ZB-900P or ZS-900P transmitter, check parameters are not monitored and the alarms do
the alarm settings on the bedside monitor and not function. Check the transmitter and
central monitor. The alarm setting information of communication status and remove the cause.
the bedside monitor is not transmitted.
CAUTION CAUTION
When monitoring SpO2 only, arrhythmia and When monitoring SpO2 only, do not set upper/
asystole are not detected. The transmitter does lower limit alarms for PR and SpO2 to OFF on the
not monitor ECG if the electrode lead is not receiving monitor. Even when the lower limit
connected. Arrhythmia analysis, such as alarm is not set to OFF, PR and SpO2 alarms do
ASYSTOLE, V FIB or V TACHY, is not performed not occur if there is no pulse on a patient. In this
and arrhythmia alarms do not occur. Also, upper/ case, “---” is displayed for PR and SpO2 on the
lower limit alarms related to SpO2 do not occur transmitter display and a technical alarm such as
when the transmitter cannot detect pulse wave CANNOT DETECT PULSE or SpO2 CHECK
properly due to asystole. When ECG is needed to PROBE occurs on the receiving monitor.
be measured, monitor ECG.
CAUTION
When the “CONNECTOR OFF” message
appears on the screen, check that the connection
cords are connected to the sockets properly. The
patient cannot be monitored and the alarm does
not function while this message is displayed.

1. GENERAL
ECG Monitoring 1
WARNING WARNING
Turn the pacing pulse detection* to [ON] when Even when the pacing pulse detection is set to
monitoring a pacemaker patient. Otherwise the [ON], the pacemaker pulse can be overlooked or
pacemaker pulse is not rejected. However, even detected as QRS. You cannot confirm the
when the pacing pulse detection is set to [ON], pacemaker operation only from the detected
the pacemaker pulse might not be rejected. When pacemaker pulse.
the pacemaker pulse is not rejected, the
pacemaker pulse is detected as QRS and false
WARNING
heart rate may be indicated or critical arrhythmia
For arrhythmia monitoring, set [Arrhythmia
such as asystole may be overlooked. Keep
Analysis] on the ECG window to [ON]. Otherwise,
pacemaker patients under close observation.
there is no sound or indication for arrhythmia
* For the pacemaker pulse rejection capability, refer to the alarms (except for ASYSTOLE).
operator’s manual of the monitoring device.
WARNING WARNING
It is not possible to obtain 100% accurate The monitor requires a minimum of 2 minutes of
detection of every arrhythmia. continuous analysis before A-FIB can be
detected. Detection may take up to 2.5 minutes.
CAUTION CAUTION
When the [ECG Measurement] is [OFF], ECG The central monitor does not perform ECG
alarms do not occur even if each ECG alarm item is analysis. Therefore, the QRS sync sound at the
set to [ON]. central monitor might not synchronize with the
patient’s actual QRS during pacing or when
complicated arrhythmias occur.
CAUTION CAUTION
If there is any doubt about the arrhythmia The QRS sound at the central monitor has a time
analysis, make the monitor relearn the patient’s delay of several seconds because of network
ECG and check that the dominant QRS is connection.
appropriate. Otherwise, an important arrhythmia
may be overlooked.
CAUTION CAUTION
• Although the ST algorithm has been tested When the full disclosure waveform is expanded in
for accuracy of the ST analysis result, the actual size, steep slopes such as QRS may be
significance of the ST level changes need to be distorted because it has been compressed then
determined only by a physician. expanded. When reading the expanded ECG
• The ECG from transmitters other than ZM waveforms, be aware of this distortion.
series is not processed by a 3.2 second
time constant filter. Therefore, the ST level
measurement of other transmitters is not
designed to be accurate enough for diagnosis.
Do not rely on this ST level measurement.

1. GENERAL
CAUTION CAUTION
At the start of ECG monitoring, check that the When the “CHECK LEADS” message is
correct patient type is set for QRS Detection displayed, ECG is not monitored properly and the
Type. If an inappropriate patient type is set, heart ECG alarm does not function. Check the
rate cannot be counted accurately and noise or P electrode, electrode leads and connection cord,
waves may be counted as QRS and cardiac and if necessary, replace with new ones.
arrest may be overlooked.
CAUTION
When the “NOISE” or “CANNOT ANALYZE”
message is displayed, ECG data and alarm are
not reliable. Remove the cause by checking the
electrodes, electrode leads, patient’s body
movement, EMG and peripheral instruments
grounding. Also check that no electric blanket is
used.
Respiration Measurement
CAUTION
When measuring respiration by impedance
method and [Impedance Respiration
Measurement] on the RESP window is set to
[OFF], respiration alarms do not occur even if
each respiration alarm item is set to [ON].
SpO2 Monitoring
CAUTION CAUTION
When the probe is attached on an appropriate The sensitivity of the pulse waveform measured
site with sufficient circulation and an error by a ZM-930P transmitter is automatically
message about probe attachment repeatedly changed inside the transmitter. When the
appears, the probe may be deteriorated. Replace sensitivity is changed, the waveform becomes flat
it with a new one. for about one second.

1. GENERAL
NIBP Measurement 1
WARNING
When performing long term measurement at
intervals less than 2.5 minutes, perform
measurements while observing the state of the
patient, blood vessels and limb to ensure
adequate circulation. Congestion may occur at
the measurement site. When performing periodic
measurement for a long time, periodically check
the circulation condition.
CAUTION
Before you remotely start and stop NIBP
measurement from the central monitor, confirm
the state of the patient at the bedside monitor.
Carefully start and stop NIBP measurement from
the central monitor.
Temperature Monitoring
CAUTION
The ZB-800P, ZB-900P and ZS-900P transmitters
can only transmit temperature data from 5 to
45°C (41 to 113°F). Be careful when reading the
value.
CO2 Monitoring
CAUTION CAUTION
When receiving CO2 data from a bedside monitor When the “CHECK SENSOR” message is
through a ZB-800P, ZB-900P or ZS-900P displayed, check the CO2 sensor kit and replace it
transmitter, if a measured value is out of the if necessary. CO2 cannot be monitored while the
range of the central monitor, only the maximum message is displayed.
value is displayed. Be careful when reading the
value.

1. GENERAL
Extended Units
WARNING WARNING
When using the Extended Units setting, the When using the Extended Units, before you
following parameter unit settings only affect the perform the patient transfer, make sure that all
individual bedside monitor, not on all monitors unit settings on the source and destination beds
connected to the network. The unit settings must are set to the same units. If the unit settings differ
be the same on all bedside monitors and central between the beds, the alarm settings may
monitors in the network. Otherwise, different change and cause incorrect measurement on the
measurement values and alarms will be destination bed.
displayed on different monitors depending on the
unit settings on each monitor.
• CO2 Unit
• Respiration Unit
• tcPO2/tcPCO2 Unit
WARNING WARNING
The CO2 Unit setting only affects the individual When using the Extended Units, before you
central monitor, not on all monitors connected to change a monitor for a patient, make sure that all
the network. The CO2 unit must be the same on unit settings on the source and destination
all bedside monitors and central monitors in the monitors are set to the same units. If the unit
network. Otherwise, different CO2 values and CO2 settings differ between the monitors, the alarm
alarms will be displayed on different monitors settings may change and cause incorrect
depending on the unit setting on each monitor. measurement on the destination monitor.
WARNING WARNING
The Respiration Unit setting only affects the The tcPO2/tcPCO2 Unit setting only affects the
individual central monitor, not on all monitors individual central monitor, not on all monitors
connected to the network. The respiration unit connected to the network. The tcPO2/tcPCO2 unit
must be the same on all bedside monitors and must be the same on all bedside monitors and
central monitors in the network. Otherwise, central monitors in the network. Otherwise,
different respiration values and respiration alarms different tcPO2/tcPCO2 values and tcPO2/tcPCO2
will be displayed on different monitors depending alarms will be displayed on different monitors
on the unit setting on each monitor. depending on the unit setting on each monitor.
CAUTION CAUTION
When using the Extended Units, you cannot set When using the Extended Units setting, do not
the following vital sign alarm limits and alarm connect the monitor which does not have
master settings on the central monitor. Extended Units setting.
• ETCO2
• FiCO2
• tcPO2/tcPCO2

1. GENERAL
Transport Function 1
WARNING WARNING
When using the transport function: When using the transport function, use 10
• Do not connect or disconnect the network cable BASE-T/100 BASE-TX switching hubs for the
from the bedside monitors and central monitor. entire network. If you use another type of hub, the
• Do not perform the following operations on the network may intermittently lose connection and
bedside monitor which is being monitored and the patient cannot be monitored on the central
whose data is saved by the central monitor. monitor.
Patient data may be mixed together or lost in
the following cases:
- Removing the input unit while the bedside
monitor power is off.
- Using transport function and wireless LAN at
the same time.
CAUTION
Do not remove the input unit from the bedside
monitor while the central monitor is receiving data
from the bedside monitor. The data may be lost.
Maintenance
CAUTION CAUTION
Before maintenance, cleaning or disinfection, turn Restart the central monitor once every three
the central monitor power off and disconnect the months. Otherwise operation becomes unstable
power cord from the AC socket. Failure to follow and monitoring may stop. While restarting,
this instruction may result in electrical shock and patients monitored by the central monitor must be
central monitor malfunction. monitored by alternate instruments such as
bedside monitors.
CAUTION CAUTION
During maintenance and servicing, patients Never disassemble or repair the central monitor.
monitored by the central monitor must be Disassembly and repair must be performed by
monitored by alternate instruments such as qualified service personnel. When there is any
bedside monitors. abnormality, contact your Nihon Kohden
representative.

1. GENERAL
CAUTION CAUTION
Do the regular inspection twice a year. Otherwise, Dispose of Nihon Kohden products according to
a decrease and loss in function will not be your local laws and your facility’s guidelines for
noticed and this results in incorrect monitoring. waste disposal. Otherwise, it may affect the
environment. If there is a possibility that the
product may have been contaminated with
infection, dispose of it as medical waste
according to your local laws and your facility’s
guidelines for medical waste. Otherwise, it may
cause infection.

Section 2 Panel and Parts Descriptions 2
Central Monitor Composition................................................................................................................................ 2.2

PU-621R Central Monitor Processing Unit........................................................................................................... 2.3
Front Panel of Type I................................................................................................................................... 2.3
Rear Panel of Type I................................................................................................................................... 2.3
Front Panel of Type II.................................................................................................................................. 2.4
Rear Panel of Type II.................................................................................................................................. 2.4
LCD Display (Locally Purchased Display)............................................................................................................ 2.5
YL-611P or YL-612P Alarm Indicator................................................................................................................... 2.6
WS-960P Recorder Unit....................................................................................................................................... 2.7
Front Panel................................................................................................................................................. 2.7
Rear Panel................................................................................................................................................. 2.7
RY-910PA Remote Controller............................................................................................................................... 2.8
Laser Printer (Network Printer)............................................................................................................................. 2.9

2. PANEL AND PARTS DESCRIPTIONS
This section explains the name of each component and its description.
Central Monitor Composition
For components other than below, refer to each manual.
CNS-6201 Central Monitor

PU-621R
LCD Display (local purchase)
Central Monitor Processing Unit
Type I Type II
YS-098P1/YS-098P2
YL-611P/YL-612P Alarm Indicator WS-960P Recorder Unit
Additional Alarm Indicator Unit
RY-910PA Remote Controller
WARNING
While the central monitor is on, do not connect any external devices
such as USB memory. Nihon Kohden does not warrant the normal
operation of the central monitor if an application or software
installation starts automatically.
CAUTION
While the central monitor is on, do not touch unused sockets or cables
connected to the sockets. Failure to follow this instruction may damage
the central monitor by static electricity and cause malfunction.


2
Front Panel of Type I
1
2
3
4
5
6
Rear Panel of Type I
7 8 9 10
17 6 16 15 14 13 12 11
1 Power button 1: Connects to the TOUCH 11 Power connector

Press to start the CNS-6201 system connector on the LCD display Connects to a wall AC outlet using
program. (second display). the power cord to supply AC to
2 Power LED 2: Connects to the mouse. the PU-621R Central Monitor
Lights when the unit is in 3 to 5: Connects to the bar code Processing Unit.
operation. Turns off when the unit reader and other units. 12 LINE-IN connector
is not in operation. 7 DVI connector Not used.
3 HDD access LED Connects to the DVI connector on 13 LINE-OUT connector
Lights when the hard disk is the LCD display (main display). Connects to the SOUND connector
accessed. 8 Analog VGA connector on the LCD display (main display).
4 Alarm LED Connects to the RGB connector on 14 MIC-IN connector
Not used. the LCD display (second display). Not used.
5 Reset button 9 COM1 and COM2 connectors 15 PS/2 mouse connector
Restarts the internal system of PU- Connects to the alarm indicator Connects to the PS/2 connector on
621R Central Monitor Processing and recorder unit. the YL-611P or YL-612P Alarm
Unit. 1: Connects to the COM connector Indicator.
on the YL-611P or YL-612P
6 USB0, USB1, USB2, USB3, Alarm Indicator. 16 PS/2 keyboard connector
USB4 and USB5 connectors 2: Connect to the RECORDER Connects to the PS/2 keyboard.
Connects to the LCD display, connector on the WS-960P 17 LAN0, LAN1 and LAN2
mouse or bar code reader. Recorder Unit. connectors
0: Connects to the TOUCH Connects to the network system.
10 Main power switch
connector on the LCD display 0: Connects to monitor network.
Turn on or off to supply power to
(main display). 1: Not used.
the main unit.
2: Connects to the hospital
network.

Front Panel of Type II

12 3
6 5 4
Rear Panel of Type II 7 8 9 10 11
12
13
18 17 16 15 7 14 6
1 Status LED 0: Connects to the TOUCH 10 Power connector

Lights in green when the unit is connector on the LCD display Connects to a wall AC outlet using
in operation (RUN status). Lights (main display). the power cord to supply AC to
in orange when the unit is turned 1: Connects to the TOUCH the PU-621R Central Monitor
on but not in operation, or when connector on the LCD display Processing Unit.
shutdown fails, or when the unit (second display). 11 Main power switch
stopped because of error (STOP 2: Connects to the mouse. Turn on or off to supply power to
status). Turns off when the main 3 to 7: Connects to the bar code the main unit.
power is off or during standby. reader and other units.
7 COM1, COM2 and COM4 12 LINE-IN connector
2 Alarm LED Not used.
Not used. connectors
Connects to an alarm indicator or 13 LINE-OUT connector
3 HDD access/Standby LED recorder unit. Connects to the SOUND connector
Lights in orange when the unit is 1: Connects to the COM connector on the LCD display (main display).
in standby (when only the main on the YL-611P or YL-612P
power is on). Lights in green 14 DVI-I connector
Alarm Indicator. Connects to the DVI connector on
when the unit is accessing the 2: Connect to the RECORDER
HDD. Turns off when the power the LCD display (second display).
connector on the WS-960P
is shut down or when the unit is in Recorder Unit. 15 DVI-D connector
operation. 4: Not used. Connects to the DVI connector on
4 Reset button the LCD display (main display).
8 RAS Connector
Restarts the internal system of Not used. 16 PS/2 mouse connector
PU-621R Central Monitor Connects to the PS/2 connector on
Processing Unit. 9 LAN1, LAN2 and LAN3 the YL-611P or YL-612P Alarm
5 Power button connectors Indicator.
Press to start the CNS-6201 system Connects to the network system.
1: Connects to monitor network. 17 Display port
program. Not used.
2: Not used.
6 USB0, USB1, USB2, USB3, 3: Connects to the hospital 18 PS/2 keyboard connector
USB4, USB5, USB6 and USB7 network. Connects to the PS/2 keyboard.
connectors
Connects to the LCD display,
mouse or bar code reader.

LCD Display (Locally Purchased Display)

2
For a display, locally purchase either of the following:
• ET2400L-8CJM-1-RMJC-G display from Elo Touch Solutions
• ET2403LM-2CWA-1-MT-W-WH-NS-CL-RMJC display from Elo Touch
Solutions
NOTE
The specified models may be changed without notice. Contact your Nihon
Kohden representative when you purchase a display.
Example: ET2400L-8CJM-1-RMJC-G display
WARNING
Do not turn off the display to which the speaker cable is connected.
The alarm sound cannot be heard.

YL-611P or YL-612P Alarm Indicator
1 2
1 Alarm indicator 4 COM connector

Blinks or lights when an alarm is activated. Blinks with Connects to the COM1 connector on the PU-621R
sync sounds. Central Monitor Processing Unit.
2 Remote control sensor 5 PS/2 connector
Receives signals from the remote control. Connects to the PS/2 mouse connector on the PU-621R
3 Alarm indicator cable Central Monitor Processing Unit.
The cable length depends on the alarm indicator model.
YL-611P: 2.5 m
YL-612P: 5 m
When YS-098P1 or YS-098P2 Additional Alarm Indicator Unit is Connected

1 2
1 Alarm indicator
2 Additional Alarm Indicator Unit
The cable length depends on the Additional Alarm
Indicator Unit model.
YS-098P1: 2.5 m
YS-098P2: 5 m


2
Front Panel Rear Panel

1
4
2
3
Rear Panel 1 Recorder release lever

Move the lever in the direction of the arrow ( ) to
release the lock.
2 Recorder
Contains the recording paper.
3 Error lamp
Blinks when out of paper. Lights when the recorder door
is open.
Front Panel 4 Recorder unit connector
Connects to the COM2 connector on the PU-621R
Central Monitor Processing Unit.

6
11
POWER
1 7
2 MENU/HOME
SILENCE
ALARMS
8
DISPLAY 10
SELECT CHANNEL
3
1 Power button 7 LED

Not available. Lights when the pointer on the screen is moved by the
2 MENU/HOME key selection knob. Blinks when a key on the remote control
Not available. is pressed.
3 DISPLAY SELECT key 8 SILENCE ALARMS key
Not available. Not available.
4 Display 9 Customized keys
Displays the channel number and the display number. Not available.
5 Strap hole 10 CHANNEL keys
Use a strap to prevent dropping the remote control. Select the monitor when a channel is assigned to the
monitor.
6 Selection knob
Move this knob up, down, left or right to move the 11 ENTER key
cursor or mouse pointer on the screen. Registers the setting selected on the screen.

Laser Printer (Network Printer)

2
Use the laser printer that Nihon Kohden recommends. Connect to the network
when you use the network printer. Refer to the printer manual together.
Recommended laser printer: Hewlett Packard, LaserJet P3015dn

Hewlett Packard, LaserJet 4100n
Hewlett Packard, LaserJet 4250n
Hewlett Packard, LaserJet P4015n
Hewlett Packard, LaserJet P4515n
Hewlett Packard, LaserJet Enterprise 600 M602
Hewlett Packard, LaserJet Enterprise 600 M604n
Hewlett Packard, LaserJet Enterprise M605dn
Hewlett Packard, LaserJet Enterprise M608dn
The recommended model may be changed without notice. Contact your Nihon
Kohden representative when you locally purchase a laser printer.

Section 3 Preparation
3
Installation Conditions.......................................................................................................................................... 3.3

Connecting the Central Monitor to Other Instruments and Systems.................................................................... 3.4
Connecting the Monitor to Other Instruments............................................................................................ 3.4
Standard Instruments....................................................................................................................... 3.4
Optional Instruments........................................................................................................................ 3.4
Connecting to a Network System......................................................................................................................... 3.5
Flowchart Before Starting Monitoring................................................................................................................... 3.6
Loading the Recording Paper............................................................................................................................... 3.7
Handling the Recording Paper................................................................................................................... 3.7
Loading the Recording Paper..................................................................................................................... 3.7
Loading Paper in the WS-960P Recorder Unit........................................................................................... 3.8
Loading Paper in the Laser Printer............................................................................................................. 3.8
Preparing the Remote Control.............................................................................................................................. 3.9
Installing the Batteries................................................................................................................................ 3.9
Setting the Remote Control...................................................................................................................... 3.10
Setting the Remote Control Channel............................................................................................. 3.10
Attaching the Remote Control Channel Label to the Central Monitor...................................................... 3.10
Turning the Power On or Off............................................................................................................................... 3.11
Preparation Before Power On................................................................................................................... 3.11
Turning the Central Monitor Processing Unit Power On........................................................................... 3.11
Turning the Power Off............................................................................................................................... 3.12
Turning the Power Off with the Touch Key...................................................................................... 3.12
Preparation After Turning the Power On............................................................................................................. 3.13
Changing Settings on the System Setup Screen..................................................................................... 3.13
Before Starting Monitoring....................................................................................................................... 3.14
Daily Check........................................................................................................................................................ 3.15
Check Before Turning On the Monitor...................................................................................................... 3.15
Check After Turning On the Monitor and During Monitoring..................................................................... 3.15
Check After or Before Turning Off the Monitor......................................................................................... 3.16

3. PREPARATION
This section explains preparation such as loading recording paper, turning power
on or off before starting monitoring and check items.

3. PREPARATION
Installation Conditions
Installation must be done by authorized personnel. Refer to the “General 3

Requirements for Connecting Medical Electrical Systems” in the Administrator’s
Guide. Install the central monitor according to the basic installation conditions
below.
Install the central monitor where the screen can be seen clearly and does not
reflect light.
WARNING
Install the central monitor outside the patient
environment. If the central monitor are installed
inside the patient environment, the patient or
operator may receive electrical shock or injury.
For installation, contact your Nihon Kohden
representative.
CAUTION CAUTION
Do not install the monitor where it will be exposed Avoid exposing the monitor to direct sunlight.
to water or chemical solutions. Avoid direct Otherwise, the temperature rises and it causes
sprinkling, spray or moist air from the nebulizer or malfunction and shortens the life of the monitor.
humidifier. These cause malfunction and shorten
the life of the monitor.
CAUTION CAUTION
Make sure that there is enough space between Do not place blankets or cloth over the monitor. It
the monitor and the wall for adequate ventilation. may affect monitoring.
Otherwise the internal temperature of the monitor
rises, which leads to inaccurate operation and
CAUTION
shortens the monitor life.
Do not install the monitor in a dusty area.
• Leave more than 5 cm of space between the
wall and vent holes on the sides and rear
panels of the monitor. CAUTION
• When the monitor is surrounded, leave more Connect the power cord to an AC outlet which
than 10 cm of space above the monitor can supply sufficient AC current to the monitor.
for ventilation. Do not let the surrounding The monitor cannot function properly with low
temperature exceed 35°C (95°F) during current. Also the breaker trips and it causes
operation. electric power failure.
CAUTION CAUTION
When there is any problem with the monitor, turn Do not place cables in the way or where people
off the power immediately and disconnect the walk.
power cord from the AC outlet. Take the monitor
out of service and check for damage.

3. PREPARATION
Connecting the Central Monitor to Other Instruments and

Systems
CAUTION CAUTION
Connect only the specified instrument to the Before connecting or disconnecting instruments,
central monitor and follow the specified make sure that each instrument is turned off and
procedure. Failure to follow this instruction may the power cord is disconnected from the AC
result in electrical shock or injury to the operator, socket. Otherwise, the patient or operator may
and cause fire or instrument malfunction. receive electrical shock or injury.
NOTE
Connection must be done by an authorized personnel in your hospital.
Connecting the Monitor to Other Instruments

The central monitor system composition is as follows. For the procedure, refer to
the Administrator’s Guide.
Standard Instruments
• PU-621R Central Monitor Processing Unit
• LCD display (Nihon Kohden specified display)
• YL-611P or YL-612P Alarm Indicator
• WS-960P Recorder Unit
• Keyboard
• Mouse
Optional Instruments
• LS2208 Bar code reader
• RY-910PA Remote Controller
• Laser printer (Nihon Kohden specified printer)
• Bedside monitor

3. PREPARATION
Connecting to a Network System
For the procedure, refer to the Administrator’s Guide. 3
The connection method and grounding method depends on the location where
the central monitor is installed and the types and installation locations of other
instruments.
NOTE
Connection must be done by authorized personnel in your hospital.
For network connection, refer to the Network and System Installation Guide
which is available from your Nihon Kohden representative.
The connection must comply with IEC 60601-1-1 “General Requirements for
Safety of Medical Electrical Equipment”. Refer to the “General Requirements
for Connecting Medical Electrical Systems” in Section 17.
WARNING
Connect the central monitor to the network as specified in the
Network and System Installation Guide. Otherwise the patient and
operator may receive electrical shock or injury. To connect the
network, contact your Nihon Kohden representative.

3. PREPARATION
Flowchart Before Starting Monitoring
NOTE
System and network connection, hospital installation conditions, default
settings and system setup settings that meet the specifications must be
managed by authorized personnel and a system administrator in your
hospital.
Start monitoring after the following procedure.
For system and network connection and system setup settings for administrator,
refer to the Administrator’s Guide.
1. Installing the instruments and connecting the central monitor to the network.
Refer to the Administrator’s Guide.
2. Loading the recording paper.

Load the recording paper when the optional WS-960P Recorder Unit is used.
Refer to “Loading the Recording Paper” in this section.
3. Preparing the RY-910PA Remote Controller.

Prepare the RY-910PA Remote Controller as needed.
Refer to “Preparing the Remote Control” in this section.
4. Turning the power on.

Turn on the power of the central monitor processing unit and other
instruments in the system.
Refer to “Turning the Power On or Off” in this section.
5. Setting the system setup settings.

Set the necessary system setup settings such as Monitor Setting.
Refer to Section 13 and Administrator’s Guide.
6. Admitting patients.
Refer to “Admitting a Patient” in Section 4.
7. Settings for each bed.

Set the Personal Setup, Parameter Setup and Other Setup for each bed.
8. Start monitoring.

3. PREPARATION
Loading the Recording Paper
Handling the Recording Paper 3
CAUTION
Avoid high humidity, high temperature, direct sunlight and direct
fluorescent light when storing recording paper. Otherwise the paper
may discolor. Store the recording paper in a dry, cool place.
Loading the Recording Paper
CAUTION CAUTION
Clean the head surface with the provided head Do not touch the recording head with any hard
cleaner pen before loading new paper. After a object. If the head is tapped with a hard object, it
period of usage, paper dust may accumulate may crack and the heater element wire may
between the paper and the head surface so good short-circuit.
printing cannot be obtained.
NOTE
• Only use the specified recording paper, FQW50-2-100.
• Do not allow the paper to contact paste, adhesive agent, oil-based felt
pen tips or diazo process (ditto/spirit) copying paper. These discolor the
paper surface.
• Do not allow the paper to contact any materials containing vinyl
chloride, plastic eraser, adhesive tape, fluorescent felt tip pen, or
cinnabar seal ink because these discolor the recorded waveforms and
data.
• Do not apply strong pressure to the paper. Rubbing or scratching
discolors the paper surface.

3. PREPARATION
Loading Paper in the WS-960P Recorder Unit

When the optional WS-960P Recorder Unit is connected to the central monitor
processing unit, load recording paper according to the following procedure.
1. Move the recorder release lever in the direction of the arrow (▲) to release
the lock.
Recorder release lever
2. Open the recorder door.
CAUTION
Do not touch the thermal head inside the recorder unit. The
thermal head may be damaged by static electricity or become dirty
and cause printing failure.
3. Draw out one page of paper toward you.

Load the recording paper inside the recorder so that the detection mark
(small black square on corner) of the paper is on the right side.
NOTE
• Load the recording paper so that the detection mark of the paper
is on the right side.
• When the [Recording Start Position] is set to [From Mark] on the
Recording of the System Setup screen, feed the paper to the
Detection mark
mark position before starting the recording. Refer to “Recording”
in Section 6-1 of the Administrator’s Guide.
4. Close the recorder door.
Loading Paper in the Laser Printer

Refer to the printer manual.

3. PREPARATION
Preparing the Remote Control
NOTE 3
• Watch the screen and check the operation when using the remote
control to avoid wrong operation.
• Make sure that the remote control is handled appropriately.
Installing the Batteries

When the monitor cannot operate by remote control or the remote control
distance becomes short, the battery may be deteriorated. Change the battery with
new one. Use two AAA alkaline batteries and change the two batteries at the
same time.
WARNING WARNING
• Keep the batteries away from fire. They may If the battery is damaged and the substance
explode. inside the battery contacts the eyes or skin, wash
• Keep the batteries away from patients. immediately and thoroughly with water and see a
• Never short-circuit the + and – terminals on the physician. Never rub your eyes, because you may
battery. It may cause overheating and fire. lose your eyesight.
• Do not damage, disassemble, drop or give
impact to the battery.
1. Remove the battery cover on the rear panel of the remote control as shown.
2. Insert two new AAA alkaline batteries into the remote control observing the
correct polarity.
NOTE
Insert the (–) end of the battery first and press it against the spring.
If you try to force the (+) end of the battery in first as shown, it will
deform the spring and damage the battery and remote controller.
Spring Spring

3. PREPARATION
3. Reattach the battery cover.
NOTE
• Remove the battery from the remote controller when not using it.
• Check with your local solid waste officials for details in your area for
recycling options or proper disposable.
• Take care not to drop or lose the remote controller.
Setting the Remote Control

Set the remote control channel on [Remote Controller] of the System Setup
screen after turning on the power if necessary.
Setting the Remote Control Channel

One remote control can operate up to nine monitors by changing channels. The
remote control channel must be set to the correct monitor.
The infrared light emitted from the remote control has wide directivity and it
may reflect off the ceiling and wall and operate other monitors.
The remote control channel sets on the remote controller setting. Refer to the
CAUTION
• Set the remote control channel on the monitor to prevent the
remote control from operating a different monitor.
• When several monitors are installed close together, check that the
remote control operates only the desired monitor. If the remote
control operates a different monitor, recheck the channel setting.
Attaching the Remote Control Channel Label to the Central Monitor

After setting the remote control channel on the monitor, attach the remote control
channel label to the display. The channel label is a standard accessory of the
remote controller.
Channel label

3. PREPARATION
Turning the Power On or Off
Preparation Before Power On 3

Refer to the Administrator’s Guide and confirm that the system installation and
connection are properly done. Prepare instruments in the system such as loading
the recording paper in the recorder.
Turning the Central Monitor Processing Unit Power On

1. Connect the power cord to the display to turn the power on. Refer to the
2. Press the Main power switch on the rear panel of the central monitor
processing unit to “ ” side to supply the power.
Type I Type II
3. Press the Power button on the front panel of the central monitor processing
unit to turn the power on. The alarm indicator and power LED (Type I) or
the status LED (Type II) on the central monitor processing unit lights.
Lamp lit Lamp lit
Type I Type II
Power button
Power button
Lamp lit
Lamp lit
The central monitor starts and the All Beds screen is displayed.
CAUTION
When the central monitor is first turned on and periodically during
operation, check that the red, yellow, cyan and green alarm indicator
lamps light and sound is generated.
NOTE
• It takes a few minutes for the LCD screen to reach full brightness.
• The shadow of the previous screen may remain for a few minutes after
changing screens.
• There may be some dots on the LCD screen which are always on or
always off, but it does not affect monitoring. This is normal for all LCD
screens.
3. PREPARATION
Turning the Power Off
CAUTION
Follow the specified procedure to turn off the central monitor.
Otherwise, patient data will be deleted and the storage device and
data in the storage device may be damaged.
The power can be turned off by pressing and holding the Power button on the
PU-621R Central Monitor Processing Unit.
NOTE
Data before the patient transfer is saved in the source central monitor. To
observe the data before the patient transfer, keep the power of the source
central monitor on.
Turning the Power Off with the Touch Key

1. Touch [Menu] on the left lower corner of the screen → [System Setup] to
display the Information window of the System Setup screen.
When [System Setup] is assigned to one of the all beds function keys,
the Information window of the System Setup screen can be displayed by
touching the function key. Refer to “Function Keys Setting” in Section 6-1
of the Administrator’s Guide to assign a function to the function key.
2. Keep touching [POWER OFF] for five seconds until the countdown ends to
turn the central monitor power off.
3. Turn the other instruments power off.

Turn the printer (network printer) power off as needed.

3. PREPARATION
Preparation After Turning the Power On
Changing Settings on the System Setup Screen 3

Set necessary settings on the System Setup screen.
NOTE
The shaded settings need an administrator password to access. These
settings must be set by authorized personnel in your hospital.
Setting Window Setting Items Refer to

Sound Control Alarm sound volume, QRS sound settings (on or off, tone,
Section 13
current bed, volume)
Recording Recording time, Recording start position, Manual recording
mode, Periodic recording interval, Clock time
Report Review window items for report printing
System Composition Composition of the central monitor (system, alarm and alarm
events)
Monitor Setting Screen composition, Monitored beds, Display, Bed name
Parameter Setup Registering parameters (Select parameters which are
not currently measured to be displayed on setting keys),
Parameter display colors
Alarm Master Registering alarm conditions as an alarm master
Pre-registration Registering common information for the hospital
• Bed names
• Group names and colors
• Pause reasons and pause times
• ORG channel numbers
• Hospital names
ORG Setting Settings for the ORG-9100 Multiple Patient Receiver
GZ Setting Settings for the vital sign telemeter Administrator’s
Patient Attribute Read Bar code reader settings Guide
Setting
External Output RS-232C communication, HL7, Arrhythmia Recall Image
Output, MFER file output, and ECTP settings
Function Keys Assigning functions to individual and all beds function keys
Mouse Setting Settings for the mouse when operating several central
monitors with one mouse
Remote Controller Remote control channel
Group Names Registering CNS group name
Network Network settings
Date & Time Settings for date and time
NOTE
Changing this setting affects the entire network.
Maintenance Settings for the administrator password, Displaying monitored
beds information
Other Maintenance windows are protected by the
maintenance password.

3. PREPARATION
Before Starting Monitoring

Before starting monitoring of a patient, do the following preparation.
WARNING
When admitting a new patient, confirm alarm settings. Also check
the alarm settings during monitoring and change the settings
according to the patient condition. For a bed monitored through a
multiple patient receiver, the alarm settings change to the [Alarm
Master 1] settings in the following cases:
• When you touch the [Delete Data] key on the Admit/Discharge
window
• When you delete all data of the bed when the receiving channel is
changed
1. Admit a patient.
When you monitor a patient through a multiple patient receiver, set the
receiving channel. Refer to “Admitting a Patient” in Section 4.
2. Confirm alarm settings. Refer to “Setting Alarms” in Section 5.
3. Set the Personal Setup, Parameter Setup and Other Setup such as Recording
Setting as needed.
4. Checking the receiving condition of the multiple patient receiver.

Press the Call button on the transmitter to confirm that the signal from the
transmitter is correctly received at the central monitor.
5. Prepare the patient for measurement (electrode attachment and connection).

Refer to the operator’s manual of bedside monitors.

3. PREPARATION
Daily Check
Perform the following daily check before, during and after use of the instrument 3
and check that the instrument can be used normally and safely. If any problem is
detected, take the proper countermeasure according to the troubleshooting and
maintenance sections. If the instrument is suspected to be faulty as a result of
checking, attach an “Unusable” or “Repair request” label to the instrument and
contact your Nihon Kohden representative.
When there are not enough consumables, order the consumables from Nihon
Kohden.
Perform the regular inspection twice a year in addition to daily check. Check if
the instrument operates normally and change the parts which require periodic
replacement. For the regular inspection, refer to the Section 15 “Maintenance”.
Check Before Turning On the Monitor

Accessories
• Enough recording paper is in the recorder.
Connection and Settings

• Power cord is connected properly.
• Grounding lead is connected properly.
• The system is connected properly.
• Recording paper is in the recorder.
• The channel setting at the central monitor matches the transmitter channel.
(when using a multiple patient receiver)
• The transmitter battery is not weak.
Appearance
• No scratches, damage or dirt on the monitor.
• No damage to the switch, lamps and displays.*
• No damage to the power cord.
• The monitor is not in a wet place.
* Do not use anything sharp to touch the LCD screen (touch keys), power
switches and other keys. Sharp objects may damage the instrument.
Check After Turning On the Monitor and During Monitoring

Power On
• The power LED lights.
• There is no fire, smoke or smell.
• There is a test (beep) sound when the central monitor system starts.
• The red, yellow, cyan and green alarm indicator lamps light.

3. PREPARATION
• The monitor is not too hot. The monitor does not give an electric shock when
touched.
• No error message is displayed on the screen.
• The time on the screen is correct.
• The low battery icon for the transmitter does not appear on the
transmitter LCD display or central monitor screen when using a multiple
patient receiver.
• The monitor does not affect surrounding equipment.
Basic Operations
• The screen display is normal. (No abnormal brightness, distortion or color)
• The touch keys function properly.
• The keyboard, mouse and remote controller operate properly.
• Following alarm functions properly.
- The red, yellow, cyan and green alarm indicator lamps light.
- Alarm sound can be heard.
- Alarm sound volume setting is appropriate.
• When the CALL button on the transmitter is pressed within the specified range
of the central monitor, a message appears on the central monitor screen when
using a multiple patient receiver.
• The transmitter signal is properly displayed on the central monitor when using
a multiple patient receiver.
• Paper feeding is correct. (No crawling or catching)
• There is no trouble in recording. (No faint recording)
• No error display and malfunction during operation.
• Other instruments on the system operate normally.
CAUTION
When the central monitor is first turned on and periodically during
operation, check that the red, yellow, cyan and green alarm indicator
lamps light and sound is generated.
NOTE
After turning the monitor on and when admitting a patient on the monitor,
make sure that the time displayed at the upper right of the screen is
correct. The central monitor clock function uses the clock of the PC.
When the date or time is changed during monitoring, the date and time of
all stored data is also changed and may not match the date and time on
the printout.
For the date and time setting, refer to the Administrator’s Guide.
Check After or Before Turning Off the Monitor

Check the following items for the next use. When there are not enough
consumables, order the consumables from Nihon Kohden.

3. PREPARATION
Before Turning the Power Off

• Previous patient is discharged.
• Temporarily changed settings are changed back to the previous settings.
Check for Abnormal Conditions 3

• No abnormal condition during monitoring.
• There is no dirt, damage or scratches on the monitor.
Organization and Storage

• Accessories are organized.
• There are enough consumables, such as recording paper, for the next use.
• The power on the monitor and transmitter (when using a multiple patient
receiver) is turned off.
• Dead batteries are disposed of properly.
• When not using the remote control or transmitter for a long time when using
a multiple patient receiver, batteries are removed from the remote control or
transmitter.
• The monitor is not in a wet place.
• When the transmitter is wet, the moisture of the transmitter is removed and
completely dry. (when using a multiple patient receiver)
• The monitor and transmitter (when using a multiple patient receiver) are
stored properly.

Section 4 Admitting and Discharging
Patients
4
Admitting a Patient............................................................................................................................................... 4.2
Patient Information List............................................................................................................................... 4.5
Importing Patient Information from the Hospital Network........................................................................... 4.5
Entering Patient Information Using a Bar Code Reader............................................................................. 4.6
Replacing the Current Patient Information with Patient Information from a Bar Code Reader........ 4.7
Readmitting a Recently Discharged Patient............................................................................................... 4.9
Discharging a Patient......................................................................................................................................... 4.11
Pausing Monitoring of a Patient.......................................................................................................................... 4.14
Pause Timer............................................................................................................................................. 4.16
When the Bed Is Paused............................................................................................................... 4.17
Resume Monitoring.................................................................................................................................. 4.18
Transferring a Patient to a Different Bedside Monitor......................................................................................... 4.20
Transferred Data....................................................................................................................................... 4.20
Patient Information and Settings.................................................................................................... 4.20
Review Data................................................................................................................................... 4.20
Transfer Limitation.................................................................................................................................... 4.21
Transferring a Patient............................................................................................................................... 4.22
Moving Data from One Monitor to a Different Monitor........................................................................................ 4.25
Exchanging Two Beds........................................................................................................................................ 4.29
Changing the Receiving Channel Number......................................................................................................... 4.32

4. ADMITTING AND DISCHARGING PATIENTS
This section explains about admitting, discharging, pausing monitoring,

transferring a patient, central monitor change, bed exchange and receiving
channel settings.
Admitting a Patient
After turning on the central monitor, admit a patient on the Admit/Discharge

window. When admitting a patient, enter the patient information on this window.
You can enter the patient information with a bar code reader. Refer to “Entering
the Patient Information Using a Bar Code Reader” later in this section. The
central monitor starts monitoring after signal connection and central monitor
start-up is complete. You can also readmit a patient who was discharged within
the past 120 hours.
WARNING
After admitting a patient at a bedside monitor, confirm that the
patient is also admitted at the central monitor and that the central
monitor starts monitoring the patient.
CAUTION
When admitting a new patient, first discharge the previous patient
and delete all data of the previous patient. Otherwise, the data of the
previous patient and new patient will be mixed together.
CAUTION
When admitting a new patient, check that the patient information is
entered correctly.
CAUTION
At the start of ECG monitoring, check that the correct patient type is
set for QRS Detection Type. If an inappropriate patient type is set,
heart rate cannot be counted accurately and noise or P waves may
be counted as QRS and cardiac arrest may be overlooked.
NOTE
Patients can only be admitted for monitored beds whose data is saved in
this central monitor.
The default alarm setting when admitting is Alarm Master 1 of the bedside
monitor or Alarm Master 1 of the central monitor if the bed is monitored through
an ORG-9100 multiple patient receiver.

1. Touch [Admit] on the All Beds screen. The Admit/Discharge window is

displayed.
You can also display the Admit/Discharge window by the following

procedures.
• Touch [Admit/Discharge] on the Individual Bed window.
• Touch [ ] to display the Setup Menu. Touch [Admit Discharge] of
[Personal Setup].
• Touch [Admit/Discharge] individual function key if [Admit/Discharge]
is registered to an individual function key. For setting individual function
keys, refer to “Changing the All Beds Screen Display Settings” in Section
6.
2. Touch [Admit].
[Readmit]
Readmits a patient who
was discharged within the
past 120 hours.
3. A message to confirm admitting the patient appears.

Touch [Yes].
When [Patient Attribute Input Device] is set to [Bar Code Reader], the bar
code reader window is displayed after [OK] is touched on the message
window. Refer to “Entering the Patient Information Using a Bar Code
Reader” later in this section.

4. Enter the patient information by referring to the “Patient Information List”

on the next page.
The bed name registered at [Monitor Setting] → [Bed Name Setting] of

the System Setup screen is displayed. You can edit the bed name on this
window. The bed name can be edited if [Edit Bed Name to ORG] is set to
[ON] and the bed is monitored through an ORG-9100 series multiple patient
receiver and the bed’s data is saved in this central monitor.
Bed Name Receiving Channel

The bed name registered on the Displayed when the bed is Change Device
System Setup screen is displayed monitored through a multiple Changes the monitoring
even if the bed is not admitted. patient receiver. device of the bed.
[ ]
Touch to display the setting window of the
items that are set on the System Setup screen.
Touch [Keyboard] on the setting window to
display the keyboard entry window and enter
data.
You can enter characters from an optional

hard keyboard by touching the entry field.
[ ]
Touch to display the keyboard entry window.
Refer to “Using the Keyboard on the Screen”
in Section 1.
When the entry field is a [Bar Code Reader] [Synchronize with

key, touch the key to display Reads the patient HIS Server]
the setting window and information from the bar Imports the patient
change settings. code reader. information from the
hospital network.
5. Check the entered patient information.

Patient Information List
Item Description
Bed Name*1 Up to 10 alphanumeric characters
Group*1 Select from 10 groups and “None”.
Patient ID Up to 16 alphanumeric characters
Patient Name Up to 32 alphanumeric characters 4
Height*2 0.1 to 299.9 cm / 0 to 9 ft, 0.0 to 11.9 inch
Weight*2 0.1 to 449.9 kg / 0.1 to 654.9 lb
Automatically calculated when the height and weight are
BSA
entered.
Date of Birth YYYY-MM-DD
From 0 years 0 months to 127 years 11 months
Age*3 Automatically calculated when the date of birth is
entered. You can also enter the age manually.
Gender Male, Female, unknown
Blood Type A−, A+, B−, B+, AB−, AB+, O−, O+, unknown
Physician*1 Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
Up to 200 alphanumeric characters, up to 8 lines when
Diagnosis
inserting the line
Up to 20 alphanumeric characters, the line breaks can be
Note*4
entered.
*1 You can select from items registered at [Pre-registration] of the System Setup
screen.
*2 For the height and weight, you can change inch/cm and lb/kg at [System
Configuration] → [System] of the System Setup screen.
* When the bedside monitor in the network has day data, the day can be
3
synchronized.
*4 The note is displayed on the All Beds screen when [Monitor Setting] →
[Display Settings] → [All Beds Screen] → [Display Patient Name] of the
System Setup screen is set to [ON]. Even the [Display Patient Name] is set to
[ON]. The note is not displayed when 24 or 32 beds are displayed on the All
Beds screen.
Refer to “Pre-registration” and “System Configuration Settings” in Section 6-1 of

Importing Patient Information from the Hospital Network

You can automatically import the patient information such as patient name, date
of birth or gender from the hospital network.
This function is available when [Use QRY] of [QRY] on the [External Output]
→ [HL7] of the System Setup screen is set to [ON]. Refer to “External Output”
To use [Synchronize with HIS Server] to import the information, enter the patient
ID on the Admit/Discharge window.


displayed.
2. Touch [Admit]. A message to confirm admitting the patient appears.
3. Touch [OK].
4. Touch [Synchronize with HIS Server]. The patient information is

automatically import from the HIS server.
5. Check that the patient information is imported on the Admit/Discharge

window and the patient information is correct.
Data which is imported from the hospital network can be edited and added
manually.
Entering Patient Information Using a Bar Code Reader

You can enter the patient information such as patient ID, patient name, date of
birth or gender using a Symbol LS2208 bar code reader from Motorola, Inc.
Connect and set up the bar code reader beforehand. Refer to the Symbol LS2208
manual and Administrator’s Guide.
Set [Patient Attribute Read Device] → [Patient Attribute Read Setting] of the
System Setup screen to [Bar Code Reader] beforehand.

displayed.
2. Touch [Admit]. A message to confirm admitting the patient appears.

3. Touch [OK]. The Bar Code Reader window is displayed.
To cancel while entering the patient information, touch [Cancel] to close the
window.
4. Read the bar code with the bar code reader. To cancel entering the
information, touch [Cancel].
5. Confirm that the scanned information is displayed on the Bar Code Reader
window and touch [Apply]. To cancel entering the information, touch
[Cancel].
6. Confirm that the scanned information is displayed on the Admit/Discharge

window.
The data entered from the bar code reader can be added or changed manually.
Replacing the Current Patient Information with Patient Information

from a Bar Code Reader
You can replace current patient information of a patient with the patient
information from a bar code.
Set [Patient Attribute Read Device] → [Patient Attribute Read Setting] of the
System Setup screen to [Bar Code Reader] beforehand.

1. Touch the data area of the bed to change the patient information for. The
Individual Bed window is displayed. Touch [Admit/Discharge] to display the
Admit/Discharge window.
2. Touch [Bar Code Reader] on the Admit/Discharged window. The Bar Code
window is displayed.
1
3. Scan the bar code of the patient. The information from the bar code
overwrites the previous data. Other items are not changed.
4. Confirm that the scanned information is displayed on the Bar Code window
and touch [Apply]. To cancel changing the information, touch [Cancel].
5. Confirm the scanned information is displayed on the Admit/Discharged

window.
The data entered from the bar code reader can be added or changed manually.

Readmitting a Recently Discharged Patient

You can readmit a patient who was discharged within the past 120 hours. When
readmitting the patient, the patient information and review data is added to the
previous data before the discharge.
NOTE
• The readmitting function is only available when [System Configuration]
4
→ [System] → [Admit] → [Discharge Mode] of the System Setup screen
is set to [Discharge]. If [Discharge Mode] is set to [Delete Data], the
patient cannot be readmitted. Refer to “System Configuration Settings”
• The readmitting function is not available when [System Configuration]
→ [System] → [Admit] → [Readmit] of the System Setup screen is set
to [OFF].
• Data for up to 16 patients can be saved as patients who can be
readmitted. If more than 16 patients are discharged within 120 hours,
the oldest patient data is deleted.
When a patient is readmitted, alarm settings and stored wave settings of review
windows are the settings before the patient was discharged.
1. Touch [Admit] on the All Beds screen to display the Admit/Discharge

window.
2. Touch [Readmit] to display the discharged patient list window. To close the
window, touch [ ].
3. Touch the data of the patient to readmit.
1
2
Sort
Touch the sort marks to sort the list.
• Discharge Time: Sort by date and time
of discharge.
• Patient ID: Sort by patient ID.
• Name: Sort by patient name.
3
The discharged date and time, patient ID,

patient name and physician of the patient who
was discharged within the past 120 hours are
displayed.
On the discharged patients list, patient data
whose data was deleted are displayed. This
includes patient who were deleted by changing
channel.
4. The patient information before discharge of the selected patient is displayed.

Confirm the information and touch [Admit]. A confirmation window appears.
To cancel readmitting, touch [Cancel].
5. After confirming the message, touch [OK]. The patient is readmitted and
monitoring starts.

Discharging a Patient
When the admitted patient no longer needs to be monitored, discharge the

patient. Discharging the patient deletes all the patient data and ends monitoring
of the patient at the central monitor. 4
The condition of a discharged bed depending on the [Discharge Mode] setting on

the [System Configuration] → [System] → [Admit] of the System Setup screen.
Refer to “System Configuration Settings” in Section 6-1 of the Administrator’s
Guide.
Discharge Mode Bed Condition

Discharge • [Discharge] key is displayed on the Admit/Discharge
window.
• All data (review, patient information) of the patient is
deleted and alarm settings are returned to the settings
before the patient is discharged.
• The screen is blank and [Admit] is displayed.
• No waveform is displayed (monitoring ends)
• Alarm function is not available.
To monitor a patient again, admit or readmit the patient.

Delete Data • [Delete Data] key is displayed on the Admit/Discharge
window.
• All data (review, patient information) of the patient
is deleted and the alarm settings are returned to the
settings before the patient is discharged.
• The screen is not blank and monitoring continues.
The patient cannot be readmitted.
On the Discharged Patients List window, the past 120 hours of review windows
of discharged patients or patients whose data were deleted on this central monitor
can be displayed.
CAUTION
When admitting a new patient, first discharge the previous patient
and delete all data of the previous patient. Otherwise, the data of the
previous patient and new patient will be mixed together.
NOTE
This operation can only be performed for monitored beds whose data is
saved in this central monitor.

1. Touch the data area of the bed you are going to discharge a patient from to
display the Individual Bed window.
2. Touch “Admit/Discharge” to display the Admit/Discharge window.

procedures.
[Personal Setup].
6.
3. Touch [Discharge] or [Delete Data]. The window to confirm discharge

appears.

4. Touch [OK]. All data of the monitored bed is deleted.
3
4
When the [Discharge Mode] is
[Delete Data]
4
The message depends on the [Discharge Mode].

Pausing Monitoring of a Patient
When the patient is temporarily away from the bed and no data from that bedside
monitor is sent to the central monitor, you can pause monitoring of the patient
without deleting the patient data and settings.
The pause function pauses the displaying of measurement values and alarm
function without losing patient information and settings. While monitoring is
paused, a pause reason is displayed beside the paused bed on the central monitor
screen. You can select the reason from preset customizable reasons.
With the pause timer function, the expected return time and pause timer can be
displayed and overtime past the expected return time is notified.
NOTE
The pause operation can only be done at the central monitor where the
bed’s data is saved.
1. Touch the data area of the bed for which you are going to pause monitoring.
2. Touch [Admit/Discharge] to display the Admit/Discharge window.


procedures.
[Personal Setup].
keys, refer to “Changing the All Beds Screen Display Settings” in Section 4
6.
3. Touch [Pause] to display the Pause window.
4. Select the reason you want to display during pause monitoring.
5. Touch [Pause]. Monitoring pauses and the selected pause reason appears on
the screen.
The pause reason for the bed is

displayed.
Select the pause reason from the list.

5
The reason can be registered on Pre-
registration of the System Setup screen.
Refer to “Pre-registration” in Section
6-1 of the Administrator's Guide.

Pause Timer
When setting [Pause Timer] → [System Configuration] → [System] → [Admit]
to [ON] on the System Setup screen and selecting the pause time, the expected
return time and pause timer are displayed on the screen. When [Pause Time Over
Time Notification Sound] of the System Setup is set to [ON], a notification sound
occurs after the expected return time elapsed. Refer to “System Configuration
Settings” in Section 6-1 of the Administrator’s Guide.
1. Touch the data area of the bed for which you are going to pause monitoring.
3. Touch [Pause] to display the Pause window.

1
4. Touch the pause reason on the Pause window.
2 5. Touch the pause time.
3 6. Touch [Pause]. Monitoring pauses and the pause reason, pause timer and
expected return time are displayed on the screen.
The pause reason and pause time can be registered on the Pre-registration
of the System Setup screen. Refer to “Pre-registration” in Section 6-1 of the
After pause, the pause reason, pause timer and

expected return time are displayed on the bed.
A pause timer does not appear when the pause
timer is set to more than 12 hours.
6
Select the pause Select the pause
reason from the list. time.

When the Bed Is Paused

During pause, the pause reason, pause timer and expected return time are
displayed on the screen. On the Pause window, you can reduce or extend the
pause time. When the expected return time elapses, the overtime is displayed
in yellow. When [Pause Timer Over Time Notification Sound] at [System
Configuration] → [System] → [Admit] of System Setup screen is [ON], there
is a notification sound (in a 4-note melody: D-A-B-E) for five seconds every
4
two minutes. Refer to “System Configuration Settings” in Section 6-1 of the
NOTE
The pause time only appears on the central monitor. It does not appear
on the bedside monitor.
Expected return time Pause timer

When the time elapses, Blue: Pause time
the over time is Red line: Expected return time
displayed in yellow. Little hand: Current time is
displayed in yellow
when the expected
return time elapses.
Pause reason
Pause time
Expected return time
Remaining time
When the time
elapses, overtime is
displayed in yellow.
[Reduce] [Extend]
When the pause time is set to [Free], [Free] is displayed Reduces the pause Extends the pause
for the pause time and the expected return time, remaining time 15 minutes by time 15 minutes by
time and pause timer are not displayed. The [Reduce] and every touch. every touch.
[Extend] keys are not available.

Resume Monitoring
WARNING
When the patient returns, resume monitoring. During pause, the
measurement data is not displayed and the alarm does not function.
When the patient returns, resume monitoring on this central monitor.
1. Touch the pause reason key displayed on the patient’s bed. The Pause
window of the Admit/Discharge window is displayed.
2. Touch [Resume]. The monitoring resumes.
Resume Setting
Monitoring of the bed automatically resumes at the central monitor when the
resume time is set at [Auto Resume After Pause] → [System Configuration] →
[System] → [Admit] of the System Setup screen and any one of the following
conditions is met at the paused bed:
• Heart rate is continuously monitored for the selected time.
• SpO2 is continuously monitored for the selected time.
• PR from the invasive blood pressure (ART, ART2, RAD, DORS, AO, FEM,
UA, LVP or P1 to 8) is continuously monitored for the selected time at the
bedside monitor or transmitter.
Monitoring of the bed automatically resumes at the central monitor when any
one of the following conditions are met at paused bed:
• NIBP is properly measured and the SYS, DIA or MAP value is displayed at the
bedside monitor or transmitter.
• ASYSTOLE is generated (HR becomes 0).
For details on resume setting, refer to “System Configuration Settings” in Section

6-1 of the Administrator’s Guide.

WARNING
When the bed is set to automatically resume monitoring after pause,
check that monitoring is resumed at the central monitor when the
pause condition is ended. Monitoring might not resume if there is
network failure.
4
NOTE
• When [Auto Resume After Pause] is set to [OFF], the monitoring does
not resume until the [Resume] is touch on the Admit/Discharge window.
• When a patient is paused from a transmitter which has a pause function
and the power of the transmitter is on, the monitoring does not resume
even when the time is set at [Auto Resume After Pause] on this central
monitor. In this case, the monitoring resumes by the [AUTO RESUME
AFTER PAUSE] setting of the transmitter. When [AUTO RESUME
AFTER PAUSE] is set to [OFF] on the transmitter, monitoring of the
transmitter does not resume even when the monitoring resumes.

Transferring a Patient to a Different Bedside Monitor
CAUTION CAUTION
After patient transfer, settings other than patient Keep the source bedside monitor and the
information and alarm settings are returned to the destination bedside monitor power on and
default settings. Change the settings if necessary. connected to the network until the patient transfer
or bed exchange is complete. Otherwise the
patient transfer or bed exchange fails and the
data is lost. After transferring or exchanging the
patient, confirm that the data before the patient
transfer or bed exchange can be displayed at the
destination bed.
When transferring a patient to a different bed in the monitor network, the

patient’s data is also transferred to the destination bedside monitor.
NOTE
The patient transfer can only be performed for monitored beds whose
data is saved in this central monitor.
Transferred Data
The following data can be transferred.
Patient Information and Settings

• Patient information
• Alarm settings
NOTE
After the patient transfer, “Notes” in the patient information are deleted
from the central monitor.
Review Data
• Trendgraph • ST recall data
• Tabular trend • Arrhythmia recall data
• Full disclosure waveform • ECG 12 lead analysis file
• Expanded waveform • Hemodynamics list data
• Event list • Alarm events

NOTE
• The data for ECG 12 lead analysis is moved if the transfer is two beds
in the same central monitor or between a CNS-6201, CNS-9601 and
CNS-9701 central monitor.
• The data for event list or alarm events are moved if the transfer is two
beds in the same central monitor or CNS-6201. Otherwise, no data will
be moved. 4
• Data before the patient transfer is saved in the source central monitor
and can be viewed as long as the power of the source central monitor
remains on.
• While a patient is being transferred between different central monitors,
up to one minute of full disclosure waveform and trend data may be lost.
Transfer Limitation
When the source bed and destination bed use the same central monitor or CNS-
6201, there is no limit to the number of times a patient can be transferred without
losing data.
When the destination bed’s data is saved on a central monitor other than CNS-
6201, there is limit to the number of times a patient can be transferred without
losing data.
CAUTION
If there are too many patient transfers, old review data might not be
NOTE
When transferring a patient to a bed whose data is saved in a central
monitor other than CNS-6201, the number of transfer times with no data
loss depends on the destination central monitor.

Transferring a Patient
CAUTION
When transferring a patient, confirm the destination bed you want to
transfer by the message on the screen. If you select the wrong
destination bed, the patient data of the source bed overwrites the
patient data of the destination bed and the overwritten data cannot
be recovered.
1. Touch the data area of the source bed you want to transfer.

procedures.
[Personal Setup].
keys, refer to the Administrator’s Guide.

3. Touch “Patient Transfer” to display the Patient Transfer window.
4
4. Select a destination group. The registered beds of the group are displayed.
5. Select the destination bed the patient is transferred to.
6. Touch [Transfer]. The window to confirm the transfer appears.
The bed name, patient name and IP

address of the selected source bed are
displayed.
Group
Touch the destination group from the 4
list.
Select Destination Bed

Shows the list of available beds. Only
beds that belong to the selected group 5
and have a bed name are displayed.
Touch a destination bed.
Bed name
Patient name
IP address
6
7. Check the patient information (bed name, patient name, patient ID) of the
source and destination bed and touch [Yes].
NOTE
Before touching [Yes], check the source and destination with the
patient and bed name.

8. After patient transfer, a “Transfer: Success” message appears. Touch [OK].

The source bed becomes discharged and the patient is admitted to the
destination bed.
When the transferred bed is monitored through an ORG-9100 series multiple

patient receiver, the alarm settings return to the Alarm Master 1 settings after
transfer.

Moving Data from One Monitor to a Different Monitor
This procedure is only available for a bed whose data is saved in this central
monitor.
4
Do the following procedure when you change to a different monitor (bedside
monitor or multiple patient receiver) for a patient. The bed position for the
patient on the central monitor does not change. The monitoring data and settings
(e.g. waveform selection) for the bed are kept after the monitor is changed.
CAUTION
Keep the current bedside monitor and the new bedside monitor
power on and connected to the network until the monitor is changed.
Otherwise the patient data is lost. After changing the monitor,
confirm that the data and settings before changing the monitor are
displayed in the new monitor.
NOTE
You cannot change the monitor for a bed whose data is saved in another
central monitor.
This operation is available when [Change Device] → [System Configuration]

→ [System] → [Admit] of the System Setup screen is set to [ON]. Refer to the
1. Connect the new monitor to the central monitor network and turn the power
on.
2. On the central monitor, touch the data area of the bed you want to change the
monitor for.

4. Touch [Change Device] to display the Change Device window.

procedures.
[Personal Setup].
6.
5. Select a group. The registered beds of the group are displayed.
6. Select the new monitor.
7. Touch [Change Device]. The window to confirm the change appears.

4
The current bed ID, patient name and IP
address of the monitor are displayed.
Group
Touch the destination group from the list. 5
Available Devices
The list of available monitors which
are registered to the selected group are
displayed. Touch a destination monitor.
6
Bed name
Patient name
IP address
7
8. Touch [Yes] on the confirmation window.
NOTE
Before touching [Yes], check the current and new monitor by the bed
ID and IP address.
9. After the monitors are changed, a “Change Device: success” message

appears. Touch [OK]. The patient is automatically admitted on the new
monitor.
NOTE
After changing the monitor, check that the old monitor is no longer
monitored by other central monitors. This central monitor notifies other
central monitors that the old monitor is changed to a new monitor and
automatically updates the monitoring beds.
When the bed is monitored through an ORG-9100 series multiple patient receiver
before changing the monitors, the alarm settings return to the Alarm Master 1
settings after changing the monitors.

When Monitoring Bed is Changed to a Different Monitor on a Central

Monitor Other than CNS-6201
CAUTION
If the monitoring bed is changed to a different monitor on a central
monitor other than CNS-6201, the monitoring bed does not change
on this central monitor. Register the bed again on this central
monitor. Otherwise, the patient data might not be displayed or data of
a different patient may be displayed on this central monitor.

Exchanging Two Beds
CAUTION
Keep the source bedside monitor and the destination bedside 4
monitor power on and connected to the network until the patient
transfer or bed exchange is complete. Otherwise the patient transfer
or bed exchange fails and the data is lost. After transferring or
exchanging the patient, confirm that the data before the patient
transfer or bed exchange can be displayed at the destination bed.
This procedure is only for two beds whose data is saved in this central monitor.
When exchanging the patient’s beds in the monitor network, all patient’s data can
also be exchanged.
NOTE
• You cannot exchange a monitored bed whose data is saved in another
central monitor.
• You cannot exchange a monitored bed when the bed is monitored
through a multiple patient receiver.
• Before exchanging the beds, remove the sensors from the patient. If the
beds are exchanged while monitoring, the data of the patients will be
mixed together and it will cause misunderstanding of the patient history.
1. Remove the sensors from the patients whose beds are going to be exchanged.
2. On the central monitor, touch the data area of the bed you want to exchange.


procedures.
[Personal Setup].
6.
4. Touch [Exchange Beds] to display the Exchange Beds window.
5. Select a group. The registered beds of the group are displayed.
6. Select the bed to exchange.
7. Touch [Exchange Beds]. The window to confirm the change appears.

4
The current bed name, patient name and
IP address of the monitor are displayed.
Group
Touch the destination group from the list. 5
Available Beds
Shows the list of available beds. Only
beds that belong to the selected group
and have a bed name are displayed.
6
Touch a bed to exchange.
Bed name
Patient name
IP address
7
8. Check the patient information (bed name, patient name, patient ID) of the
current monitored bed and the bed to exchange and touch [Yes].
NOTE
Before touching [Yes], check the current monitored bed and the bed
to exchange with the patient and bed name.
9. Touch [OK]. The data of the beds is exchanged.
10. After exchanging the beds, reattach the sensors to the patients.

Changing the Receiving Channel Number
Set the receiving channel number when monitoring starts or when changing the
transmitter.
WARNING
Check that the channel number of the transmitter corresponds to the
receiving channel (the channel displayed on the monitor screen).
Otherwise, the central monitor monitors a different patient.
CAUTION
When you change the receiving channel to monitor a new patient,
discharge the previous patient and admit a new patient. If you only
change the channel and does not delete the previous patient data,
the data of the previous patient and new patient will be mixed
together and it will cause misunderstanding of the patient history.
NOTE
• The receiving channel number is set at the moment you touch [Yes] or
[No] on the confirmation window.
• The receiving channel can be set only when receiving data from a
transmitter through a multiple patient receiver.
• This operation can only be performed for monitored beds whose data is
saved in this central monitor.
1. Touch the data area of the bed you want to set the channel for.


procedures.
[Personal Setup].
6.
3. Touch the receiving channel key to display the Channel window.
When [Channel Setting Protection] at the [Security] → [System

Configuration] → [System] of the System Setup screen is set to [ON], the
Password window is displayed before the Channel window is displayed.
4. Select the transmitter channel number from the registered list. You can also
enter the channel number from the screen keyboard.
i) Select the transmitter channel number from the registered list.

[Keyboard]
Touch to display the keyboard.
i) Enter the numbers with keyboard.
ii) Touch [OK]. The window to confirm the change
appears.
i
i
ii
ii
When the channel is registered on the [Pre-registration] → [Channel]

of the System Setup screen, you can select the transmitter channel from
the registered list. If the channel is not registered, the screen keyboard is
displayed.

When [Prohibit Duplicate Channels] at [Security] → [System Configuration]
→ [System] of the System Setup screen is set to [ON], you cannot select the
same channel with the monitoring (paused) beds.
ii) Touch [OK]. The window to confirm the change appears.
NOTE
• You cannot set a channel number which is not included in the
connected multiple patient receiver.
• When [Prohibit Duplicate Channels] of the [System Configuration] in
the System Setup screen is set to [ON], you cannot select the same
channel with the monitoring (paused) beds. When entering the
same number with the keyboard, a “Channel Duplicated” message
is displayed and the channel is not set.
• Do not set receiving channels which interfere with each other

Otherwise, the “There is a possibility of channel interference.”
message appears. If you use those channels, signals may be
difficult to receive by the multiple patient receiver. For combinations
of channels which do not interfere with each other, refer to the
Telemetry System Installation Guide. For the Telemetry System
Installation Guide, contact your Nihon Kohden representative. 4
5. After confirming the message, touch [Yes] or [No].

Yes: All data is deleted. Select “Yes” when you monitor a new patient.
No: Only changes the channel and data is not deleted. Select “No” when
you use another transmitter to monitor the same patient.
When [Yes] is touched, the alarm settings change to the Alarm Master 1
settings.
CAUTION
When you change the receiving channel to monitor a new patient,
discharge the previous patient and admit a new patient. If you only
change the channel and does not delete the previous patient data,
the data of the previous patient and new patient will be mixed
together and it will cause misunderstanding of the patient history.
6. Touch “All Beds” to return to the All Beds screen.
NOTE
Confirm that the correct channel number is displayed on the screen.

Section 5 Alarm Function
Overview of Alarms.............................................................................................................................................. 5.2

Alarm Types................................................................................................................................................ 5.4
Alarm Level................................................................................................................................................ 5.4 5
Alarm Indication......................................................................................................................................... 5.5
Alarms on Each Screen........................................................................................................................................ 5.7
Alarms for Monitored Beds......................................................................................................................... 5.7
Vital Signs Alarm/ST Alarms............................................................................................................ 5.7
Arrhythmia Alarms............................................................................................................................ 5.8
Technical Alarms.............................................................................................................................. 5.9
Alarms for the Central Monitor................................................................................................................... 5.9
Alarm Priority...................................................................................................................................................... 5.10
Alarm Sound and Indicator....................................................................................................................... 5.10
Screen Message...................................................................................................................................... 5.10
Temporarily Silencing or Suspending Alarms..................................................................................................... 5.11
Temporarily Silencing Alarms................................................................................................................... 5.11
Alarm Silence Time........................................................................................................................ 5.12
Temporarily Suspending All Alarms......................................................................................................... 5.13
Alarm Suspend Time...................................................................................................................... 5.13
Suspending All Alarms at the Transmitter................................................................................................ 5.14
Deactivating Alarms at the Bedside Monitor or Vital Sign Telemeter........................................................ 5.14
Alarm Status Icons............................................................................................................................................. 5.15
Turning the Alarm Limits Off Icon Display On or Off................................................................................. 5.16
Alarm Recording................................................................................................................................................. 5.17
Recorded Data and Necessary Settings of the Alarm Recording............................................................ 5.17
Starting Automatic Alarm Recording........................................................................................................ 5.17
Recording Example........................................................................................................................ 5.17
Setting Alarms.................................................................................................................................................... 5.18
Setting Alarm Limits................................................................................................................................. 5.18
Manually Setting the Alarms.......................................................................................................... 5.19
Alarm Limits Range........................................................................................................................ 5.21
Setting Alarm Limits Automatically (Auto Alarm Setting)............................................................... 5.22
Limit Setting Changed Icon............................................................................................................ 5.24
Setting the Arrhythmia Alarm................................................................................................................... 5.25
Setting the ST Alarm................................................................................................................................ 5.28
Manually Setting the Alarms.......................................................................................................... 5.28
Setting ST Alarms with Auto Alarm Setting Functions................................................................... 5.30
Setting All Alarms to a Preset Pattern (Alarm Master)............................................................................. 5.31
Adjusting the Alarm Sound Volume.................................................................................................................... 5.33
Alarm Notice....................................................................................................................................................... 5.35
Using an Alarm Notice............................................................................................................................. 5.35
Technical Icon..................................................................................................................................................... 5.37
Checking the Proper Functioning of the Alarm................................................................................................... 5.38

5. ALARM FUNCTION
This section explains alarm type and level, central monitor operation when an
alarm occurs, temporary silencing and suspending alarms, alarm recording and
alarm settings.
Overview of Alarms
Alarms notify staff of an abnormality of a monitoring parameter, arrhythmia or

monitoring condition by message, sound and alarm indicator.
WARNING WARNING
A physician must be within the range where he/ Do not diagnose a patient based on only the
she can hear the alarm sound of the central alarm information of the central monitor. An alarm
monitor while monitoring a patient on the central may not be indicated due to alarm level or alarm
monitor. If the physician cannot hear the alarm on/off setting and critical changes on the patient
sound, critical changes on the patient may be may be overlooked.
overlooked.
WARNING WARNING
If more than one medical equipment is used When an alarm occurs:
together in the same facility, make sure all • Check the patient first and take necessary
equipments have the same alarm default settings measure to ensure patient’s safety.
(alarm master). If the medical equipments have • Remove the cause of the alarm.
different alarm default settings and when • Check the alarm settings on the central monitor
initialized, the alarm settings differ with the other and change the alarm settings if necessary.
equipments and alarm cannot be managed
appropriately in the facility. If using different alarm
default settings according to areas or wings in the
facility, manage the alarms appropriately.
WARNING
When admitting a new patient, confirm alarm
settings. Also check the alarm settings during
monitoring and change the settings according to
the patient condition. For a bed monitored
through a multiple patient receiver, the alarm
settings change to the [Alarm Master 1] settings
in the following cases:
• When you touch the [Delete Data] key on the
Admit/Discharge window
• When you delete all data of the bed when the
receiving channel is changed

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Bedside monitor The table below shows which alarm functions are available on which
Vital sign telemeter Multiple patient
receiver instruments.
Transmitter
Monitor network
Central monitor
CNS-6201
5
Monitored Bed
Monitor Network
Central Monitor Bedside Monitor Transmitter through
Vital Sign Telemeter Multiple Patient
Receiver
Alarm Functions
Setting alarms Available Not available

• Vital sign alarm (When the monitored bed is a bedside monitor or vital sign (You can set the settings on
• ST alarm telemeter, settings at the central monitor and bedside monitor the central monitor.)
• Arrhythmia alarm are synchronized.)
Judging when an alarm No Yes The multiple patient
condition exists and (Displays alarms from receiver judges alarms from
which parameters are the bedside monitors and transmitters. The transmitter
alarming multiple patient receivers) can generate a CALL alarm.
Silencing alarms Temporarily silence current alarms. When silencing a bed’s Not available
alarms on the central monitor, bedside monitor or vital sign (You can set the settings on
telemeter, alarms for that bed are also silenced on other the central monitor.)
monitors. For BSM-8000 series bedside monitors, all alarms
are silenced. When alarms are silenced and another alarm
occurs, there is no indication of the other alarm.
Suspending alarms Not available. When Pressing the alarm suspend key on the transmitter or
alarms are suspended on a vital sign telemeter suspends all alarm functions for three
monitored bed, alarms for minutes. For BSM-8000 series bedside monitors, the alarm
that bed are also suspended suspend key suspends all alarms when there is no alarm.
on the central monitor.
Turning all alarm Not available Depends on the bedside Not available
functions On or Off monitor model
Alarm indication Sound, alarm indicator Sound, blinking lamp, screen No indication
lamp (when YL-611P or indication, recording. For
YL-612P Alarm Indicator BSM-8000 series bedside
is connected), screen monitors, the alarm indication
indication, recording is different. Refer to the
Operator’s Manual of the
bedside monitor.
Sound, blinking lamp, screen
indication on the vital sign
telemeter.
Alarm priority Available Not available
The alarm priority is the same on the central monitor, (You can set the settings on
bedside monitor and vital sign telemeter. The alarm priority the central monitor.)
settings at bedside monitor and vital sign telemeter are
synchronized. For BSM-8000 series bedside monitors, the
settings are not synchronized with the central monitor.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
NOTE
For BSM-8000 series bedside monitors, the central monitor generates an
alarm sound and indication and starts alarm recording according to the
alarm judgement on the bedside monitor.
Alarm Types
There are four alarm types.
Unit on which the

Alarm Type Cause
Alarm Occurs
Central monitor Technical alarm Abnormal condition on the central monitor or network
Vital sign data of a parameter exceeds the preset value of
Vital sign alarm
the upper or lower alarm limit
ST level exceeds the preset value of the upper or lower
ST alarm
Monitored bed alarm limit
Arrhythmia alarm Arrhythmia detected
Abnormal condition on the monitored bed or connected
Technical alarm
external instrument
Alarm Level
Alarms are divided into three alarm levels. The central monitor operation when
the alarm occurs and the priority when two or more alarms occur together depend
on the alarm level.
Level Description
Higher CRISIS Patient is in critical condition and the patient’s life may
be at risk. Immediate action must be taken. Electrodes
↑ or probe off, or incorrect lead or other cable connections
may also cause this alarm.
Priority WARNING Patient is in critical condition. Prompt action should be
taken. Electrodes or probe off, or incorrect lead or other
cable connections may also cause this alarm.
↓ ADVISORY Electrodes, probe, cuff, lead and other cable connections
or settings on the monitor are not appropriate for
Lower accurate measurement. Prompt action should be taken.
When the bed is monitored through the ORG-9100 and alarm escalation is ON,
the level of the vital sign and technical alarm can be automatically raised to the
next level when a set time elapses or SpO2 drops below a set level. For details,
refer to Section 6-1 of the Administrator’s Guide.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Example: Individual Bed window

CRISIS level alarm message WARNING level alarm message ADVISORY level alarm message
When several alarms occur simultaneously, When several alarms occur simultaneously, When several alarms occur simultaneously,
the messages are alternated. the messages are alternated. the messages are alternated.
Vital sign alarm 5

The numeric data is
highlighted.
Alarm message related

to the parameter
measurement condition
It is basically displayed
above the parameter.
Alarm Indication
When an alarm occurs, the central monitor indicates the alarm as follows
according to the alarm level. The alarm level on the central monitor is the same
as the alarm level on the monitored bed. Refer to the Operator’s Manual of the
bedside monitor or vital sign telemeter.
• Alarm sound - CRISIS alarms are louder than other alarms.

• Alarm indicator blinks or lights - When monitoring on dual displays, the alarm
indicators on both displays blink or light.
• Frame of the waveform display area blinks or lights.
• Alarm message is displayed. For vital sign alarms, the numeric data of the
parameter is highlighted.
• Alarm recording starts.
• When any of the following conditions occur simultaneously with another
alarm, the messages are displayed alternately: All alarms off, Alarm suspended,
Arrhythmia Analysis Off.
When monitoring a bed through a multiple patient receiver, the alarm level can
be changed. Refer to “ORG Setting” in Section 6-1 of the Administrator’s Guide.
When the monitored bed is a vital sign telemeter, the alarm level can be changed.
Refer to “GZ Setting” in Section 6-1 of the Administrator’s Guide.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
The relation between alarm level and central monitor indication is as follows.
is the factory default setting.
Alarm Indicator Frame of Waveform Alarm Display Alarm

Alarm Level Alarm Sound*1
LED*1 Display Area*2 on the Screen Recording
NK 1 (Continuous
pip sound), NK 2
Highlighted red
CRISIS (Continuous ping Blinking red Blinking red
message
sound) or IEC
standard (ceg-gC) Automatically
starts when an
NK 1 (Continuous
alarm occurs.
bing bong sound), NK Highlighted
Blinking or lights in (Recording
WARNING 2 (Continuous ding Blinking yellow yellow or orange
yellow or orange*3 On or Off can
ding sound) or IEC message
be set for each
standard (ceg)
alarm.)
NK 1 and NK 2
Highlighted
(Single beep every 20 Lights in cyan or
ADVISORY None cyan or yellow
or 120 seconds*1) or yellow
message
IEC standard (ec*1)
Message None Not lit None White message None
*1 You can change the alarm sound, advisory alarm sound interval and advisory
alarm color on the Alarm window of the System Configuration window. Refer
to “System Configuration Settings” in Section 6-1 of the Administrator’s
Guide.
* Displayed on the All Beds screen and the data area only.
2
*3 Blinks in yellow or orange when WARNING is the highest priority of all the
alarms generated on the monitored bed. Lights in yellow or orange in other
alarms.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Alarms on Each Screen
Alarms for Monitored Beds

Vital Signs Alarm/ST Alarms
Description Display Example

A vital signs alarm/ST alarm occurs when 5
The bed display area on the All Beds screen
a measured value exceeds the preset
upper/lower limit for the parameter. The
measured value is highlighted and the
alarm message of the parameter name is
displayed in the color according to the
alarm level in the bed display area. On the
Individual Bed window, the message is
displayed on the upper part of the screen.
The numeric data The frame of the waveform The alarm message is
When an alarm occurs for a parameter is highlighted. display is highlighted displayed in the color for the
which is not displayed on the screen, according to the alarm level. alarm level.
the displayed parameter changes to the (CRISIS and WARNING only)
alarmed parameter and is highlighted.
If only one parameter is displayed, the
Individual Bed window
parameter does not change. The alarm message is displayed in the color and place
according to the alarm level.
When several alarms occur simultaneously,
some messages are not displayed
depending on the alarm level. Refer to
“Alarm Priority” in this section.
The numeric data is highlighted.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Arrhythmia Alarms

An arrhythmia alarm occurs when The bed display area on the All Beds screen
an arrhythmia occurs. A highlighted
When the detection conditions for
arrhythmia name in the color according “FREQ VPC” are satisfied, the VPC is
to the level is displayed in the bed display highlighted.
area. On the Individual Bed window, the
message is displayed at the top of the
screen or window.
NOTE
A message is not displayed when:
• Alarm functions are set to OFF on the
bedside monitor. The frame of the waveform display Highlighted arrhythmia name in
• Alarm for the arrhythmia is set to OFF. is highlighted for CRISIS and the color for the alarm level
WARNING alarm levels.
some messages are not displayed depending Individual Bed window
on the alarm level. Refer to “Alarm
Highlighted arrhythmia name in the
Priority” in this section. color and place according to the level
The duration time of the arrhythmia alarm

depends on the bedside monitor or multiple
patient receiver.
When the detection conditions for

“FREQ VPC” are satisfied, the VPC
is highlighted.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Technical Alarms

A technical alarm is an alarm about instrument The bed display area on the All Beds screen
abnormality and measurement environment of
the patient.
Alarm about instrument abnormality

The alarm message in the color according to
the level is displayed in the bed display area. 5
On the Individual Bed window, the message is
displayed at the top of the window.
The highlighted alarm message The alarm message is displayed in the
Alarms about measurement environment is basically displayed above the color for the alarm level.
ECG measurement value.
The alarm message is displayed in the bed
display area in the color for the alarm level. Individual Bed window
On the Individual Bed window, the message is
displayed at the top of the window. Highlighted message in the color and place for
the alarm level. When several alarms occur
simultaneously, the messages are alternated. A message
Other Parameters about ECG is displayed here.
A highlighted alarm message is basically
displayed at the measurement value. Also
the alarm message of the parameter name is
displayed in the color for the alarm level in
the bed display area. On the Individual Bed
window, the message is displayed at the top of
the window.
When an alarm occurs for a parameter which

is not displayed on the screen, the displayed
parameter changes to the alarmed parameter
and is highlighted. If only one parameter is
displayed, that parameter does not change to
the alarmed parameter.

A highlighted alarm message about parameter
some messages are not displayed depending
measurement environment is basically
on the alarm level. Refer to “Alarm Priority” displayed at the measurement value.
in this section.
Alarms for the Central Monitor

Alarm messages for the central monitor and
WS-960P Recorder Unit are displayed. Some
messages also have sound.
Displayed at the lower left of the screen.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Alarm Priority
The central monitor operates as follows according to the alarm priority.
Alarm Sound and Indicator

When different level alarms occur simultaneously, the alarm sounds and the
alarm indicator blinks or lights for the highest level alarm.
Screen Message
When several alarms occur on the same monitored bed, a message is displayed
on different places according to the alarm level.
The Bed Display Area on the All Beds Screen

The message of the highest level alarm is displayed.
All Beds screen
The alarm message of the highest

level is displayed.
Individual Bed Window

The message is displayed at the place according to the alarm level. When several
alarms of the same level occur, the messages are alternated.
CRISIS level alarm message WARNING level alarm message ADVISORY level alarm message
When several alarms occur When several alarms occur When several alarms occur
simultaneously, the messages are simultaneously, the messages are simultaneously, the messages are
alternated. alternated. alternated.
Vital sign alarm

The numeric data is
highlighted.
Alarm message related

to the parameter
measurement condition
It is basically displayed above
the parameter.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Temporarily Silencing or Suspending Alarms
When an alarm occurs, after checking the cause, silence the alarm sound and
stop the blinking of the alarm indicator.
Whether alarms are silenced or suspended depends on the bed type:

• For beds which are directly connected to the network, the Silence Alarm key 5
temporarily silences all current alarms.
• For 8000 series beds, the Silence Alarm key temporarily suspends all alarm
functions for the bed.
NOTE
When the two types of the beds are selected as monitored bed and
Silence Alarms key is touched, alarms for each bed is silenced as
mentioned above.
Temporarily Silencing Alarms

NOTE
This function is only for beds directly connected to the network.
At the central monitor, you can silence alarms at all the monitored beds which
are directly connected to the network. When you silence alarms at the central
monitor, they are also silenced at the bedside monitor. When you silence alarms
at the bedside monitor, they are also silenced at the central monitor.
Silencing the alarms for an individual bed

Touch [ ] to silence the current alarms. The alarm silence icon and the
remaining minutes are displayed in the display area of the silenced bed.
[ ] is only displayed on beds on which an alarm is occurring. You cannot

silence alarms for all beds at a time.
On the Individual Bed window, the alarm silence icon and the remaining minutes
are also displayed.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Vital Sign Alarm

Arrhythmia Alarm
Technical Alarm
The alarm sound is silenced.
Alarm Sound
The visual indication such as an alarm message remains.
Screen Display
during Alarm The alarm silence icon and the remaining minutes are
Silence displayed*1
• A different alarm occurs.
• The cause of alarm disappears during alarm silence,
Alarms Resume
then the same alarm occurs again.
when
• The cause of alarm continues after the alarm silence
ends.*2
*1 For beds monitored through an ORG-9100 series multiple patient receiver

version 02-01 or later, these do not appear when the SIGNAL LOSS alarm
occurs.
* For beds monitored through the ORG-9100 series multiple patient receiver
2
version 02-01 or later, the SIGNAL LOSS alarm does not resume even if this
condition is met.
NOTE
When the SpO2 probe is disconnected and a “Probe Off” alarm is
displayed, silence the alarm and stop monitoring to clear the display.
Alarm Silence Time

Bedside monitor
Alarm silence time is the setting on the bedside monitor. Refer to “System
Configuration Settings” in Section 6-1 of the Administrator’s Guide.
Bed through multiple patient receiver
Alarm silence time is set on the [ORG Setting] of the System Setup screen on the
central monitor.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Temporarily Suspending All Alarms

NOTE
This function is only for the BSM-8000 series beds.
For the BSM-8000 series beds, refer to At the central monitor, you can temporarily suspend all alarm functions of all
Section 1. the BSM-8000 series monitored beds. During alarm suspend, there is no alarm
sound, no alarm message display and no alarm recording. When you suspend
alarms at the bedside monitor, they are also suspended at the central monitor. 5
To suspend all alarm functions of the BSM-8000 series monitored beds, touch
[ ]. During alarm suspend, the alarm suspend icon with the remaining
minutes indication and the “Alarm Suspended” message are displayed in the
display area of the suspended beds.
[ ] is only displayed on the beds on which an alarm occurs.
On the Individual Bed window, the alarm silence icon and the remaining minutes
are also displayed.
Alarm Suspend Time

Alarm suspend time is set on the bedside monitor.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Suspending All Alarms at the Transmitter
WARNING
When alarm is suspended at the transmitter, all alarms are turned off
for that transmitter. Be careful when you suspend the alarm.
By pressing the alarm suspend key on the transmitter, you can suspend all alarms
before occurrence. This is useful to prevent unnecessary alarms during electrode
replacement or treatment. This function is only available for transmitters with a
SUSPEND key.
When the alarm suspend key on the transmitter is pressed, all alarm function for
the patient is suspended for two minutes. The “Alarms Suspended” message and
alarm suspend icon are displayed in the display area of the patient on the All
Beds screen, Individual Bed window and data area of each screen. It depends on
the transmitter settings.
Message Icon
Deactivating Alarms at the Bedside Monitor or Vital Sign Telemeter

By touching the Alarm Reset function key on the bedside monitor or Reset
Alarms icon on the vital sign telemeter, you can deactivate alarms when the
occur from the bedside monitor or vital sign telemeter.
When the Alarm Reset function key on the bedside monitor or Reset Alarms
icon on the vital sign telemeter is touched, the upper/lower limit and arrhythmia
alarms for the patient are deactivated indefinitely. Technical alarms for the
patient are silenced or suspended depending on the alarm. For details on alarms,
refer to the bedside monitor or vital sign telemeter Operator’s Manual.
On the central monitor, an “Alarm Reset” message and an alarm reset (audio off)
icon are displayed in the display area of the patient on the All Beds screen,
Individual Bed window and the data area of each screen. The alarm cannot be
deactivated from the central monitor.
Message Icon

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Alarm Status Icons
Icon Displayed when

Vital sign alarm limit off icon This icon is displayed when both the upper and lower limits of the
vital sign alarms are set to OFF.
(Set on the alarm limits settings window)
5
NOTE
Display condition is different depending on the monitored bed.
Displayed at the measurement value
All alarms off icon This icon is displayed when all alarms are turned off on the bedside
monitor.
Alarm suspend icon This icon is displayed when alarms are suspended on the bedside
monitor.
Alarm silence icon This icon is displayed when all alarms are temporarily silenced.
NOTE
The function is different depending on the monitored bed.
Remaining minutes are indicated beside

the icon.
Alarm suspend icon (from the transmitter) This icon is displayed when the alarm suspend key is pressed on the
transmitter. All alarm functions for the patient are suspended for two
minutes*.
* Depends on the transmitter settings.
Alarm reset (Audio off) icon This icon is displayed when an alarm sound and indicator are
deactivated indefinitely.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Turning the Alarm Limits Off Icon Display On or Off

When both the upper and lower limits of a vital sign alarm are set to OFF, the
vital sign alarm off icon appears beside the parameter name.
On the System Configuration window of the System Setup screen, you can
set whether or not the vital sign alarm off icon is displayed. Refer to “System
Configuration Settings” in Section 6-1 of the Administrator’s Guide.
NOTE
Some bedside monitor models allow you to set the conditions to display
the vital sign alarm off icon on the bedside monitor screen. The vital sign
alarm off icon is displayed on the central monitor depending on the setup
of the bedside monitor.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Alarm Recording
When a vital sign alarm or arrhythmia alarm occurs, waveforms on the All Beds
screen can be recorded automatically. The WS-960P Recorder Unit is used for
alarm recording.
NOTE 5
When all alarms are set to OFF on the bedside monitor, the alarm
recording for the bed is not performed.
Recorded Data and Necessary Settings of the Alarm Recording

Set the recorded data and recording conditions of the alarm recording for each
bed.
NOTE
Recording settings set on the central monitor affect the WS-960P
Recorder Unit. Recording settings set on the bedside monitor affect only
the built-in recorder of the bedside monitor.
Items Recorded Data Necessary Settings for Alarm Recording

Recording Select the waveforms to record on Setup Menu [ ] →
Selected waveforms [Recording] → [Record Wave Selection].
Waveforms
Recording Select recording speed (25 mm/s or 50 mm/s) on Setup
Select 25 mm/s or 50 mm/s.
Speed Menu [ ] → [Recording] → [Recording Sweep Speed].
Set [Alarm Limits Recording] and [Arrhythmia
Alarm
— Recording] to [ON] on Setup Menu [ ] → [Recording]
Recording
→ [Alarm Recording].
Set alarm limits of each parameter and arrhythmia alarms
— ON or OFF on Setup Menu [ ] → [Alarm Limit] and
Individual [Arrhythmia Alarm].
alarm Set [Arrhythmia Analysis] to [ON] on the Setup Menu
recording [ ] → [ECG] → [Arrhythmia Analysis Setting] window.
—
(Only for beds receiving transmitter data through a
multiple patient receiver)
The recording time can be set on the System Setup screen. For setting recording
time, refer to “Recording” in Section 6-1 of the Administrator’s Guide.
Starting Automatic Alarm Recording

When necessary settings for automatic alarm recording are set, the alarm
recording automatically starts when an alarm occurs.
To stop recording, touch [ ] of the bed during recording.
Recording Example
Refer to “Recorded/Printed Data” in Section 10.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Setting Alarms
NOTE
• Do not change alarm settings on the bedside monitor and the central
monitor at the same time.
• For a bed monitored through an ORG-9100 series multiple patient
receiver, the alarm settings are saved even when the central monitor is
turned off. In the following cases, the alarm settings become the Alarm
Master 1 settings:
- When the bed is discharged
- When you touch the [Delete Data] key on the Admit/Discharge window
- When you delete all data of the bed when the receiving channel is
changed
The following alarms need to be set for each monitored bed.

• Vital sign alarm settings
• ST alarm settings
• Arrhythmia alarm settings
For a bed monitored through an ORG-9100 series multiple patient receiver,

alarms can also be set by copying the alarm master.
When the upper and lower limits and ST alarm limits are changed from Alarm
Master 1, a limit setting changed icon can be displayed on the All Beds screen to
notify the change. Refer to “Limit Setting Changed Icon” in this section.
Setting Alarm Limits

You can set each alarm manually or automatically.
CAUTION
When the alarm limit is set to [OFF], there will be no alarm for that
limit. Be careful when you set the alarm limit to [OFF].
NOTE
The CNS-6201 central monitor on which [Extended Network] is set
to [ON] cannot change the upper/lower alarm limits of the beds in the
Extended Network.
For a bed monitored through an ORG-9100 series multiple patient receiver, the
alarm level of each alarm can also be set. Refer to “ORG Setting” in Section 6-1
of the Administrator’s Guide.
When the monitored bed is a vital sign telemeter, the alarm level of each alarm
can also be set. Refer to “GZ Setting” in Section 6-1 of the Administrator’s
Guide.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Manually Setting the Alarms

1. Touch the data area of the bed you are going to set alarms for. The Individual
Bed window for the bed is displayed.
2. Touch [ ] to display the Setup Menu.
3. Touch [Alarm Limits] of the Personal Setup to display the Alarm Limits
window.
You can also display the Alarm Limits window by the following operation.
• Touch [Admit/Discharge] on the Individual Bed window to display the
Admit/Discharge window. Touch [Alarm Settings] → [Alarm Limits].
• Touch the [Alarm Limits] individual function key if Alarm Limits is
registered to an individual function key. For setting individual function
6.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
4. Touch the parameter key to set the alarm limits. Set the alarm limits on the
Alarm Setting window.
Upper/lower limit
Current value
Example: HR alarm limits setting window

Upper/
lower limit Upper limit
Current upper value is
displayed.
Current
value Increase/Decrease key
Increases or decreases
Parameter the value. Press and hold
key the key to change the
value continuously.
Lower limit
Current lower value is
displayed.
AUTO
Current measurement value Touch to set the
For IBP parameter, touch parameter upper/lower
Trendgraph of past four hours Upper/lower limit slide bar
the SYS, DIA or MEAN key limit automatically.
is displayed. Touch the bars to set the value.
to change the alarm setting
windows. When set the limit to OFF, set the limit
to the maximum or minimum value and
touch the increase or decrease key.
Upper or lower limit is shown in the

blue line when changing the limit.
5. Touch [ ] to apply the settings and close the Alarm Setting window.
NOTE
If the window is closed without touching [ ], the changed settings
are not applied.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Alarm Limits Range

Alarm Item Lower Limit*1 Upper Limit*1 Step Unit
HR*2 15 to 299 16 to 300 1 beat/min
ECG QTc –– 200 to 800 2 msec
QRSd –– 40 to 300 2 msec
PR 30 to 299 31 to 300 1
count/min
RR 0 to 148 2 to 150 2
RESP
APNEA (T) –– 5 to 40 5 s
SpO2, SpO2-2 50 to 99 51 to 100*3 1
SpO2 % 5
Delta SpO2 –– 1 to 50 1
10 to 255 15 to 260 5 mmHg
NIBP (S/D/M)
1.0 to 34.5 1.5 to 35.0 0.5 kPa
ART, ART2, RAD, DORS, 0 to 298 2 to 300 2 mmHg
AO, FEM, P1 to 8, UA, UV,
PRESS (S/D/M)
PAP, CVP, RAP, RVP, LAP, 0.0 to 39.5 0.5 to 40.0 0.5 kPa
LVP, ICP, ICP2 to 4
Tskin, Tskin2 to 3, Trect, 0.0 to 44.9 0.1 to 45.0 0.1 °C
TEMP Tcore, Tnaso, Teso, Ttymp,
Tblad, Taxil, T1 to 8 32.2 to 112.8 32.4 to 113.0 0.2 °F
0.0 to 44.9 0.1 to 45.0 0.1 °C
Delta T Delta T, Delta T2 to 4
0.0 to 112.9 0.1 to 113.0 0.1 °F
15.0 to 44.9 15.1 to 45.0 0.1 °C
Tb
59.0 to 112.8 59.2 to 113.0 0.2 °F
O2 (I) 18 to 99 19 to 100
O2 %
O2 (E) 10 to 99 11 to 100 1
1 to 5 mmHg
CO2 (I) ––
0.1 to 0.7 0.1 kPa
CO2
1 to 98 2 to 99 1 mmHg
ETCO2
1.0 to 12.5 1.5 to 13.0 0.5 kPa
N2O (I) (GAS)
N2O 0 to 99 1 to 100 1
N2O (E) (GAS)
HAL (I) (GAS)
HAL
HAL (E) (GAS)
ISO (I) (GAS)
ISO
ISO (E) (GAS)
0.0 to 6.9 0.1 to 7.0 %
ENF (I) (GAS)
ENF 0.1
ENF (E) (GAS)
SEV (I) (GAS)
SEV
SEV (E) (GAS)
DES (I) (GAS)
DES 0.0 to 19.9 0.1 to 20.0
DES (E) (GAS)
CCO 1.0 to 19.9 1.1 to 20.0 0.1 L/min
esCCO 0.50 to 19.90 0.60 to 20.00 L/min
0.1
esCCI 0.50 to 19.90 0.60 to 20.00 L/min/m2
MV 2 to 24 4 to 26 1 L/min
Ppeak 8 to 98 10 to 100 1 cmH2O or
PEEP 2 to 48 4 to 50 1 hPa
BIS 1 to 99 2 to 100 1 —
SEF (EEG) 0.5 to 59.5 1.0 to 60.0 0.5 Hz
EEG
TP (EEG) 0.01 to 9.98 0.02 to 9.99 0.01 nW
sys 40 to 235 45 to 240
dias 20 to 175 25 to 180 5 mmHg
mean 30 to 195 35 to 200
CNIBP
sys 5.0 to 31.5 5.5 to 32.0
dias 2.5 to 23.5 3.0 to 24.0 0.5 kPa
mean 4.0 to 26.5 4.5 to 27.0
PCCO 0.3 to 24.9 0.4 to 25.00 0.1 L/min
PCCI 0.1 to 14.9 0.2 to 15.00 0.1 L/min/m2
ScvO2 1 to 98 2 to 99 1 %

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Alarm Item Lower Limit*1 Upper Limit*1 Step Unit

AP-Sys 0 to 298 2 to 300 2 mmHg
AP-Dias 0 to 298 2 to 300 2 mmHg
AP-Mean 0 to 298 2 to 300 2 /min
Tb (EXT) 15.0 to 44.9 15.1 to 45.0 0.1 °C
*1 For the setting range, “OFF” can also be set.
*2 When the alarms of EXT BRADY and EXT TACHY are set to ON, setting
of the heart rate alarm is available in the range of EXT BRADY and EXT
TACHY.
*3 Some bedside monitors cannot set the upper limits.
Example: HR alarm setting window Setting Alarm Limits Automatically (Auto Alarm Setting)
The auto alarm setting is the function to calculate and set the upper and lower
limits automatically based on the patient’s current vital values. When [Auto] is
touched on the Alarm Setting window of the Alarm Limits window, the alarm
limits for the parameters are automatically set.
To open the Alarm Limits window, refer to “Manually Setting the Alarms” in this
section.
Following are the calculation formulas.
Alarm Item Lower Limit Upper Limit Unit

ECG HR HR × 0.75 HR × 1.25 beat/min
PR PR × 0.75 PR × 1.25
count/min
RR (RR × 0.75) − 4 (RR × 1.25) + 4
RESP
APNEA (T) — (60/RR) × 2 s
SpO2, SpO2-2 SpO2 − 5, SpO2-2 − 5 —
SpO2 %
Delta SpO2 — 5
(NIBP × 0.75) − 10 (NIBP × 1.25) + 10 mmHg
NIBP/CNIBP (S/D/M)
(NIBP × 0.75) − 1.3 (NIBP × 1.25) + 1.3 kPa
ART, ART2, RAD, DORS, (PRESS × 0.75) − 10 (PRESS × 1.25) + 10 mmHg
AO, FEM, UA, UV, PAP,
(PRESS × 0.75) − 1.3 (PRESS × 1.25) + 1.3 kPa
PRESS (S/D/M) RVP, LVP, P1 to 8
CVP, RAP, LAP, ICP, ICP 2 (PRESS × 0.75) − 5 (PRESS × 1.25) + 5 mmHg
to 4 (PRESS × 0.75) − 0.7 (PRESS × 1.25) + 0.7 kPa
Tskin, Tskin2 to 3, Tcore, TEMP − 0.5 TEMP + 0.5 °C
TEMP Trect, Teso, Ttymp, Tblad,
TEMP − 0.9 TEMP + 0.9 °F
Taxil, Tnaso, T1 to 8
Delta T − 0.5 Delta T + 0.5 °C
Delta T Delta T, Delta T2 to 4
Delta T − 0.9 Delta T + 0.9 °F
Tb − 0.5 Tb + 0.5 °C
Tb
Tb − 0.9 Tb + 0.9 °F
O2 (I) O2 (I) × 0.9 O2 (I) × 1.1
O2 %
O2 (E) O2 (E) × 0.75 O2 (E) × 1.25
CO2 (I) — CO2 (I) × 1.25 mmHg
CO2
ETCO2 ETCO2 × 0.75 ETCO2 × 1.25 kPa

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Alarm Item Lower Limit Upper Limit Unit

N2O (I) (GAS) N2O (I) (GAS) × 0.8 − 5 N2O (I) (GAS) × 1.2 + 5
N2O
N2O (E) (GAS) N2O (E) (GAS) × 0.8 − 5 N2O (E) (GAS) × 1.2 + 5
HAL (I) (GAS) HAL (I) (GAS) × 0.9 − 0.5 HAL (I) (GAS) × 1.1 + 0.5
HAL HAL (E) (GAS) × 0.9 − HAL (E) (GAS) × 1.1 + %
HAL (E) (GAS)
0.5 0.5
ISO (I) (GAS) ISO (I) (GAS) × 0.9 − 0.5 ISO (I) (GAS) × 1.1 + 0.5
ISO
ISO (E) (GAS) ISO (E) (GAS) × 0.9 − 0.5 ISO (E) (GAS) × 1.1 + 0.5
ENF (I) (GAS) ENF (I) (GAS) × 0.9 − 0.5 ENF (I) (GAS) × 1.1 + 0.5 5
ENF
ENF (E) (GAS) ENF (E) (GAS) × 0.9 − 0.5 ENF (E) (GAS) × 1.1 + 0.5
SEV (I) (GAS) SEV (I) (GAS) × 0.9 − 0.5 SEV (I) (GAS) × 1.1 + 0.5
SEV %
SEV (E) (GAS) SEV (E) (GAS) × 0.9 − 0.5 SEV (E) (GAS) × 1.1 + 0.5
DES (I) (GAS) DES (I) (GAS) × 0.8 − 0.5 DES (I) (GAS) × 1.2 + 0.5
DES
DES (E) (GAS) DES (E) (GAS) × 0.8 − 0.5 DES (E) (GAS) × 1.2 + 0.5
CCO CCO × 0.75 CCO × 1.25 L/min
esCCO esCCO × 0.85 esCCO × 1.15 L/min
esCCI esCCI × 0.85 esCCI × 1.15 L/min/m2
MV MV × 0.75 MV × 1.25 L/min
Ppeak Ppeak × 0.75 Ppeak × 1.25 cmH2O
PEEP PEEP × 0.75 PEEP × 1.25 hPa
BIS 40 — —
SEF (EEG) SEF × 0.75 − 2.0 SEF × 1.25 + 2.0 Hz
EEG
TP (EEG) TP × 0.75 − 0.20 TP × 1.25 + 0.20 nW
NOTE
The setting range depends on the bedside monitor. The central monitor
setting might not be applied to the bedside monitor. For the setting range
of the bedside monitor, refer to the Operator’s Manual of the bedside
monitor.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Limit Setting Changed Icon

When the upper and lower limits and ST alarm limits are changed from Alarm
Master 1, a limit setting changed icon can be displayed on the All Beds screen to
notify the change of alarm settings.
If the limit setting changed icon is touched, the All Beds Limits window is
displayed and you can check the changed upper and lower limits (displayed in
red).
NOTE
• To display a limit setting changed icon, [Limit Setting Changed Icon]
of the [System Configuration] → [Alarm] on the System Setup screen
must be set to [ON]. The default setting is [OFF].
• If a technical icon is displayed, the limit setting changed icon is not
displayed.
Limit setting changed icon
When the icon is touched, the All Beds
Limits window is displayed.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Setting the Arrhythmia Alarm

Set the arrhythmia alarm ON or OFF or set the detection condition.
For a bed monitored through an ORG-9100 series multiple patient receiver,

alarm level of each arrhythmia alarm can also be set. Refer to “ORG Setting” in
When the monitored bed is a vital sign telemeter, the alarm level of each 5
arrhythmia alarm can also be set. Refer to “GZ Setting” in Section 6-1 of the
WARNING
For arrhythmia monitoring, set [Arrhythmia Analysis] on the ECG
window to [ON]. Otherwise, there is no sound or indication for
arrhythmia alarms (except for ASYSTOLE).
CAUTION
When the alarm is turned [OFF] for an arrhythmia, there will be no
alarm for that arrhythmia type. There is no message or icon to
indicate that a certain arrhythmia alarm is turned off. Therefore, be
careful when you turn off an arrhythmia alarm.
3. Touch [Arrhythmia Alarm] of the Personal Setup to display the Arrhythmia

Alarm window.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
You can also display the Arrhythmia Alarm window by the following
operation.
Admit/Discharge window. Touch [Alarm Settings] → [Arrhythmia Alarm].
• Touch the [Arrhythmia Alarm] individual function key if [Arrhythmia
Alarm] is registered to an individual function key. For setting individual
function keys, refer to “Changing the All Beds Screen Display Settings” in
Section 6.
4. Set the arrhythmia alarm [ON] or [OFF] or set the detection condition. When
a detection condition is touched, the setting window is displayed.
Alarm [ON] or [OFF] Alarm detection

Touch to change alarm condition
ON or OFF Touch to display setting
window.
Example: EXT TACHY setting window
Applies the
settings and closes
the window.
Setting value
Increase and Decrease keys

Increases or decreases the value
in 1 bpm. Press and hold to
change the value continuously.
Depending on the bedside monitor or vital sign telemeter setting, some items
are not available.
5. ALARM FUNCTION
Alarm Limits Range
Detection Condition
Item Alarm
Setting Range Step
ASYSTOLE ON (fixed) 3 to 10 s 1
V FIB ON (fixed) —
16 to 300 bpm*1
1
V TACHY ON (fixed) The value must be more than V BRADY value (bpm).
VPC RUN value (beats) to 9 beats*1 1
16 to 300 bpm
5
EXT TACHY ON, OFF The value must be the same or more than TACHYCARDIA value 1
(bpm).
15 to 299 bpm
EXT BRADY ON, OFF The value must be the same or less than BRADYCARDIA value 1
(bpm).
16 to 300 bpm*1
1
The value is synchronized with the V TACHY value (bpm).
VPC RUN ON, OFF
3 to 8 beats
1
The value must be the same or less than V TACHY value (beats).
15 to 299 bpm
V BRADY*1 ON, OFF 1
The value must be less than the V TACHY value (bpm).
16 to 300 bpm 1
SV TACHY*1 ON, OFF
3 to 9 beats 1
PAUSE*1 ON, OFF 1.0 to 3.0 s 0.1
TACHYCARDIA*2
—
BRADYCARDIA*2
COUPLET ON, OFF
EARLY VPC ON, OFF
MULTIFORM ON, OFF
—
V RHYTHM*1 ON, OFF
BIGEMINY ON, OFF
TRIGEMINY*1 ON, OFF
FREQ VPC ON, OFF 1 to 99 bpm 1
A-FIB*3, *4 ON, OFF —
End A-FIB*3 ON, OFF 0 to 30 1
IRREGULAR RR*1 ON, OFF
PROLONGED RR ON, OFF —
NO PACER PULSE*1 ON, OFF
PACER NON-
ON, OFF 40 to 480 ms 4
CAPTURE*1
*1 For these items, alarm detection condition can be set when arrhythmia type for bedside monitor is set to “EXTENDED”.
*2 The settings are synchronized with the HR alarm limits settings. The values cannot be set on the Arrhythmia Alarm
setting window.
*3 Available only when all of the following conditions are met:
• Arrhythmia type is set to EXTENDED on the bedside monitor or vital sign telemeter.
• A-FIB detection is set to On on the bedside monitor or vital sign telemeter.
• Network communication protocol is set to 2ND GEN on the bedside monitor or vital sign telemeter.
*4 When using a multiple patient receiver or vital sign telemeter, the Re-Alarm and No Sound keys appear. Select the
device operation after an A-FIB alarm is silenced.
• Re-Alarm: The alarm appears again after the set alarm silence time elapses when the A-FIB alarm status continues.
• No Sound: The alarm does not sound after the set alarm silence time elapses when the A-FIB alarm status continues.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Setting the ST Alarm

Set the ST alarm limits. You can set each alarm manually or automatically in
respect to the current measurement value.
When the ST alarm limits are changed from Alarm Master 1, a limit setting
changed icon can be displayed on the All Beds screen to notify the change. Refer
to “Limit Setting Changed Icon” in this section.
Manually Setting the Alarms

3. Touch [ST Alarm] of the Personal Setup to display the ST Alarm window.
You can also display the ST Alarm window by the following operation.
Admit/Discharge window. Touch [Alarm Settings] → [ST Alarm].
• Touch [ST Alarm] individual function key if [ST Alarm] is registered to
an individual function key. For setting individual function keys, refer to
“Changing the All Beds Screen Display Settings” in Section 6.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
4. Touch the parameter key for set the alarm limits. Set the alarm limits on the
Alarm Setting window.
AUTO
Touch to automatically set the upper/lower
limit of all the measurable leads for the bed.
Upper/lower limit
Current value
Upper/
lower limit Upper limit
Current value is displayed.
Current
value Increase/Decrease keys
Increases or decreases the
value. Press and hold the
key to change the value
continuously.
Lower limit
Current value is displayed.
Auto
Current measurement value Touch to automatically
set the upper or lower
Trendgraph of past four hours Upper/lower limit slide bar
limit of the lead.
is displayed. Upper or lower Touch the bars to set the value.
limit is shown in the blue line
when changing the limit. When setting the limit to OFF, set the
limit to the maximum or minimum value
and touch the increase or decrease key.
5. Touch [ ] to apply the settings and close the Alarm Setting window.
NOTE
If the window is closed without touching [ ], the changed settings
are not applied.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Alarm Limits Range
Setting Range
Item Step Unit
Lower Limit Upper Limit
ST −2.00 to 1.99 −1.99 to 2.00 0.01 mV
Setting ST Alarms with Auto Alarm Setting Functions

The auto alarm setting is the function to calculate and set the upper and lower
limits automatically based on the patient’s current ST values. You can set the
limits of all the measurable leads or each lead separately. For displaying the
ST Alarm window or ST alarm setting window, refer to “Manually Setting the
Alarms” in this section.
Following are the calculation formulas.
Item Lower Limit Upper Limit Unit

ST ST − 0.5 ST + 0.5 mV
ST alarm setting window Touch [Auto] on the ST alarm setting window to set the upper or lower limit of
the lead.
ST Alarm window Touch [Auto] on the ST Alarm window to set the upper or lower limit of all the
measurable leads for the bed.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Setting All Alarms to a Preset Pattern (Alarm Master)

You can set the alarm limits quickly and easily by using an alarm master that
is registered to the central monitor. There are three alarm masters and you can
register settings for your purpose. For alarm master setting, refer to “Alarm
Master” in Section 6-1 of the Administrator’s Guide.
5
3. Touch [Alarm Limits] of the Personal Setup to display the Alarm Limits
window.
You can also display the Alarm Limits window by the following operation.
Admit/Discharge window. Touch [Alarm Settings] → [Alarm Limits].
• Touch the [Alarm Limits] individual function key if [Alarm Limits] is
registered to an individual function key. For setting individual function
6.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
4. Touch [Alarm Master Copy] to display the Alarm Master window.
When the bed is monitored

through the multiple patient
receiver and its data is saved in
this central monitor, the currently
set alarm master is displayed.
5. Select the alarm master and alarm type and check the settings.
Touch to change the alarm
master.
Touch to change the alarm

type.
Arrhythmia Alarm Window of Alarm Master 1

For a bed monitored through an ORG-9100 series
multiple patient receiver which saves its bed data in
this central monitor, Arrhythmia Analysis and QRS
Detection Type are also copied.
Touch [ ] or [ ] to scroll
the window.
Example: When a bed monitored 6. After checking the settings, touch [Apply]. The confirmation window
through a multiple patient receiver
appears.
7. Touch [Yes]. The alarm limits, arrhythmia alarm and ST alarm master
settings are copied to the alarm settings. If the bed is monitored through an
ORG-9100 series multiple patient receiver, ECG analysis detection leads and
QRS detection type are also copied.
8. Change individual alarm settings on each alarm window if necessary.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Adjusting the Alarm Sound Volume
Adjust the alarm sound volume at the Sound Control window on the System
Setup. There are seven volume levels.
NOTE
• You cannot set the alarm sound volume to OFF. 5
• You cannot lower the alarm volume set at [Alarm Volume Limit] on
the [Alarm] of the System Configuration window. For [Alarm Volume
Limit], refer to “System Configuration Settings” in Section 6-1 of the
1. Touch [Menu] on the left lower corner of the screen → [System Setup] to
When [System Setup] is assigned to one of the all beds function keys,
the Information window of the System Setup screen can be displayed by
touching the function key. Refer to “Function Keys Setting” in Section 6-1
of the Administrator’s Guide to assign a function to the function key.
2. Touch [Sound Control] to display the Sound Control window.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
3. Touch the [ ] or [ ] key to adjust the volume. Every time you

change the volume, there is sound at the selected volume.
Alarm volume
(white)
Set on the System
Setup screen.
Alarm volume limit

(gray)
You cannot set the
volume lower than the
alarm volume limit.
Increases or decreases the
value.
4. Touch [All Beds] to return to the All Beds screen.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Alarm Notice
You can set the alarm notice function to display an alarm notice icon on the All
Beds screen, data area of the bed and Individual Bed window when a vital sign,
arrhythmia or technical alarm occurs on this central monitor.
NOTE 5
• To activate the alarm notice function, you need to set the notice mode
at [Alarm Notice Icon] on [System Configuration] → [Alarm] of the
System Setup screen. [ON] is the factory default setting. Refer to
“System Configuration Settings” in Section 6-1 of the Administrator’s
Guide.
• The alarm notice function is only available for beds whose data is saved
in this central monitor.
• When you use the alarm notice function and there are two or more
central monitors in the network, confirm that all central monitors in the
network have the same settings for [Alarm Notice Icon] on the [System
Configuration] → [Alarm] window of the System Setup screen. If some
central monitors activate the alarm notice function and others do not,
you might misjudge that there was no alarm for a bed by observing the
bed at a central monitor where the notice function is not activated.
• When 24 or 32 beds are monitored, the alarm notice icon is not
displayed on the data area for each bed of the Individual Bed window.
Using an Alarm Notice

When an alarm whose level is the same or higher than the setting on the System
Setup screen occurs, the alarm notice icon is displayed on the All Beds screen,
data area of the bed and Individual Bed window. You can set the [Alarm Notice
Level] on the System Setup screen. Refer to “System Configuration Settings” in
Touch the alarm notice icon to display the Event List window and check details
of the alarms. When the screen is changed, the alarm for the bed is silenced.
NOTE
The oldest file of the Event List is automatically deleted to create a new
file. If an alarm history file with an alarm notice icon is deleted before you
touch the icon, the icon remains on the screen.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Alarm notice icon

• This icon disappears after you touch this icon
to display the Event List window.
• When the Event List window is displayed
by another procedure, the icon does not
disappear.
• If an alarm ends, the icon does not disappear
until the icon is touched.
• The icon disappears when the bed is
discharged or when monitoring is paused or
when the bed’s data is deleted.
Touch to sort the files by

presence of an alarm notice
icon.
Alarm notice icon [ ]

• The icon appears beside the event
list file on the Event List window
when the Event List window is not The cursor is on the newest file among alarm
displayed by touching the alarm history files with the alarm notice icon.
notice icon. The icon disappears
when the window is changed to
other windows.
• The icon disappears when the bed
is discharged, monitoring is paused
or when the bed’s data is deleted. The alarm occur, finish, duration Alarm level Event type Event
time on the central monitor

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Technical Icon
NOTE
To display the technical icons, [Technical Icon] of the [System
Configuration] → [Alarm] on the System Setup must be set to [ON].
The default setting is [OFF]. Refer to “System Configuration Settings” in
Section 6-1 of the Administrator’s Guide. 5
You can set the technical icon display function to display an ECG or SpO2
technical icon on the All Beds screen when the ECG or SpO2 technical status
become yellow or red.
When a technical icon is touched, the Alarm Events window of the bed and
action message for the icon are displayed.
The technical icon disappears when the technical status becomes green or [Yes]
is touched for the action message.
ECG technical icon
When the technical icon is touched,
the Alarm Event window of the bed is
displayed.
SpO2 technical
icon
Action message
When [Yes] is touched, the technical icon
and action message disappear. When [No]
is touched, the message disappears but the
icon is displayed continuously.
When the ECG and SpO2 measurement conditions become yellow or red at the
same time, only the ECG technical icon is displayed. When the icon is touched,
both ECG and SpO2 action messages are displayed.

5. ALARM FUNCTION
Checking the Proper Functioning of the Alarm
You can check that the alarm indicator and alarm sound are functioning properly.
During an alarm occurrence, you cannot check the alarm function.
CAUTION
When the monitor is turned on, check that a single beep sounds and
the red, yellow, cyan and green alarm indicator lamps blink once.
This shows that the alarm is functioning properly.
1. Touch [Menu] on the left lower corner of the screen → [Alarm Check] to
display the Alarm Check window.
When [Alarm Check] is assigned to one of the all beds function keys, the
Alarm Check window can be displayed by touching the function key. Refer
to “Function Keys Setting” in Section 6-1 of the Administrator’s Guide to
assign a function to the function key.
2. Check the alarm indicator and alarm sound.

• Check that the alarm indicator lights in red, yellow, blue and green
respectively.
• Check that the advisory alarm sounds (single beep or two-note melody:
E-C (twice)) at the set volume. For setting alarm volume, refer to
“Adjusting the Alarm Sound Volume” in this section.

Section 6 All Beds Screen
Overview............................................................................................................................................................... 6.2
Displaying the All Beds Screen.................................................................................................................. 6.3
Description of All Beds Screen............................................................................................................................. 6.4
Monitored Group........................................................................................................................................ 6.5 6
Transmitter Battery Status Icon.................................................................................................................. 6.5
Wandering Detection and Falling Down Detection Icons........................................................................... 6.6
Changing the All Beds Screen Display Settings................................................................................................... 6.7
Displaying All Beds Screen Setup Window................................................................................................ 6.7
Setting the All Beds Screen Setup............................................................................................................. 6.8
Setting Items.............................................................................................................................................. 6.9
Wave Selection................................................................................................................................ 6.9
Numerical Selection....................................................................................................................... 6.10
Other.............................................................................................................................................. 6.11
Function Keys................................................................................................................................. 6.11
Setting Parameter Priority.................................................................................................................................. 6.12
Displaying the Parameter Priority Window............................................................................................... 6.12
Setting Parameter Priority........................................................................................................................ 6.13
Recording on the All Beds Screen...................................................................................................................... 6.14
Manual Recording.................................................................................................................................... 6.14
Settings for Manual Recording....................................................................................................... 6.14
All Beds Recording................................................................................................................................... 6.14
Settings for All Beds Recording..................................................................................................... 6.15
Other Recordings..................................................................................................................................... 6.15

6. ALL BEDS SCREEN
On the All Beds screen, you can view waveforms and numeric data of all
monitored beds at the same time. This section explains how to display the All
Beds screen, screen description, display settings and recording on the All Beds
screen.
Overview
NOTE
Sometimes numeric data and messages disappear for a moment. This is
normal and occurs when the display is refreshed.
WARNING WARNING
Do not diagnose a patient based only on data After attaching electrodes, probes and sensors
acquired by the central monitor. Overall on the patient and connecting cables to the
judgement must be performed by a physician bedside monitor and/or transmitter, check that
who understands the features, limitations and there is no error messages and the waveforms
characteristics of the central monitor and by and numeric data are appropriately displayed on
reading the biomedical signals acquired by other the screen. If there is an error message, or
instruments. waveform or numeric data is not appropriate,
check the electrodes, probes and sensor
attachment, patient condition and settings on the
bedside monitor and/or transmitter and remove
the cause.
WARNING
A physician must be within the range where he/
she can hear the alarm sound of the central
monitor while monitoring a patient on the central
monitor. If the physician cannot hear the alarm
sound, critical changes on the patient may be
overlooked.

6. ALL BEDS SCREEN
Displaying the All Beds Screen

The All Beds screen is the main screen for monitoring. All the other screens have
an [All Beds] key at the bottom. Touch [All Beds] to display the All Beds screen.
NOTE
When a screen other than the All Beds screen is displayed and there is
no key operation for a certain period, the screen automatically returns to
the All Beds screen. You can set the period at [Screen Timeout] on the
System Configuration window of the System Setup screen. The factory
default setting is set to five minutes.

6. ALL BEDS SCREEN
Description of All Beds Screen
You can choose the number of beds: 32 Patients, 24 Patients, 16 Patients, 12

Patients, 10 Patients, 8 Patients (4 × 2), 8 Patients (8 × 1), 6 Patients (3 × 2),
6 Patients (6 × 1), 4 Patients (2 × 2), 4 Patients (4 × 1), 2 Patients (1 × 2),
2 Patients (2 × 1) to be displayed on the [Monitor Setting] → [Screen
Composition] → [Number of Patients on All Beds Screen] of the System Setup
screen. For each bed, you can set the display settings for waveforms, numeric
data and other items.
[»] *1 Displayed when the monitored

Displays individual bed function keys and changes the windows Bed name bed is a transmitter.
which are set on the System Setup screen. You can also change the
displaying individual bed function keys. Refer to Section 6. Touch
[ « ] to hide the individual bed function keys. Transmitter battery
Numeric data status icon*1
The number of numeric data that can be displayed on the screen Refer to later in this
depends on the Display setting. When a vital sign alarm occurs, Transmitter channel*1 section.
the numeric data is highlighted. When an alarm occurs for a
Note display
parameter which is not displayed on the screen, the displayed Patient name Refer to Section 4. Waveform
parameter changes to the alarmed parameter and is highlighted.
[ ]
Prints displayed
numeric data and
waveforms which
is set to print (up to
3 ch).
Pacing detect Alarm OFF Message area Wandering/Falling

QRS icon Sensitivity
Management OFF icon icon Messages are displayed. down detection icon*2
group color Lead or waveform name Refer to later in this
*2 Displayed when the monitored bed is a vital sign telemeter. section.
NOTE: You can change the display type when Data area for each bed
monitoring more than one blood pressure When you touch inside the frame for a bed, the Individual Paused bed
waveform on [Display] → [BP Scale] of the Bed window for the touched bed is displayed. Refer to Section 4.
PRESS window (Refer to Section 12) or
[Other] → [BP Scale] of the Individual Bed
Screen Setup window (Refer to Section 8).
[ ]
Appears on a bed when an alarm occurs.
Touch to silence the alarm.
[ ]
Appears on a bed when an alarm occurs
if the [Alarm Notice Icon] is set to [ON].
Touch to display the Event List window.
Refer to Section 5.
When a CRISIS or WARNING level

alarm occurs, the data display frame of the
alarming bed blinks or is highlighted. Refer
to Section 5.
Menu Messages about the All beds function key Date and time
Displays each screen. system are displayed. Changes the screen. The screen for the
function keys are set on the System Setup Icons
screen. Refer to the Administrator's Guide.

6. ALL BEDS SCREEN
Monitored Group
On each bed of the All Beds screen, monitored group color is displayed
corresponding to the monitored group. The monitored group of each bed is set on
the [Admit/Discharge] window. A color for each group can be set on the [Pre-
registration] → [Group Color] window on the System Setup screen. Refer to
“Pre-registration” in Section 6-1 of the Administrator’s Guide.
Transmitter Battery Status Icon

When the battery of the transmitter is weak, the “Change Transmitter Battery” 6
message/alarm and change battery icon is displayed on the right of the receiving
channel of each bed. If the battery runs out after that, a “COMMUNICATION
LOSS” alarm occurs and a large change battery icon is displayed.
The “Change Transmitter Battery” alarm is displayed only when AVAILABLE

ALARM TYPES - ORG Setting - System Setup screen is set to ALL. Refer to
“ORG Setting” in Section 6-1 of the Administrator’s Guide.
Change transmitter
Change battery icon battery message/alarm
Change battery icon Signal loss alarm
The large change transmitter battery icon disappears in the following cases:
• When the central monitor receives a signal from the transmitter again.
• When the channel is changed.
• When the patient is admitted or discharged.
• When the central monitor power is turned on or off.
NOTE
The “Change Transmitter Battery” message/alarm and the change battery
icon might only be displayed for a short time depending on the battery.
When the message is displayed, change the battery immediately.
For changing the battery, refer to the transmitter operator’s manual.
When a monitored bed is a transmitter with a battery status display function,

the battery power is displayed in four levels. For details, refer to the Operator’s
Manual of the transmitter.

6. ALL BEDS SCREEN
Indication Battery Status

Batteries are fully charged
Batteries are getting low
Batteries are low
Batteries are almost empty
Transmitter battery status icon
You can select whether or not to display the transmitter battery status icon in
[Monitor Setting] → [Display Settings] → [All Beds Screen] of the System
Setup screen. Refer to “Monitor Setting” in Section 6-1 of the Administrator’s
Guide.
Wandering Detection and Falling Down Detection Icons

This function is only available when the vital sign telemeter is used. If the patient
with the vital sign telemeter moves around or falls down, a technical alarm is
generated and the icon appears on the All Beds screen, Individual Bed window
and the data area of each screen.
You can select whether or not to display the falling down detection and walking
detection icons in [System Configuration] → [System] → [Screen] of the System
Setup screen. Refer to “Monitor Setting” in Section 6-1 of the Administrator’s
Guide.
Falling down Wandering
detection icon detection icon

6. ALL BEDS SCREEN
Changing the All Beds Screen Display Settings
Set the settings for the All Beds screen display for each bed on the All Beds
Screen Setup window of the Setup window.
The following settings can be set on the [Monitor Setting] → [Display Settings]
→ [All Beds Screen] of the System Setup screen.
• All Beds Numeric Area (Normal, Wide)
• All Beds Numeric Size (Normal, Large) 6
• Display Patient Name (ON, OFF)
• Large Patient Name (ON, OFF)
Displaying All Beds Screen Setup Window

1. Touch the desired bed on the all beds screen to display individual bed
window.
3. Touch [All Beds Screen Setup] of the Setup Menu to display the All Beds
Screen Setup window.

6. ALL BEDS SCREEN
You can also display the All Beds Screen Setup window by the following
procedures.
• Touch [Admit/Discharge] on the individual window to display the [Admit/
Discharge] window. Touch [Display Settings] → [All Beds Screen Setup].
• Touch [All Beds Screen Setup] individual function key if [All Beds Screen
Setup] is registered to an individual function key. For setting individual
Section 6.
Setting the All Beds Screen Setup

Set the settings for the All Beds screen display for each bed by referring to the
“Setting Items” later in this section.
Example: Setting Wave Selection

Window change tab
Touch to change windows.
You can check the display on the

All Beds screen.
Set the settings by touching each item.
Waveform
display order
Parameter of
the waveform
Sensitivity and
scale can be
changed by
touching the key.

6. ALL BEDS SCREEN
Setting Items
Wave Selection
Item Settings Description

Wave Selection Display Auto, Auto + 1 ECG, Selects the waveforms to display on the All Beds screen for
Settings Auto + 2 ECG, Manual each bed. Up to 18 waveforms (including up to 16 stored full
disclosure waveforms) can be displayed on the All Beds screen.
All parameters selected for the Display Settings might not be
displayed.
• Auto: The waveforms are selected automatically depending 6

on the parameter priority. When 12 lead ECG is
monitored, 12 lead ECG and other waveforms are
displayed.
• Auto + 1 ECG:
The ECG waveform which is set to [Arrhythmia
Detection Lead 1] is displayed. Other waveforms are
selected automatically depending on the parameter
priority.
• Auto + 2 ECG:
The ECG waveforms which are set to [Arrhythmia
Detection Lead 1] and [Arrhythmia Detection Lead
2] are displayed. Other waveforms are selected
automatically depending on the parameter priority.
• Manual: The user selects the waveforms to be displayed.

Waveforms can be selected from the currently
measured parameters and the parameters which
are registered on [Parameter Setup] → [Parameter
Selection] of the System Setup screen.
Touch the desired parameter key to display the
setting window and select the parameter of the
waveform. If the selected parameter key is touched
again or [None] is touched, nothing is selected.
Display
order of the
waveforms
Sens/Scale Set for each waveform. Sets the sensitivity and scale of the displayed waveforms. The
sensitivity and scale setting is synchronized with the setting of
the Individual Bed Window Display Setting and each parameter
setting window.
Touch the Sens/Scale key to display the setting
window and set the sensitivity and scale.
Touching Customize scale key to select a custom scale for the

waveform. The value of the custom scale is set on the Trend
window.

6. ALL BEDS SCREEN
Numerical Selection

Numerical Display Auto, Manual Selects the numeric data to be displayed on the All Beds screen. All the
Selection Settings selected numeric data might not be displayed depending on the screen
composition and monitoring parameters.
The first parameter is displayed in larger size and the other parameters
are displayed in the remaining area in equal smaller size when the
[All Beds Numeric Size] is set to [Large]. However, on the All Beds
screen or when monitoring 24 or 32 beds, the first parameter cannot be
displayed in larger size.
When you select the S/D/M display format of blood pressure

measurement values (refer to Section 12), S/D/M is displayed as large as
possible.
• Auto: The displayed parameter(s) are automatically selected

from the currently measured parameters according to the
parameter priority.
• Manual: You can choose the parameter(s) to be displayed on the All

Beds screen from the currently measured parameter(s) or
from the parameter(s) selected on the [Parameter Setup] →
[Parameter Selection] of the System Setup screen.
Touch the desired parameter key to display setting window
and select the parameter. When the selected parameter is
touched again or [None] is touched, nothing is selected.
Display
order of the
numeric value
NOTE
If the number of measured parameters is less than the selected
maximum number of parameters, the number of displayed
parameters decreases automatically.

6. ALL BEDS SCREEN
Other

Other All Beds Normal, Wide Selects the size of the numeric area on the All Beds screen.
Numeric
• Normal
Area*
• Wide
All Beds Normal, Large Selects the size of the numeric data on the All Beds screen. 6
Numeric
• Normal
Size*
• Large
HR Display HR+VPC+ST, HR Only Selects the display format when the display order of HR is 1 on
Display of the Numerical Selection.
• HR+VPC+ST: VPC count and ST value are displayed together
with the heart rate.
• HR: HR only
* [All Beds Numeric Area] and [All Beds Numeric Size] settings cannot be used when monitoring 24 or 32 beds.
Function Keys

Function Keys The factory default settings are Selects the individual function keys displaying on the All Beds
underlined. screen when [ » ] of each bed is touched.
• Screen
Individual Waveforms,
Individual Numeric Vital Signs,
ECG 12 Leads
• Personal Setup
Admit/Discharge, Alarm Limits,
Arrhythmia Alarm, ST Alarm
• Other Setup
All Beds Screen Setup,
Individual Bed Screen Setup,
Parameter Priority, Function
Keys, Recording, Report Touch the desired individual function key to display
• Parameter Setup the setting window and select the function or window.
ECG, RESP, SpO2, NIBP, If the selected key is touched again or [None] is
PRESS, TEMP, Anesthesia Gas touched, nothing is selected.
• Review
Trend, Tabular Trend, Full
Disclosure, Expanded
Waveform, ST Recall,
Arrhythmia Recall,
Hemodynamics List, ECG
12 Lead Analysis, Event List,
Alarm Events, SpO2 Trend,
Review*
• Operation
NIBP Measurement, Learn ECG
• None
* The Review window that is displayed when [Review] on the Individual Bed window is touched is displayed. (Default:
Custom Review)
6. ALL BEDS SCREEN
Setting Parameter Priority
Set the parameter priority for each bed on the Parameter Priority window. The
parameter priority is synchronized with the Individual Bed window.
Displaying the Parameter Priority Window

1. Touch the desired bed on the All Beds screen to display the individual bed
window.
3. Touch [Parameter Priority] of the Setup Menu to display the Parameter

Priority window.
You can also display the Parameter Priority window by either of the
following procedures.
• Touch [Admit/Discharge] on the individual window to display the [Admit/
Discharge] window. Touch [Display Settings] → [Parameter Priority].
• Touch [Parameter Priority] of the individual function key if [Parameter
Priority] is registered to an individual function key. For setting of
individual function keys, refer to the Administrator’s Guide.

6. ALL BEDS SCREEN
Setting Parameter Priority

Set the parameter priority by repeating steps 1 and 2 for each parameter.
1. Touch a parameter to change its priority.
2. Touch the priority position to move the parameter to. The parameter which
was selected in step 1 moves to the priority which is selected in step 2.
Example 1: Change ST from priority 3 to priority 8

Before After
6
Parameter
priority
The parameters of
priority 4 to 8 move to
priority 3 to 7.
ST moves from priority

3 to 8.
2
Example 2: Change AO from priority 8 to priority 3
Before After
Parameter
priority AO moves from priority
8 to 3
The parameters of
priority 3 to 7 is move to
priority 4 to 8.
Reset
Return the parameter priority to the default setting.

6. ALL BEDS SCREEN
Recording on the All Beds Screen
Manual Recording
Touch [ ] of the desired bed on the All Beds screen. The waveform of the
selected period and numeric data are printed on the WS-960P Recorder Unit.
To stop recording, touch [ ] again during recording.
Settings for Manual Recording
Set for each bed.
Set the following items on [Recording] of the Setup window.

• Select recording parameters (first wave to third wave) on the [Record Wave
Selection]. When [NONE] is selected, no waveform is recorded.
• Set the waveform sweep speed (25 mm/s, 50 mm/s) on [Recording Sweep
Speed].
For the settings, refer to Section 10.
Set the following items on the System Setup screen.

• Recording time (Manual Recording)
• Recording start position (Immediate, From Mark)
• Manual recording mode (Real Time, Delay)
For the settings, refer to “Recording” in Section 6-1 of the Administrator’s

Guide.
Recording Example
All Beds Recording

Manual recording for all monitored beds on the All Beds screen is performed
automatically.
NOTE
[Record All] key must be registered to an all beds function key on
the [Function Keys] setting of the System Setup screen. Refer to the

6. ALL BEDS SCREEN
Touch the [Record All] function key to start recording. To stop recording, touch
[Record All] again.
After recording all the beds, recording automatically stops.
Settings for All Beds Recording
Set for each bed. The settings are same as the settings for manual recording.
Refer to “Settings for Manual Recording” in this section.
6
Recording Example
Other Recordings
On the All Beds screen, the following recordings are available with the WS-960P
Recorder Unit.
• Auto Recording
Periodic Recording: refer to “Periodic Recording” in Section 10.
Alarm Recording: refer to “Alarm Recording” in Section 5.
• Remote Recording: refer to “Call Recording” in Section 10.

Section 7 All Beds Alarms Window
Overview of All Beds Alarms Window.................................................................................................................. 7.2

Displaying an All Beds Alarms Window...................................................................................................... 7.2
All Beds Alarm Events Window............................................................................................................................ 7.4
Displaying an All Beds Alarm Events Window............................................................................................ 7.4
Changing the Display Type......................................................................................................................... 7.5
About the Technical Status......................................................................................................................... 7.6 7
All Beds Limits Window........................................................................................................................................ 7.7
Displaying the All Beds Limits Window....................................................................................................... 7.7
Printing on the All Beds Alarms Window.............................................................................................................. 7.8

7. ALL BEDS ALARMS WINDOW
On the All Beds Alarms window, you can check the alarm events of several
patients on one window and check the upper and lower limits alarm settings.
This section explains how to display the window and change the display format,
window layout and recording on the window.
Overview of All Beds Alarms Window
The All Beds Alarms window consists of two windows.

• All Beds Alarm Events window
• All Beds Limits window
Displaying an All Beds Alarms Window

Touch [Menu] on the left lower corner of the screen → [All Beds Alarm Events]
or [All Beds Limits] to display each All Beds Alarms window.
When [All Beds Alarm Events] or [All Beds Limits] is assigned to one of
the all beds function keys, the All Beds Alarms window can be displayed by
touching the function key. Refer to “Function Keys Setting” in Section 6-1 of the
Administrator’s Guide to assign a function to the function key.

Example: All Beds Alarm Events window
Tabs
Change the display format of the All Beds Alarms window. Each group is set on the
Admit/Discharged window.
[Admitted Patient]: Displayed in the same format as the All beds screen.
[Group A to J]: Displays the group of beds set on the Admit/Discharged window.
Group name is set in [Pre-registration] → [Group Color]. Refer
to the Administrator’s Guide, Section 6-1.
[ ]
Changes the display type.
[ ]
In dual display composition, touch [ ] → [Change Disp.] to display the
setting window and select beds to be displayed on the window. In single
display composition, only the [Main and Second Display] is displayed.
[Main and Second Display]: Displays all registered beds on the central
monitor.
[Main Display]: Displays registered beds on the main display.
[Second Display]: Displays registered beds on the second display.
Displays the All Beds Displays each All Beds Alarms Returns to the All Beds screen.
screen. window.

All Beds Alarm Events Window
The All Beds Alarm Events window displays up to 120 hours of alarm events for
the several patients on one window in the most recent 10,000 files.
NOTE
• The All Beds Alarm Events window is only available at the central
monitor where the bed’s data is saved.
• After 10,000 files are created for the patient, the oldest file of the patient
is automatically deleted when a new file is created.
Specified alarm events are displayed depending on the following display type.
• Vital Alarm Event
• Arrhythmia Alarm Event
• Technical Alarm Event
To change the display type, refer to the “Changing the Display Type” in this
section.
Displaying an All Beds Alarm Events Window

Touch [Menu] on the left lower corner of the screen → [All Beds Alarm Events]
to display the All Beds Alarm Events window.
The All Beds Alarm Events window can be displayed by touching [All Beds
Alarm Events] on the bottom of the screen.
When [All Beds Alarm Events] is assigned to one of the all beds function keys,
the All Beds Alarm Events window can be displayed by touching the function
key. Refer to “Function Keys Setting” in Section 6-1 of the Administrator’s
Guide to assign a function to the function key.

Alarm event
Alarm Alarm Displays in color corresponding
Patient name and bed name Generated Recovered to its alarm level from alarm
generation to recovery.
Technical status
Displays the judged
Display Item
technical status. Refer
Displays specified alarm
to later in this section.
events depending on the
display type.
Tabs
Changes the display format of the All
Beds Alarms window.
7
Touching each bed area displays
the Individual Bed window (Alarm
Events window). Refer to Section 9.
[ ]
Changes the
display type.
Display time width

Touch to change the displayed Displays each window.
time width. (1, 2, 4, 8, 12, 24, 48, Data display time range
96, 120 hours) Indicates the display time range on the
window. [ ]
In dual display composition, touch
[ ] → [Change Disp.] to display
the setting window and select beds to
be displayed on the window.
Changing the Display Type

Touch [ ] to display the setting window and change the display type of the
All Beds Alarm Events window. The alarm events display depends on the display
type.
Display Type: Vital Alarm Event
Display Item Alarms Displayed in the Alarm Events

HR + PR HR and PR vital sign alarms
ART* + NIBP ART* and NIBP vital sign alarms
SpO2 SpO2 vital sign alarms
CO2 and RR vital sign alarms and APNEA
CO2 + RR + APNEA
alarm
* Typical labels of arterial pressure (ART, ART2, RAD, DORS, AO, and FEM)

Display Type: Arrhythmia Alarm Event

ASYTOLE + V FIB + V TACHY ASYSTOLE, V FIB, V TACHY
TACHY + BRADY TACHYCARDIA, BRADYCARDIA
VPC RUN VPC RUN
ECG Technical LEAD OFF and NOISE alarms
Display Type: Technical Alarm Event

ECG Technical LEAD OFF and NOISE alarms
ART + NIBP ART*1 and NIBP technical alarms
SpO2 Technical SpO2 technical alarms
SIGNAL LOSS*2 SIGNAL LOSS alarm
*1 Typical labels of arterial pressure (ART, ART2, RAD, DORS, AO, and FEM)
*2 “COMMUNICATION LOSS” is displayed when the monitored bed is a
bedside monitor on the network.
For details about technical alarms, refer to “Error Messages” in Section 14.
About the Technical Status

Technical status The technical status judged by the number of technical alarms in the last hour
for each bed is displayed on the All Beds Alarm Events window.
The judgment is done in each ECG, SpO2 and Other category and the color of the
highest level is displayed.
Technical status display and default setting for condition
Technical Status Condition (Default)

Green Good Less than 5/hour
Yellow Not bad 5 to 10/hour
Red Bad More than 10/hour
The condition can be changed on [System Configuration] → [Alarm Events] of

the System Setup screen. Refer to “System Configuration Settings” in Section
6-1 of the Administrator’s Guide.

All Beds Limits Window
On a All Beds Limits window, you can display the alarm limits for several
patients on one window.
Upper and lower limit settings are set on the Alarm Limits window. Refer to
“Setting Alarm Limits” in Section 5.
Displaying the All Beds Limits Window

7
Touch [Menu] on the left lower corner of the screen → [All Beds Limits] to
display the All Beds Limits window.
The All Beds Limits window can be displayed by touching the [All Beds Limits]
on the bottom of the All Beds Alarms window.
When [All Beds Limits] is assigned to one of the all beds function keys, the All
Beds Limits window can be displayed by touching the function key. Refer to
“Function Keys Setting” in Section 6-1 of the Administrator’s Guide to assign a
function to the function key.
Touching the each bed name
displays the All Beds Limits
window. Refer to “Displaying
an All Beds Alarms Window” in Patient name and bed name Parameter
Displays the monitoring parameter or
this section. parameter set on [Parameter Setup] →
[Parameter Selection] on the System Setup
screen.
Upper/lower limit
Tabs
Change the display format of the
All Beds Alarms window.
Upper and lower alarm limits

which are changed from Alarm
Master 1 are displayed in red
[ < ][ > ] Displays each window. In dual display composition, touch

Scrolls the window [ ] → [Change Disp.] to display the
left to right. setting window and select beds to be
displayed on the window.

Printing on the All Beds Alarms Window
Display the window and touch [ ]. With the laser printer, you can print the
displayed window.

Section 8 Individual Bed Window
Overview............................................................................................................................................................... 8.2
Displaying the Individual Waveforms Window............................................................................................ 8.2
Displaying the Individual Numeric Vital Signs Window or the ECG 12 Leads Window.............................. 8.3
Description of the Individual Bed Window............................................................................................................ 8.4
Individual Waveforms Window.................................................................................................................... 8.4
Individual Numeric Vital Signs Window...................................................................................................... 8.5
ECG 12 Leads Window.............................................................................................................................. 8.6
Changing the Individual Bed Window Display Settings........................................................................................ 8.7 8
Setting the Individual Bed Window Setup................................................................................................... 8.8
Setting Items.............................................................................................................................................. 8.9
Wave Selection................................................................................................................................ 8.9
Numerical Selection....................................................................................................................... 8.10
Other.............................................................................................................................................. 8.11
Recording on the Individual Bed Window........................................................................................................... 8.12
Settings for Manual Recording....................................................................................................... 8.12
Individual Bed Window Printing................................................................................................................ 8.13
Other Recordings..................................................................................................................................... 8.13

8. INDIVIDUAL BED WINDOW
The Individual Bed window displays waveforms and numerical data of one
monitored bed. This section explains how to display the Individual Bed window
and change the display format, screen layout and recording on the window.
Overview
The Individual Bed window consists of three windows.

• Individual Waveforms window
• Individual Numeric Vital Signs window
• ECG 12 Leads window
NOTE
Sometimes numeric data and messages disappear for a moment. This is
normal and occurs when the display is refreshed.
Displaying the Individual Waveforms Window

On the All Beds screen, touch the data area of the desired bed.
When [Individual Waveforms] is assigned to one of the individual function keys,

the Individual Waveforms window can be displayed by touching the function
key. For setting individual function keys, refer to “Changing the All Beds Screen
Display Settings” in Section 6.

Displaying the Individual Numeric Vital Signs Window or the ECG 12 Leads Window
1. Display the Individual Waveforms window.
2. Touch [ ] to display the Individual Bed Window Menu.
3. Touch [Individual Numeric Vital Signs] or [ECG 12 Leads] on the Individual

Bed Window Menu to change the window.

Description of the Individual Bed Window
Individual Waveforms Window

The Individual Bed window displays up to 16 waveforms and numerical data
for one bed selected from the monitored beds. Waveforms and numerical data
display can be set for each bed.
When [Individual Bed Screen Setup] → [Wave Selection] → [Display Settings]

is set to [Auto] on the Setup window and 12 lead ECG is monitored, the 12 lead
ECG and other parameter waveforms are displayed.
*1 Displayed when the monitored bed is a transmitter.
Bed name Transmitter battery status icon*1
[ ]
Numeric Data and Waveform Touch to silence the alarm.
The numeric data and waveform display [ ]
on the data area depends on the display Receiving channel*1 Appears on a bed when an alarm occurs
settings of the All Beds Screen. Patient name if the [Alarm Notice Icon] is set to [ON].
: Vital sign alarm limit off icon Touch to display the Event List window.
Management group color : Non-paced icon Refer to Section 5.
Bed name/Patient name Message area Note
Messages are displayed. Refer to Section 4.
Receiving channel*
Waveform : Wandering detection icon*2

Sensitivity
Lead name Touch the waveform : Falling down detection icon*2
Message area to display the setting 2
[ ] * Displayed when the monitored
Messages are window to change the
Records displayed numeric bed is a vital sign telemeter.
displayed. sensitivity and scale.
data and waveforms. Numeric data
When a vital sign alarm occurs, the numeric data is highlighted. When an alarm occurs for
a parameter which is not displayed on the screen, the displayed parameter changes to the
Data area for each bed alarmed parameter and is highlighted. Upper and lower limits can be changed by touching the
When you touch inside the frame for a bed, numeric data and displaying the setting window.
the Individual Bed window for the touched
bed is displayed. The background of the
selected bed turns blue.
The background can be set to off. Refer to
“Selecting Bed Display” in Section 6-2 of
[ ]
[ ]
Appears on a bed when an alarm occurs if
the [Alarm Notice Icon] is set to [ON]. Touch
to display the Event List window. Refer to
Section 5.
When a CRISIS or WARNING level
alarm occurs, the data display frame of the
alarming bed blinks or is highlighted. Refer
to Section 5.
Menu Date and time
Messages about system are Records or prints the displayed
Displays each screen
displayed. window. Icons
or window.
Displays each screen. Returns to the previous screen or window.

For the basic operation, refer to the “Basic Operation on the Individual Bed
Window” in Section 1.
Individual Numeric Vital Signs Window

On the Individual Numeric Vital Signs window, numeric data of up to
135 parameters can be displayed for the patient. Numeric display settings for
each bed can be set.
*1 Displayed when the monitored bed is a transmitter. [ ]

Bed name Transmitter battery status icon*1 Appears on a bed when an alarm occurs.
[ ]
Appears on a bed when an alarm occurs
Receiving channel*1
Patient name if the [Alarm Notice Icon] is set to [ON].
8
Touch to display the Event List window.
: Vital sign alarm limit off icon Refer to Section 5.
: Non-paced icon
Message area Note
On the Expand Individual Bed screen, Messages are displayed. Refer to Section 4.
the waveforms are displayed to the
right of the numeric data. Refer to the
“Expand Individual Bed Screen” in
Section 1.
*2 Displayed when the monitored bed is a : Wandering detection icon*2

vital sign telemeter. : Falling down detection icon*2
Numeric data
When a vital sign alarm occurs, the numeric data is highlighted. Upper and lower
limits can be changed by touching the numeric data and displaying the setting
window. Refer to Section 5.

Same as the Individual
Waveforms window.
Menu
Records or prints the Date and time
Displays each screen. Message about the system are
displayed window.
displayed. Icons
Displays each screen. Returns to the previous

screen or window.

ECG 12 Leads Window

On the ECG 12 Leads window, the following monitoring ECG waveforms and
numeric data are displayed.
• Waveforms
I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, V6, V, MCL, ECG1, ECG2
• Numeric data
HR, VPC, ST (I), ST (II), ST (III), ST (aVR), ST (aVL), ST (aVF), ST (V1),
ST (V2), ST (V3), ST (V4), ST (V5), ST (V6), ST (V), ST (MCL),
ST (ECG1), ST (ECG2)
*1 Displayed when the monitored bed is a transmitter.
Bed name Transmitter battery status icon*1
Receiving channel*1
Patient name
Message area
Messages are displayed.
Waveform
: Wandering detection icon*2
Lead name Sensitivity Touch the waveform to display
: Falling down detection icon*2
the setting window to change the
*2 Displayed when the monitored
sensitivity and scale.
Numeric data bed is a vital sign telemeter.
When a vital sign alarm occurs, the numeric data is highlighted. When an alarm occurs for
a parameter which is not displayed on the screen, the displayed parameter changes to the
alarmed parameter and is highlighted.
QRS sync icon

Same as the Individual
Waveforms window.
Menu
Displays each screen. Message about the system are
displayed window.
displayed. Icons
Displays each screen. Returns to the previous

screen or window.
Changing the Individual Bed Window Display Settings
On the Individual Bed Screen Setup window of the Setup window, set the
settings for each Individual Bed window display.
1. Touch the desired bed on the All Beds screen to display Individual Bed
window.
3. Touch [Other Setup] → [Individual Bed Screen Setup] of the Setup Menu to
display the Individual Screen Setup window.
You can also display the Individual Screen Setup window by the following
procedures.
Admit/Discharge window. Touch [Display Settings] → [Individual Bed
Screen Setup].
• Touch [Individual Bed Screen Setup] of the individual function keys if
[Individual Bed Screen Setup] is registered to an individual function key.
For setting individual function keys, refer to “Changing the All Beds
Screen Display Settings” in Section 6.
Setting the Individual Bed Window Setup

Set the settings for the Individual Bed window display for each bed by referring
to the “Setting Items” later in this section.
Example: Setting Wave Selection

Window change tab
Touch to change windows.
You can check the display on the

Individual Bed window.
Set the settings by touching each item.
Waveform
display order
Parameter of
the waveform
Sensitivity and
scale can be
changed by
touching the key.
Refer to the “Setting Parameter Priority” in Section 6 and “ECG Settings” in

Section 12. Also, refer to “Parameter Setup” in Section 6-1 of the Administrator’s
Guide.

Setting Items
Wave Selection
Item Setting Description

Wave Selection Display Auto, Auto + 1 ECG, Selects the waveforms to be displayed on the Individual Bed
Settings Auto + 2 ECG, Manual window for each bed. Up to 18 waveforms (including up to
16 stored full disclosure waveforms) can be displayed on the
Individual Bed window. All parameters selected for the Display
Settings might not be displayed.
• Auto: The waveforms are selected automatically depending

on the parameter priority. When 12 lead ECG is
monitored, 12 lead ECG and other waveforms are
displayed.
• Auto + 1 ECG:
The ECG waveform which is set to [Arrhythmia 8
Detection Lead 1] is displayed. Other waveforms are
selected automatically depending on the parameter
priority.
• Auto + 2 ECG:
The ECG waveforms which are set to [Arrhythmia
Detection Lead 1] and [Arrhythmia Detection Lead
2] are displayed. Other waveforms are selected
automatically depending on the parameter priority.
• Manual: The user selects the waveforms to be displayed.

Waveforms can be selected from the currently
measured parameters and the parameters which
are registered on [Parameter Setup] → [Parameter
Selection] of the System Setup screen.
Touch the desired parameter key to display the
setting window and select the parameter of the
waveform. If the selected parameter key is touched
again or [None] is touched, nothing is selected.
Display
order of the
waveforms
Sens/Scale Set for each waveform. Sets the sensitivity and scale of the displayed waveforms. The
sensitivity and scale setting is synchronized with the setting of
the All Beds Screen Display Setting and each parameter setting
window.
Touch the Sens/Scale key to display the setting
window and set the sensitivity and scale.
The sensitivity and scale can be changed by touching the

waveform on the Individual Bed window.
Touch the Customize scale key to select a custom scale for the
waveform. The value of the custom scale is set on the Trend
window. Refer to the “Setting the Customized Scale” in
Section 9.

Numerical Selection

Numerical Display Auto, Manual Selects the numeric data to be displayed on the Individual Bed window.
Selection Settings
The first parameter is displayed in larger size and the other parameters
are displayed in the remaining area in equal smaller size. However,
when you select the S/D/M display format of blood pressure
measurement values (refer to Section 12), S/D/M is displayed as large as
possible.
VPC and ST are also displayed when the first parameter is HR.
• Auto: The displayed parameter(s) are automatically selected

from the currently measured parameters according to the
parameter priority.
• Manual: You can choose the parameter(s) to be displayed on the

Individual Bed window from the currently measured
parameter(s) or from the parameter(s) selected on the
[Parameter Setup] → [Parameter Selection] of the System
Setup screen.
Touch the desired parameter key to display the setting window
and select the parameter. When the selected parameter is
touched again or [None] is touched, nothing is selected.
Display
order of the
numeric value
Empty Fill, Leave Empty When Display Settings is set to Manual, select whether to fill in the
Parameter parameter display area when the parameter is not monitored.
Areas • Fill: Unmonitored parameter display area is filled in with
other monitoring parameters. (Numeric values are
displayed according to the display order.)
• Leave Empty: Nothing is displayed in the unmonitored parameter
display area.

Other

Other Sweep Speed 50 mm/s, 25 mm/s Selects the sweep speed of the waveforms other than the respiration
waveform.
Respiration 25 mm/s, 6.25 mm/s Selects the sweep speed of respiration (RESP), CO2, FLOW, VOL,
Wave Sweep Paw and GAS waveform.
Speed
BP Scale Separate, Common, Change the display type of the IBP waveforms.
High/Low Pressure
The IBP scale settings on this window are synchronized with the
settings on the PRESS window. When several IBP waveforms are
displayed on the All Beds screen, this setting is affected.
Separate: IBP waveforms are displayed separately on different

scales.
8
Common: Both IBP waveforms are displayed on the same scale.

You can move the cursor up and down with the up and
down arrow keys on the optional keyboard.
High/Low Pressure: IBP waveforms are displayed separately on

high pressure and low pressure scales.

Recording on the Individual Bed Window
Manual Recording
Touch [ ] of the desired bed on the Individual Bed window. The waveform of
the selected period and numeric data are printed on the WS-960P Recorder Unit.
To stop recording, touch [ ] again during recording.
When the [ ] of the data area is touched, the waveform of the bed is recorded.
Settings for Manual Recording

Set the following items for each bed on [Recording] of the Setup window.
• Select recording parameters (first wave to third wave) on the [Record Wave
Selection]. When [NONE] is selected, no waveform is recorded.
• Set the waveform sweep speed (25 mm/s, 50 mm/s) on [Recording Sweep
Speed].


Guide.
Recording Example

Individual Bed Window Printing

All displayed waveforms and numeric data on the Individual Bed window are
printed on one A4 or letter size page by the laser printer. Each waveform is
10 seconds. On the Individual Bed window, touch [ ]. When printing of all
waveforms is finished, printing automatically stops.
Other Recordings 8
On the Individual Bed window, the following recordings are available with the
WS-960P Recorder Unit.
• Auto Recording
Periodic Recording: refer to “Periodic Recording” in Section 10.
Alarm Recording: refer to “Alarm Recording” in Section 5.
• Remote Recording: refer to “Call Recording” in Section 10.

Section 9 Review Windows
Overview of Review Windows............................................................................................................................... 9.4

Displaying the Review Window................................................................................................................... 9.5
Basic Operation on the Review Window .................................................................................................... 9.8
Registering Comments............................................................................................................................... 9.9
Checking Comments.................................................................................................................................. 9.9
Trend................................................................................................................................................................... 9.10
Changing the Trend Window..................................................................................................................... 9.11
Changing the Display Format of the Trendgraph...................................................................................... 9.11
Setting the Number of VPCs Display........................................................................................................ 9.13
Setting the Displayed Parameters and Events......................................................................................... 9.13 9
Setting the Displayed Parameters.................................................................................................. 9.13
Setting the Displayed Event........................................................................................................... 9.14
Setting the Scale of a Displayed Parameter............................................................................................. 9.15
Setting the Customized Scale........................................................................................................ 9.16
Displaying High Frequency Range Compressed Graph........................................................................... 9.16
Trendgraph Types and Scale.................................................................................................................... 9.17
Recording the Trendgraph........................................................................................................................ 9.20
Printing the Trendgraph............................................................................................................................ 9.20
Tabular Trend...................................................................................................................................................... 9.21
Adding the NIBP Values........................................................................................................................... 9.22
Setting the Number of VPCs Display........................................................................................................ 9.22
Setting the Displayed Parameters............................................................................................................ 9.23
Recording the Tabular Trend..................................................................................................................... 9.24
Printing the Tabular Trend......................................................................................................................... 9.24
Full Disclosure.................................................................................................................................................... 9.25
Setting the Stored Waveforms.................................................................................................................. 9.26
Setting the Displayed Waveforms............................................................................................................. 9.27
Single Wave, ECG 12 Lead, All Waves.......................................................................................... 9.28
Custom........................................................................................................................................... 9.28
Setting the Alarm Display in the Alarm Priority Color............................................................................... 9.30
Turning Pacing Mark On or Off................................................................................................................. 9.30
Printing the Full Disclosure Waveform...................................................................................................... 9.31
Creating a Recall File of Desired ECG..................................................................................................... 9.31
Outputting Waveforms in MFER Format................................................................................................... 9.33
Expanded Waveform.......................................................................................................................................... 9.34
Setting the Displayed Waveform............................................................................................................... 9.35
Single Wave, ECG 12 Lead, All Waves.......................................................................................... 9.35
Custom........................................................................................................................................... 9.36
Selecting the Expanded Waveform Sweep Speed................................................................................... 9.37
Setting the Alarm Display in the Alarm Priority Color............................................................................... 9.38
Turning Pacing Mark On or Off................................................................................................................. 9.38
Measuring a Waveform............................................................................................................................. 9.39

Caliper Measurement..................................................................................................................... 9.39
Divider Measurement..................................................................................................................... 9.41
Recording the Expanded Waveform......................................................................................................... 9.42
Recording Caliper Measurement Values with the Expanded Waveform........................................ 9.42
Printing the Expanded Waveform............................................................................................................. 9.43
Event List............................................................................................................................................................ 9.44
Recording the Event List.......................................................................................................................... 9.46
Printing the Event List.............................................................................................................................. 9.46
ST Recall............................................................................................................................................................ 9.47
Setting the Displayed Lead...................................................................................................................... 9.48
Setting the Sensitivity............................................................................................................................... 9.49
Recording the Waveform of ST Recall File............................................................................................... 9.49
Printing the ST Recall Window................................................................................................................. 9.50
Arrhythmia Recall............................................................................................................................................... 9.51
Arrhythmia Classification and Priority....................................................................................................... 9.52
QRS Waveform Classification.................................................................................................................. 9.53
Outputting a Screen Image of an Arrhythmia Recall File......................................................................... 9.53
Recording the Waveform of an Arrhythmia Recall File............................................................................. 9.53
Printing the Arrhythmia Recall Window.................................................................................................... 9.54
SpO2 Trend......................................................................................................................................................... 9.55
Displaying the Histogram Window............................................................................................................ 9.57
Changing the SpO2 Trend Window........................................................................................................... 9.58
Changing the Display Format of the SpO2 Trendgraph............................................................................. 9.58
Setting the SpO2 Trend Threshold............................................................................................................ 9.58
Threshold....................................................................................................................................... 9.59
Setting the Displayed Parameters and Events......................................................................................... 9.59
Setting the Displayed Parameters.................................................................................................. 9.59
Setting the Displayed Events......................................................................................................... 9.60
Setting the Customized Scale........................................................................................................ 9.61
SpO2 Trend Types and Scale.................................................................................................................... 9.62
Printing the SpO2 Trendgraph................................................................................................................... 9.62
ECG 12 Lead Analysis....................................................................................................................................... 9.63
Analysis Wave Window............................................................................................................................. 9.65
Averaged Wave Window........................................................................................................................... 9.65
Analysis Wave Comparison Window........................................................................................................ 9.66
Averaged Wave Comparison Window...................................................................................................... 9.66
Setting the Sensitivity............................................................................................................................... 9.67
Setting the Rhythm Waveform Lead......................................................................................................... 9.68
Measuring an Analysis Waveform and Average Waveform...................................................................... 9.68
Caliper Measurement..................................................................................................................... 9.68
Divider Measurement..................................................................................................................... 9.70
Outputting ECG 12 Lead Analysis Results in ECTP Format.................................................................... 9.71
Automatic Transfer.......................................................................................................................... 9.71
Manual Transfer.............................................................................................................................. 9.71
Printing the ECG 12 Lead Analysis Window............................................................................................ 9.71
Hemodynamics List............................................................................................................................................ 9.72
Abbreviations............................................................................................................................................ 9.73

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Printing the Hemodynamics List............................................................................................................... 9.74

Alarm Events...................................................................................................................................................... 9.75
Setting the Displayed Event..................................................................................................................... 9.76
Event List....................................................................................................................................... 9.77
Technical Icon Function............................................................................................................................ 9.78
About Action Messages............................................................................................................................ 9.79
Printing the Alarm Events Window........................................................................................................... 9.79
Discharged Patients List..................................................................................................................................... 9.80
Displaying the Discharged Patients List Window...................................................................................... 9.80

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
This section explains the review windows which can display past data of a
monitored bed.
Overview of Review Windows
The review window displays the vital sign data of one bed that is selected from
the monitored beds. There are eleven types of review windows. Two review
windows can be displayed together on the same window.
• Trend window
• Tabular Trend window
• Full Disclosure window
• Expanded Waveform window
• Event List window
• ST Recall window
• Arrhythmia Recall window
• SpO2 Trend window (Full size display only)
• ECG 12 Lead Analysis window (Full size display only)
• Hemodynamics List window
• Alarm Events window
For the Discharged Patients List window, refer to the “Discharged Patients List”
later in this section.
Review data of a discharged patient or a patient whose data was deleted can be
displayed within 120 hours after the patient is discharged or the data deletion.
Synchronized time of review data on all review windows

When you change to a different review window while displaying a review
window, the same time of review data is shown on the new window.
If you want to check an event in the Event List window and the waveform of
the same time, select the event and change the window to Expanded Waveform
window. The expanded waveform for the time of the selected event is displayed
on the window. The time of the two review windows displayed on the same
window is also synchronized. In the review windows, various data such as
vital sign data at the time of the selected patient can be viewed by changing the
review window.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
File/Time of the Review Data

You can save the following review data in the central monitor. The data remains
even after the central monitor is turned off.
Review Data Files/Time

Trendgraph data 120 hours
Tabular trend data 120 hours
Full disclosure and expanded waveform data 120 hours
Event list data 10,000 files
ST recall data 120 hours
Arrhythmia recall data 1,500 files
SpO2 trendgraph data 120 hours
ECG 12 lead analysis data 200 files
Hemodynamics list data 256 files
Alarm events data 120 hours
NOTE
If a new file is created when the maximum number of files has already 9
been reached, the oldest file is deleted. Data is automatically deleted
after the maximum 120 hours regardless of the number of files.
Displaying the Review Window

1. On the All Beds screen, touch the data area of the bed you want to display.
• When [Review] is touched, the Custom

Review window is displayed.
When displaying the review window
for the first time, the default Custom
Review window is displayed.
• Each bed has an own display pattern.
When changing the displayed bed while
displaying the review window, the
display pattern is the pattern of the bed.
• When the [ ] is touched, the Review
Menu is displayed.
Select the desired pattern.
2. Touch [Review] or [ ] and select the pattern to display the review window.
To close the Review Menu, touch [ ]

again. If there is no screen operation for
more than 10 seconds, the screen closes.
Display pattern of Custom Review on the

Review Menu can be customized. Refer to
the following section.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
When a review window is assigned to one of the individual function keys,

the review window can be displayed by touching the function key. For
setting individual function keys, refer to “Changing the All Beds Screen
Display Settings” in Section 6.
Review Menu
The following display patterns are set for the Review Menu.
Review Window
Display Pattern
Upper Area Lower Area
Custom Review Tabular Trend Trend
Tabular Trend Tabular Trend Trend
Trend Trend Expanded Waveform
Trend Trend Alarm Events
Full Disclosure Full Disclosure Expanded Waveform
Arrhythmia Recall Arrhythmia Recall Full Disclosure
Event List Event List Expanded Waveform
Alarm Events Alarm Events Expanded Waveform
Full Disclosure Full Disclosure (Full size display)
ECG 12 Lead Analysis ECG 12 Lead Analysis (Full size display)
ST Recall ST Recall (Full size display)
Hemodynamics List Hemodynamics List (Full size display)
The combination pattern and pattern name for Custom Review can be changed.
Other display patterns cannot be changed.
1. Touch [ ] on the Individual Bed window and select the Custom Review to
display the review window.
The display pattern name is displayed on the upper right area of the review
window.
Display pattern name
2. Display the review combinations to set.
3. Touch the display pattern name to display the Frame Name Setup window.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
4. Set the combination pattern and the name.

i) Enter the name.
ii) Check the entered name and combination pattern and touch [Apply]. The
name and the review combination pattern are set to the custom settings.
The changed name is applied to the Review Menu.
ii
9

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Basic Operation on the Review Window

The data area of all monitored beds is displayed to the left of the review window
so other beds can be monitored while the review window is displayed.
* Displayed when the monitored bed is a transmitter. [ ]
Bed name Transmitter battery status icon Appears on a bed when an alarm occurs. Touch to silence the
Refer to Section 6. alarm.
Display pattern name [ ]
Displayed when the display pattern is Custom Appears on a bed when an alarm occurs if the [Alarm Notice
Review. When the display pattern name is Icon] is set to [ON]. Touch to display the Event List window.
Receiving channel* The alarm notice icon remains until it is touched. Refer to
touched, a keyboard to change the name appears.
Section 5.
Note
Patient name Refer to Section 4.
Changes the window to full size.
Displayed when there are two review
windows. Touch [ ] to restore a full
size display to two window split display.
Displays each review window.
Changes the display pattern.
Displays each setting window.

Records the review window.
Prints the review window.
Registers a comment. Refer to later in this section. Displays the review data.

When you touch inside the frame for a bed, the
review window for the touched bed is displayed.
The background of the selected bed turns blue.
[ ]
Appears on a bed when an alarm occurs. Touch to
silence the alarm.
[ ]
Appears on a bed when an alarm occurs if the
[Alarm Notice Icon] is set to [ON]. Touch to display
the Event List window. The alarm notice icon
remains until it is touched. Refer to Section 5.
NOTE: The [ ] icon is not displayed when
monitoring 24 or 32 beds.
When a CRISIS or WARNING level alarm
occurs, the data display frame of the alarming
bed blinks or is highlighted. Refer to Section 5.
Messages about the system are
Menu displayed window.
displayed. Icons
Displays each screen or window.
Displays each screen. Returns to the previous screen or window.
For the basic operation, refer to “Basic Operation on the Individual Bed

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Registering Comments
You can register the comments on the review window which are common for all
the review windows. The registered comments are displayed on the event list.
Example: Tabular Trend window 1. Move the cursor to the data and time to register the comment on each review
window.
2. Touch [ ] to display the window to register a comment.

1
3. Register comments.
i) Select the date and time to register a comment.
2 ii) Enter the date and time or comment and touch [ENTER].
iii) Check the entry and touch [ENTRY].

9
When the comment is registered, a comment icon [ ] is displayed.
Date and time of registered comment
Displays the date and time of registered comments. Comment entry area
It can be changed to the desired date and time. Enter comments.
iii
Delete
ii Deletes a registered comment.
Checking Comments
Example: Tabular Trend window Touch the comment icon [ ] on each review window and check the registered
comment.
Date and time of comment registry Comment
If several comments are displayed, Displays the registered comment.
select the date and time.
[ ]
Closes the window.
Edit
Displays the comment registry window and
allows editing or deleting the registered
comments.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Trend
The Trend window displays measured parameter values and events of the most
recent 120 hours as trendgraphs.
[ ]: Changes between split display and full size display.
[ ]: Changes to a different review window.
Scale [ ]: Changes to a different Trend window (Trend 1 to 3 and Common
Changes the scale. Refer to “Setting Scale).
the Scale of a Displayed Parameter”. [ ]: Change settings.
Comment icon Cursor

Displayed when a comment Synchronizes with other review windows. On
Parameter name Measurement
is entered. Touch to check the the upper part of the cursor, the date and time
Changes the displayed data at the cursor
comment. Refer to “Checking at the cursor is displayed. You can move the
parameters. Refer to “Setting position.
Comments”. cursor by touching directly on the cursor.
the Displayed Parameters
and Events”. Time bar (Displayed time width)
Trendgraph
Window name
Parameter
trendgraphs
Event trendgraphs
Changes the
displayed event.
Event Number of events

Displays in color corresponds to the alarm priority
from the alarm occurrence to alarm end.
Time axis (120 hours) Range before admission Range of displayed time width
The range before admission and the range of
the displayed time width and the cursor are
displayed on the time axis. You can move the
Registers a comment at the date and cursor by dragging it or by directly touching the
time of the cursor position. Refer to time axis. Cursor
“Registering Comments”.
Displayed time width Scroll keys Records trendgraphs.

Touch to change the display time width of the • : Scrolls the set width (per page, 30
trendgraph window. (1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours, min or 60 min) right and left. Refer to
8 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours, 48 hours, 96 hours, “Function Keys Setting” in Section 6-1 Prints trendgraphs.
120 hours) of the Administrator’s Guide.
• : Displays the latest data.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Changing the Trend Window

Touch [ ] of each Trend window (Trend 1 to 3, Common Scale) to change the
Trend window. The number of displayed parameters and events depends on the
Trend window.
Number of
Trend Window Number of Events
Parameters
Trend 1 and Trend 2 3 parameter 6 events
Trend 3 7 parameters 3 events
Common Scale 4 parameters 3 events
Example: Trend 3
7 parameters
9
3 events
Example: Common Scale

Parameter trendgraph displays in common scale.
4 parameters
3 events
When the Trend window is Common Scale, the layout is fixed to four parameters
and three events. For other layouts, the event can be changed to parameter. Refer
to “Setting the Displayed Parameters and Events”.
Changing the Display Format of the Trendgraph

Touch [ ] → [Display Setting] of each Trend window (Trend 1 to 3, Common
Scale) to display the setting window and change the display format of the
trendgraph (MAX-MIN, AVE).
The display format of the trendgraph and cursor display label depends on the
parameter.
When the Trend window is Common Scale, the graph layout is fixed to AVE.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Setting
Parameter
Max-Min Ave
Parameters other Max Mean
than following:
• IBP parameters
• PAW, PAW Graph display
(EXT)
• NIBP (when
the display time Min
width is 8, 12,
24, 48, 96, or 120 Measurement
hours) data at the cursor Max, Min, Inst*1 Average, Inst*1
• VPC position
• APNEA (T)
Max Max
IBP parameters
(ART, ART2, RAD,
DORS, AO, FEM, Graph display
UA, UV, PAP,
CVP, RAP, RVP, Mean Mean
LAP, LVP, ICP, Min Min
ICP2 to ICP4, P1 Measurement
to P8, CNIBP) SYS (MAX), DIA SYS (MAX), DIA
data at the cursor
(MIN), MEAN (MIN), MEAN*2
position
Ppeak (Max) Ppeak (Mean)
Graph display
PAW, PAW(EXT)
PEEP (Min) PEEP (Mean)
Measurement
data at the cursor Ppeak/PEEP Ppeak/PEEP*2
position
Systolic
Graph display Mean

NIBP (when the
display time width Diastolic
is 1, 2 or 4 hours)
Measurement
data at the cursor SYS, DIA, MAP
position
Number of VPCs
Graph display
VPC, APNEA
(T)*3
Measurement
data at the cursor VPC or APNEA (T) value
position
*1 Inst is instantaneous measurement data at the cursor position. (The data

displayed on the Tabular Trend window.)
* When the trendgraph display format is “MEAN”, the measurement data of
2
IBP parameters, PAW and PAW (EXT) at the cursor position are displayed as
each average value.
* NIBP trendgraph display format is different depending on the displayed time
3
width on the Trend window.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Setting the Number of VPCs Display

You can set the number of VPCs displayed on each Trend window (Trend 1 to 3,
Common Scale).
Touch [ ] → [VPC Display] on each Trend window (Trend 1 to 3, Common

Scale) to display the setting window. Touch the key to change the setting.
1 min: The number of VPCs in the most recent 1 minute
Integrate: The number of integrated VPCs in the time range
Setting the Displayed Parameters and Events

Setting the Displayed Parameters
Parameter name You can set the displayed parameters and events on each Trend window (Trend 1
to 3, Common Scale).
The parameters can be set from the monitoring parameters and parameters set on
the [Parameter Setup] → [Parameter Selection] of the System Setup screen. For
the parameter settings, refer to Section 6-1 of the Administrator’s Guide.
1. Display the Trend window to set the display layout.

For changing the Trend window, refer to “Changing the Trend Window”.
2. Touch the parameter name to display the setting window.
3. Set the parameter to be displayed on the window.

i) Touch the display position to set the parameter.
ii) Touch the parameter to be displayed.
To deselect the parameter, touch [NONE] or touch the selected

parameter again.
To display a parameter which is not displayed on the window, touch

[ ] or [ ] to change the window.
The parameter on the bottom area can be changed to event.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
iii) Touch [ ] to close the setting window after the setting is complete.
AUTO
The monitoring parameters are set according to the parameter
priority. The event trends are not displayed and all the parameter
trendgraphs are displayed.
NOTE: When the display layout is [Common Scale], event

trends of ASYSTOLE, V. FIB and V TACHY are displayed.
iii
ii
i
Setting the Displayed Event

2. Touch the event name to display the setting window.
3. Set the event to be displayed on the window.

i) Touch [Event].
ii) Select the category of event.
iii) Touch the event to be displayed. Several events can be selected

depending on the display layout.
Event name To deselect the event, touch [NONE] or touch the selected event again.
To display an event which is not displayed on the window, touch [ ] or

[ ] to change the window.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
When deselecting all the selected events, iv) Touch [ ] to close the setting window after the setting is complete.
the [Parameter Setup] tab is available.
AUTO
The parameters which have the trend data are set
NOTE: When the display layout is Number of selected events according to the parameter priority. The event trends
[Common Scale], the [Parameter are not displayed and all the parameter trendgraphs are
Setup] tab is not available. displayed.
NOTE: When the display layout is [Common

Scale], event trends of ASYSTOLE, V. FIB and V
Available number of events TACHY are displayed.
iv
ii
i iii 9
Clear All Events

Deselects all the settings in each event
category of Arrhythmia, Limit and Technical.
Setting the Scale of a Displayed Parameter

You can set the scale of the displayed parameter on the Trend window.
2. Touch the scale of the parameter to display the setting window.

Scale
3. Set the scale of the displayed parameter.

i) Touch the parameter scale to be displayed on the Trend window to
iii display the setting window.

i
When the display layout is [Common Scale], touch the parameter to
change the scale.
ii
ii) Select the scale.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Setting the Customized Scale

The parameter scale on the Trend window can be customized.
1. Touch [Customize] to display the Customize Scale window.
2. Touch the scale to set the scale.
3. Enter the scale using the numeric key pad and touch [ENTER].
2
4. After entering the upper limit and lower limit scale, touch [OK] to close the
Customize Scale window.
Displaying High Frequency Range Compressed Graph

The aEEG trendgraph can be displayed as a graph with the high frequency band
logarithmically compressed. The scale of the graph is 0.0 to 10.0 μV for the low
frequencies and 10.0 to 100.0 μV for the high frequencies.
1. Display the Trend window (Trend 1, 2, 3 or Common Scale).

When the display layout is [Common Scale], touch the parameter to change
the scale.
2. Touch the aEEG scale on the Trend window to display the Sens/Scale
2
window.
3
3. Touch [Log Scale] on the Sens/Scale window.
High frequencies
Low frequencies

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Trendgraph Types and Scale

The following trendgraph types are available on this central monitor. The
parameter scale for each trendgraph is also listed.
Scale
Parameter Description Unit
Setting Range Default
HR Heart rate bpm 0-100, 0-200, 0-300, Customize (Default: 0-200) 0-200
VPC VPC rate count/min 0-20, 0-50, 0-100, Customize (Default: 0-20) 0-20
ST (I, II, III, aVR, −0.20-0.20, −0.50-0.50, −1.00-1.00, −2.00-2.00,
mV −0.20-0.20
aVL, aVF, V1 Customize (Default: −0.20-0.20)
ST level
to V6, V, MCL, −2.0-2.0, −5.0-5.0, −10.0-10.0, −20.0-20.0,
mm −2.0-2.0
ECG1, ECG2) Customize (Default: −2.0-2.0)
QT QT interval msec 200-800, 200-600, Customize (Default: 200-600) 200-600
Corrected QT
QTc msec 200-800, 200-600, Customize (Default: 200-600) 200-600
interval
Average heart
QT-HR rate used for QT /min 0-100, 0-200, 0-300, Customize (Default: 0-200) 0-200
correction
9
QRSd QRS duration msec 0-300, 0-120, Customize (Default: 0-120) 0-120
0-20, 0-50, 0-75, 0-100, 0-160, 0-200, 0-300, 50-200,
mmHg 0-200
ART, ART2, RAD, Customize (Default: 0-200)
DORS, AO, FEM, 0.0-3.0, 0.0-7.0, 0.0-10.0, 0.0-14.0, 0.0-22.0, 0.0-
LVP, P1 to P8 kPa 28.0, 0.0-40.0, 7.0-28.0, Customize (Default: 0.0- 0.0-28.0
28.0)
0-20, 0-50, 0-75, 0-100, 0-160, 0-200, 0-300, 50-200,
mmHg 0-100
Invasive blood Customize (Default: 0-100)
UA pressure 0.0-3.0, 0.0-7.0, 0.0-10.0, 0.0-14.0, 0.0-22.0, 0.0-
kPa 28.0, 0.0-40.0, 7.0-28.0, Customize (Default: 0.0-14.0
0.0-14.0)
0-20, 0-50, 0-75, 0-100, 0-160, 0-200, 0-300, 50-200,
UV, PAP, RAP, mmHg 0-50
Customize (Default: 0-50)
RVP, CVP, LAP,
0.0-3.0, 0.0-7.0, 0.0-10.0, 0.0-14.0, 0.0-22.0, 0.0-
ICP, ICP2 to ICP4 kPa 0.0-7.0
28.0, 0.0-40.0, 7.0-28.0, Customize (Default: 0.0-7.0)
mmHg 0-100, 0-200, 0-300, Customize (Default: 0-200) 0-200
NIBP 0.0-16.0, 0.0-32.0, 0.0-40.0, Customize (Default:
kPa 0.0-32.0
0.0-32.0)
Non-invasive blood 0-20, 0-50, 0-75, 0-100, 0-160, 0-200, 0-300, 50-200,
mmHg 0-200
pressure Customize (Default: 0-200)
CNIBP 0.0-3.0, 0.0-7.0, 0.0-10.0, 0.0-14.0, 0.0-22.0, 0.0-
kPa 28.0, 0.0-40.0, 7.0-28.0, Customize (Default: 0.0-28.0
0.0-28.0)
Spontaneous
RRspon (EXT)
respiration rate
RR, RR (IMP, count/min 0-50, 0-150, Customize (Default: 0-50) 0-50
THM, CO2, FLOW, Respiration rate
EXT, GAS)
Apnea time (Total
APNEA (T) time in one data s 0-60, Customize (Default: 0-60) 0-60
segment, in seconds)
SpO2, SpO2-2 0-100, 50-100, 80-100, Customize (Default: 80-100) 80-100
Saturated oxygen
% −5-5, −10-10, −20-20, −50-50, Customize (Default:
Delta SpO2 from pulse oximeter −5-5
−5-5)
PR Pulse rate count/min 0-100, 0-200, 0-300, Customize (Default: 0-200) 0-200

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Scale
Tskin, Tskin2 to 3, 0.0-40.0, 15.0-34.0, 20.0-40.0,
Trect, °C 30.0-34.0, 34.0-40.0, 0.0-45.0, 34.0-40.0
Tcore, Tnaso, Teso, Customize (Default: 34.0-40.0)
Ttymp, Tblad,
20.0-120.0, 80.0-120.0, 92.0-104.0,
Taxil, T1 to 8, Tb,
°F 52.0-92.0, 84.0-92.0, 92.0-104.0
Tb (CCO), TEMP
Customize (Default: 92.0-104.0)
(EXT), Tb (EXT) Temperature
−5.0-5.0, −10.0-10.0,
°C −20.0-20.0, −45.0-45.0, −5.0-5.0
Delta T, Delta T2 Customize (Default: −5.0-5.0)
to 4 −40.0-40.0, −50.0-50.0,
°F −70.0-70.0, −120.0-120.0, −40.0-40.0
Customize (Default: −40.0-40.0)
Continuous cardiac 0.00-10.00, 4.00-6.00, 0.00-20.00,
CCO L/min 0.00-10.00
output Customize (Default: 0.00-10.00)
Continuous cardiac 0.00-10.00, 4.00-6.00, 0.00-20.00,
CCI L/min/m2 0.00-10.00
output index Customize (Default: 0.00-10.00)
Continuous cardiac 4.00-6.00, 0.00-10.00, 0.00-20.00, Customize
esCCO L/min 0.00-10.00
output (Default: 0.00-10.00)
Continuous cardiac 4.00-6.00, 0.00-10.00, 0.00-20.00, Customize
esCCI L/min/m2 0.00-10.00
output index (Default: 0.00-10.00)
Mixed venous 60-80, 60-100, 30-100,
SvO2 (CCO) 60-80
oxygen saturation Customize (Default: 60-80)
%
Central venous 60-80, 60-100,
ScvO2 (EXT) 60-80
Pulse contour 4.00-6.00, 0.00-10.00, 0.00-20.00,
PCCO (EXT) L/min 0.00-10.00
cardiac output Customize (Default: 0.00-10.00)
Pulse contour 4.00-6.00, 0.00-10.00, 0.00-20.00,
PCCI (EXT) L/min/m2 0.00-10.00
cardiac output index Customize (Default: 0.00-10.00)
0-40, 0-60, 0-80, 0-120, 0-150,
mmHg 0-80
ETCO2, ETCO2 Customize (Default: 0-80)
End tidal CO2 partial
(EXT), 0.0-5.5, 0.0-8.0, 0.0-10.5, 0.0-16.0,
pressure
ETCO2 (GAS) kPa 0.0-20.0, 0.0-10.5
0-40, 0-60, 0-80, 0-120, 0-150,
mmHg 0-80
CO2 (I), CO2 (I) Inspired CO2 partial
0.0-5.5, 0.0-8.0, 0.0-10.5, 0.0-16.0,
(GAS) pressure
kPa 0.0-20.0, 0.0-10.5
O2 (I), O2 (I)(EXT),
Inspired oxygen
O2 (I)(GAS) 0-40, 0-60, 30-60, 0-100,
% 0-60
O2 (E), O2 (E) Customize (Default: 0-60)
Expired oxygen
(GAS)
0-100, 0-200, 0-800,
Transcutaneous mmHg 0-200
tcPO2 (EXT) oxygen partial
0.0-16.0, 0.0-32.0, 0.0-128.0,
pressure kPa 0.0-32.0
0-100, 0-200, 0-800,
Transcutaneous mmHg 0-200
tcPCO2 (EXT) carbon dioxide
0.0-16.0, 0.0-32.0, 0.0-128.0,
partial pressure kPa 0.0-32.0
MV, MV (EXT) Minute volume
0.0-6.0, 0.0-12.0, 0.0-30.0,
Spontaneous minute L/min 0.0-12.0
MVspon (EXT) Customize (Default: 0.0-12.0)
volume
0-500, 0-1000, 0-2000,
TV mL 0-1000
Tidal volume
0.0-0.5, 0.0-1.0, 0.0-2.0, 0.0-6.0,
TV (EXT) L 0.0-1.0

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Scale
Paw, Paw (EXT) Airway pressure
Mean airway
Pmean (EXT)
pressure cmH2O, 0-10, 0-20, 0-50, 0-100, 0-150,
0-50
Minimum airway hPa Customize (Default: 0-50 )
Pmin (EXT)
pressure
Pplat (EXT) Plateau pressure
mL/
0-50, 0-100, 0-200,
C (EXT) Compliance cmH2O, 0-100
mL/hPa
cmH2O/
0-6, 0-10, 0-20,
R (EXT) Airway resistance L/S, 0-10
hPa/L/S
N2O (E) (GAS), 0-80, 0-100, 50-100,
Nitrous oxide 0-80
N2O (I) (GAS) Customize (Default: 0-80)
HAL (E)(GAS),
HAL (I)(GAS),
ISO (E)(GAS), ISO
9
(I)(GAS), ENF (E)
%
(GAS), ENF (I) 0.0-6.0, 0.0-10.0, 0.0-20.0,
Anesthetic gas 0.0-6.0
(GAS), DES (E) Customize (Default: 0.0-6.0)
(GAS), DES (I)
(GAS), SEV (E)
(GAS), SEV (I)
(GAS)
0-100, 50-100,
BIS Bispectral index − 0-100
SEF (EEG1) to Spectral edge 0.0-15.0, 0.0-30.0, 0.0-60.0,
Hz 0.0-60.0
SEF (EEG8) frequency Customize (Default: 0.0-60.0)
0.00-0.10, 0.00-0.50, 0.00-1.00,
TP (EEG1) to TP
Total power nW 0.00-5.00, 0.00-10.00, 0.00-10.00
(EEG8)
aEEG (1 s) (EEG1)
to aEEG (1 s)
0.0-10.0, 0.0-100.0, 0.0-1000.0,
(EEG8)
— μV 0.0-2000.0, Customize (Default: 0.0-100.0), Log 0-100
aEEG (3 s) (EEG1)
Scale (0.0-100.0)
to
aEEG (3 s) (EEG8)
Regional saturation
rSO2-1 to 4 − 0-100, 30-100, Customize 0-100
of oxygen
Pulse contour 4.00-6.00, 0.00-10.00, 0.00-20.00,
PCCO L/min 0.00-10.00
cardiac output Customize (Default: 0.00-10.00)
Pulse contour 4.00-6.00, 0.00-10.00, 0.00-20.00,
PCCI L/min/m2 0.00-10.00
cardiac output index Customize (Default: 0.00-10.00)
Systolic atrial blood 0-20, 0-50, 0-75, 0-100, 0-160, 0-200, 0-300, 50-200,
AP-Sys mmHg 0-200
Diastolic atrial blood 0-20, 0-50, 0-75, 0-100, 0-160, 0-200, 0-300, 50-200,
AP-Dias mmHg 0-200
Mean atrial blood 0-20, 0-50, 0-75, 0-100, 0-160, 0-200, 0-300, 50-200,
AP-Mean mmHg 0-200
Central venous 60-80, 60-100,
ScvO2 % 60-80
Atrial pressure,
AP-PR count/min 0-100, 0-200, 0-300, Customize (Default: 0-200) 0-200
Pulse rate
0.0-40.0, 15.0-34.0, 20.0-40.0,
Tb (EXT) Temperature °C 30.0-34.0, 34.0-40.0, 0.0-45.0, 34.0-40.0

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Recording the Trendgraph

Recording with [ ] on the Bottom of the Pane
You can record the displayed trendgraphs with the WS-960P Recorder Unit by
touching [ ] on the bottom of the pane. The trendgraphs displayed on the
window can be recorded for each parameter.
NOTE
The event trend on the Trend window cannot be recorded.
To stop recording, touch [ ].
Recording with [ ] on the Bottom of the Window

You can record the displayed trendgraphs with the WS-960P Recorder Unit by
touching [ ] on the bottom of the window. When two review windows are
displayed on one window, both review windows can be recorded.
NOTE
The event trend on the Trend window cannot be recorded.
Printing the Trendgraph

Printing with [ ] on the Bottom of the Pane
You can print the displayed trendgraphs on the Trend window with the network
printer. Display the Trend window and touch [ ] on the bottom of the pane.
Printing with [ ] on the Bottom of the Window

You can print the displayed trendgraphs on the Trend window with the network
printer. Display the Trend window and touch [ ] on the bottom of the window.
When two review windows are displayed on one window, both review windows
can be printed.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Tabular Trend
The Tabular Trend window displays measured parameter values of the most
recent 120 hours as a tabular trend. There are five tabular trend windows (Vital
Sign 1 to 4 and NIBP). Up to 255 parameters can be displayed for each window.
The parameter color can be changed on [Parameter Setup] → [Parameter Color]

of the System Setup screen. Refer to “Parameter Setup” in Section 6-1 of the
Administrator’s Guide. The blood pressure and temperature are displayed by
their labels.
In the NIBP tabular trend window, the numeric values at the NIBP measurement
are listed.
9
NIBP measurement values
NIBP measurement values are always
displayed on the top of the tabular trend.
Comment icon [ ]: Changes to a different review window.
Displayed when a comment is entered. [ ]: Changes to a different tabular trend (Vital Sign 1 to 4 and NIBP).
Parameter name Touch to check the comment. Refer to [ ]: Change settings.
Changes the displayed “Checking Comments”.
parameters. Refer to “Setting Cursor
the Displayed Parameters”. Synchronizes with other review windows. Select the data Measurement date
Unit by touching directly on the tabular trend. and time
Window name
Parameters
(8 files/display)
Touch [ ] or [ ] to scroll the tabular trend.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Time axis (120 hours) Range before admission Cursor

Range before admission and the cursor are
Registers a comment to the cursor by dragging it or by directly touching
selected tabular trend. Refer the time axis.
to “Registering Comments”.
Display interval Scroll keys Prints a tabular trend.

Touch to change the display interval of the tabular trend. • : Scrolls one window right and
(1 , 2, 5, 10, 15, 30 and 60 minutes). left.
• : Displays the latest data. Records a tabular trend.
NOTE
• Change in display time width only affects the
display.
• The date is stored every one minute.
• This is not displayed on the NIBP tabular trend.
Adding the NIBP Values

You can set whether to add the NIBP measurement values to the tabular trend.
Touch [ ] → [+NIBP] of each Tabular Trend window (Vital Sign 1 to 4) to

display the setting window. Touch the key to change the setting.
ON: Adds the NIBP measurement values to the tabular trend.
OFF: NIBP measurement values are not added to the tabular trend.
Setting the Number of VPCs Display

You can set the number of VPCs displayed on each Tabular Trend window (Vital
Sign 1 to 4).
Touch [ ] → [VPC Display] on each Tabular Trend window (Vital Sign 1 to

4) to display the setting window. Touch the key to change the setting.
1 min: The number of VPCs in the most recent 1 minute
Integrate: The number of integrated VPCs in the time range

9. REVIEW WINDOWS

You can set the displayed parameters for each Tabular Trend window (Vital Sign
1 to 4 and NIBP).
The parameters can be selected from the monitoring parameters and parameters
set on the [Parameter Setup] → [Parameter Selection]. For the parameter
settings, refer to Section 6-1 of the Administrator’s Guide.
1. Display the Tabular Trend window to set the displayed parameters.
Parameter name 2. Touch the parameter name to change. The setting window appears.
3. Select the new parameter.

i) Touch the parameter to display.
To deselect the parameter, touch the selected parameter again. 9

You can select monitoring labels and leads for PRESS, TEMP and ST.
For NIBP tabular trend, NIBP SYS, NIBP DIA and NIBP MAP are fixed
to display.
ii) Touch [ ] to close the setting window after the setting is complete.
AUTO
The monitoring parameters are set as the displaying
parameters according to the priority.
ii
NOTE
When a transmitter measures SpO2 at a finger that is used for NIBP
measurement, select “PR (SpO2)” to display the PR measured at the
transmitter on the NIBP tabular trend.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Recording the Tabular Trend

You can record the displayed tabular trends with the WS-960P Recorder Unit.
Display the Tabular Trend window and touch [ ] ] on the bottom of the pane.
The tabular trend displayed on the window can be recorded.

You can record the displayed tabular trends with the WS-960P Recorder Unit.
Display the Tabular Trend window and touch [ ] on the bottom of the
window. The tabular trend displayed on the window can be recorded.
can be recorded.
Printing the Tabular Trend

You can print the displayed tabular trends with the network printer. Display the
Tabular Trend window and touch [ ] on the bottom of the pane.

You can print the displayed tabular trends with the network printer. Display the
Tabular Trend window and touch [ ] on the bottom of the window.
can be printed.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Full Disclosure
The central monitor saves 120 hour full disclosure waveforms for up to 16
parameters for each bed. You can select the displayed full disclosure waveforms
from the stored parameters. You can register four Full Disclosure windows
(Single Wave, ECG 12 Lead, All Waves and Custom) and up to 16 parameters
can be displayed for each window.
When the full disclosure waveform is displayed on full screen, you can create
a recall file of any 8-second ECG and display the file on the arrhythmia recall
window. Refer to “Creating a Recall File of Desired ECG” later in this section.
CAUTION
9
When the full disclosure waveform is expanded in actual size, steep
slopes such as QRS may be distorted because it has been
compressed then expanded. When reading the expanded ECG
waveforms, be aware of this distortion.

[ ]: Changes to a different Full Disclosure window (Single Wave, ECG
12 Lead, All Waves, Custom).
[ ]: Change settings.
Automatic scroll
Parameter name Scrolls one page every three seconds when the
Scale
Changes the displayed [ ] or [ ] is touched. If the [ ] touched to display
Changes the scale. Refer to “Setting
parameters. Refer to “Setting the latest data, the data is updated when acquiring data.
the Scale of a Displayed Parameter”.
the Displayed Waveforms”. Touch [ ] to stop scrolling. Scrolling can be stopped by
Date and time touching the window while scrolling.
Time at the top of the Display time length
Date and time cursor of the window
Window name
Comment icon
Displayed when
the comment is
entered. Touch to
check the comment.
Refer to “Checking
Comments”.
Full disclosure waveform

Cursor
Parameter waveforms which are set to the displayed waveforms are displayed.
Synchronizes with other review windows. You can
If the monitored bed is a multiple patient receiver and there is signal loss or low
move the cursor by touching directly on the screen or
battery, a triangle waveform is displayed.
touching the cursor and drag it.
Waveforms are not displayed in the following case.
• When the patient is temporarily discharged.
• A patient is not yet admitted.
• Communication loss
• Displayed parameter is not monitored.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS

displayed on the time axis. You can move
Registers a comment to the the cursor by dragging it or by directly
selected waveform. Refer to touching the time axis.
Display interval Scroll keys Prints full disclosure

Touch to change the display interval (display time of one line). • : Scrolls the set width (per waveforms.
page, 30 min or 60 min) right
Display time of one line and left. Refer to “Function
90 sec ↔ 60 sec ↔ 30 sec ↔ 20 sec ↔ 10 sec Keys Setting” in Section 6-1
of the Administrator’s Guide.
According to the [Waveform Alarm Color] setting, the arrhythmia alarm

occurrence can be indicated on the ECG waveform with an alarm priority color.
If the Full Disclosure window is displayed by touching the [Full Disclosure]

function key, automatic scroll is always on* (scrolls 1 page every 3 seconds) and
the latest data is always displayed. Touch [ ] to stop scrolling.
* Automatic scrolling can be turned off. Refer to “Function Keys Setting” in

Setting the Stored Waveforms

You can select which waveforms to be stored in the central monitor. The saved
waveforms can be displayed on both Full Disclosure window and Expanded
Waveform window.
NOTE
This setting is only available at the central monitor where the bed’s data is
stored.
1. Touch [ ] → [Stored Waves Setting] to display the setting window.
2. Set the parameter to be saved.

i) Select Manual or Auto.
To deselect the parameter, touch the selected parameter again.

When TRACE1 or TRACE2 is selected, the central monitor saves the

waveform which is synchronized with the ECG analysis leads setting of
the bedside monitor.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
ii) Touch [ ] to close the setting window after the setting is complete.
Auto Window
[Auto]
The monitoring parameters are saved automatically according to the
parameter priority. When the monitoring parameter is changed, the stored
waveform setting are also added.
ii
[Reset] 9
Returns to the settings when the Store
Wave Setting window is displayed.
Manual Window
[Auto]
[Manual] Monitoring parameters are
Touch the parameter to store selected automatically according
manually. to the parameter priority.
ii
[Reset]
Returns to the settings when the Store
Wave Setting window is displayed.
Setting the Displayed Waveforms

Select the waveforms to be displayed on each Full Disclosure window (Single
Wave, ECG 12 Lead, All Waves, Custom). Select from the parameter waveforms
which have full disclosure data.
On the Full Disclosure windows (except Custom), when the Full Disclosure
window is changed to windows other than Review windows, the displayed
waveform setting returns to the default settings. To always display the
waveforms in the same combination, set the displayed waveform on the Custom
window.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Single Wave, ECG 12 Lead, All Waves

1. Display the Full Disclosure window (Single Wave, ECG 12 Lead, All Waves,
Custom).
2. Touch [ ] → [Displayed Wave Setting] on the Full Disclosure window to

display the setting window.
3. Set the displayed waveform.

ii) Touch the parameter to display.

parameter again.
Parameter name
You can display the setting window by touching the parameter name.
iii
i
ii
Custom
You can customize the displayed waveforms and the key name. The settings set
on the Custom window are saved when the window is changed.
1. Display the Full Disclosure window (Custom).
2. Touch [ ] → [Displayed Wave Setting] on the Full Disclosure window

(Custom) to display the setting window.
Parameter name

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
3. Change the key name.


9
iii) After the setting is complete, touch [Apply]. The name and displayed
waveform are set to the custom settings.
i
ii
iii
To deselect the parameter, touch [NONE] or touch the selected parameter

again.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Setting the Alarm Display in the Alarm Priority Color

You can set whether to indicate the arrhythmia alarm occurrence on the ECG
waveform in the color of the alarm priority.
Touch [ ] → [Waveform Alarm Color] on the Full Disclosure window (Single

Wave, ECG 12 Lead, All Waves, Custom) to display the setting window and
touch the key to change.
NOTE
When the arrhythmia analysis is set to OFF, the display color cannot be
changed.
ON: Indicates the arrhythmia alarm occurrence on ECG waveform in the alarm
priority color.
OFF: ECG waveform display color does not change.
Turning Pacing Mark On or Off

When the pacing detection and pacing mark display is set to ON on the [ECG]
→ [Other] of the Parameter Setup, you can set whether to display the pacing
mark on the ECG waveform.
Touch [ ] → [Display Pacing Mark] on the Full Disclosure window (Single

ON: Display the pacing mark on the ECG waveform.

OFF: Do not display the pacing mark on the ECG waveform.
You can set whether to display the pacing mark [Above Wave] or [Overlap
Wave] on the [Monitor Setting] → [Display Settings] → [ECG Display] →
[Pacing Mark Position] of the System Setup screen. Refer to Section 6-1 of the

You can set the scale of the displayed parameter on the Full Disclosure window.
Scale The set scale is common for all three Full Disclosure windows (Single Wave,
ECG 12 Lead, All Waves, Custom).
i 1. Display the Full Disclosure window (Single Wave, ECG 12 Lead, All Waves,
Custom).
iii 2. Set the scale of the displayed parameter.

i) Touch the parameter scale to be displayed on the Full Disclosure
window to display the setting window.
ii

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Customize Scale
When [Customize Scale] is touched, waveforms can be displayed on the
desired scale. The value of the customize scale is set on the Trend window.
The [Customize Scale] appears when the parameter waveform is a scale type
(except for FLOW, FLOW(EXT), VOL, EEG1 to EEG8). Refer to “Setting the
Customized Scale” in Trend section.
Printing the Full Disclosure Waveform

You can print the displayed full disclosure waveforms with the network printer.
Display the Full Disclosure window and touch [ ] on the bottom of the pane.

You can print the displayed full disclosure waveforms with the network printer.
Display the Full Disclosure window and touch [ ] on the bottom of the
window.
can be printed.
Creating a Recall File of Desired ECG

When a full disclosure waveform is displayed full screen, you can create an
arrhythmia recall file of a desired segment of 8-second ECG. The type of
this arrhythmia recall file is MANUAL and you can display this file on the
Arrhythmia Recall File window. Refer to “Arrhythmia Recall” later in this
section.
1. When the full disclosure window is split display, touch the or to

change the window to full size display.
2. Create a recall file.

i) Touch the desired waveform to display the Expand Waveform window.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
ii) Touch [ ], [ ] and display the ECG to create a recall file.

iii) Touch [Nothing Selected] to display the waveform select window.
iv) Touch the lead of the ECG which creates an arrhythmia recall file.
[ ], [ ]
Scrolls the displayed waveform
1 second right or left.
ii
iii
iv
v) Touch [Create] to create a recall file. The ECG of the selected lead
displayed on the expanded waveform window is registered as an
arrhythmia recall file.
Touch [Cancel] to cancel creating a recall file and close the window.
[Lead]
Selected lead is displayed.
You can change the lead
by touching the key.
v

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Outputting Waveforms in MFER Format

You can output full disclosure waveforms in MFER format.
This function is enabled when the QL-010P physiological examination system

compatibility license is installed.
It is necessary to set “MFER File Output Path” at [External Output] → [MFER

File Output] of the System Setup screen. Refer to the Administrator’s Guide.
NOTE
• When the MFER Output function is used once, the function cannot be
used again until output of the file is finished.
• MFER Output cannot be performed on this central monitor if the patient
data is not saved on this central monitor.
• MFER Output cannot be performed for patients whose Patient ID is not
set.
1. Touch [ ] → [MFER Output] on the Full Disclosure window to display the 9

setting window.
2. Set the waveforms to be saved.

i) Enter the patient information and set the duration of data output.
ii) Select the waveforms to be output.
iii) Set Patient Information Encrypt, Pacing Maker Output, and NIBP
Output to ON or OFF.
Patient Information Output Time Patient Information Encrypt

Sets the patient name to Touch the parameters for the Sets whether or not patient
output to the file. The patient waveforms to be saved to set information is encrypted.
name set here applies only to the output duration.
the MFER file.
ECG Auto Select

Select from 2CH, 3CH
or 12 Leads.
Wave Select NIBP Output Pacing Maker Output

Selects the waveforms Sets whether or not Sets whether or not pacing marker
to be output. NIBP is output. information is output.
[MFER Output]
Outputs the waveforms.
3. Touch [MFER Output]. When the confirmation window is displayed, touch

[Yes] to output the waveforms.
The [Stop MFER Output] key is displayed on the Menu window while the
waveforms are being output. Touch this key to stop MFER output.
9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Expanded Waveform
You can expand the full disclosure waveforms (up to 16 parameters) stored in the
central monitor. Select the displayed waveforms of the parameter from the stored
waveforms of the parameter. You can register four Expanded Waveform windows
(Single Wave, ECG 12 Lead, All Waves and Custom). Up to 16 parameters* can
be displayed for each window.
* Up to 7 parameters in the split display and up to 16 parameters in full size

display.
The Expanded Waveform window displays the full disclosure waveforms

expanded more.
CAUTION
When the full disclosure waveform is expanded in actual size, steep
slopes such as QRS may be distorted because it has been
compressed then expanded. When reading the expanded ECG
waveforms, be aware of this distortion.
Automatic scroll
Scale Scrolls one page every three seconds when [ ] or
Changes the scale. Refer Comment icon [ ] is touched. If [ ] is touched to display the latest
to “Setting the Scale of a Displayed when the comment is data, the data is updated when more data is acquired.
Displayed Parameter”. entered. Touch to check the comment. Touch [ ] to stop scrolling. Scrolling can be stopped by
Refer to “Checking Comments”. touching the window while scrolling.
Parameter name
Changes the displayed
parameters. Refer to “Setting Time at the top
the Displayed Waveforms”. Date of the waveform Sweep speed
Window name
Calibration waveform
Displays 1 mV of
calibration waveform on
the ECG leads.
Expanded waveform
Parameter waveforms which is set to the displayed waveform are displayed.
When the monitored bed is a multiple patient receiver and there is signal loss or [ ]: Changes between split display and full size
running out of the battery, triangle waveform is displayed. display.
Waveforms are not displayed in the following case. [ ]: Changes to a different review window.
• When the patient is temporarily discharged. [ ]: Changes to a different Expanded Waveform
• The time before admission is displayed. window (Single Wave, ECG 12 Lead, All
• Communication loss Waves, Custom).
• Displayed parameter is not monitored. [ ]: Change settings.
Caliper and divider measurements are available on the displayed waveforms
Refer to “Measuring a Waveform”.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS

Registers a comment to the displayed on the time axis. You can move the
displayed waveform. Refer to cursor by dragging it or by directly touching the
“Registering Comments”. time axis.
Display zoom Scroll keys

Touch to change the display zoom. The display time per one • : Scrolls the set width (per page, Prints expanded
line depends on the display zoom. This is available in full size 30 min or 60 min) right and waveforms.
display. left. Refer to “Function Keys
• × 1: 10 seconds per line Setting” in Section 6-1 of the Records expanded
• × 2: 5 seconds per line Administrator’s Guide. waveforms.
• × 4: 2.5 seconds per line • : Displays the latest data.
The stored waveforms are set on the [ ] → [Stored Waves] on the Full
Disclosure window. Refer to the “Full Disclosure”.
9
According to the [Waveform Alarm Color] setting, the arrhythmia alarm
occurrence can be indicated on the ECG waveform with a alarm priority color.
Setting the Displayed Waveform

You can set the parameter of the waveform to be displayed on each Expanded
Waveform window (Single Wave, ECG 12 Lead, All Waves, Custom) from the
stored waveforms.
Select the parameter from the stored waveforms set on the [ ] → [Stored
Waves] on the Full Disclosure window.
On the Expanded Waveform windows (except Custom), when the Expanded

Waveform window is changed to windows other than Review windows, the
displayed waveform setting returns to the default settings. To always display the
waveforms in the same combination, set the displayed waveform on the Custom
window.
Single Wave, ECG 12 Lead, All Waves

1. Display the Expanded Waveform window (Single Wave, ECG 12 Lead, All
Waves).
2. Touch [ ] → [Displayed Wave Setting] on the Expanded Waveform



parameter again.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Parameter name You can display the setting window by touching the parameter name.
iii
i
ii
Custom
You can customize the displayed waveforms and the key name. The settings set
on the Custom window are saved when the window is changed.
1. Display the Expanded Waveform window (Custom).
2. Touch [ ] → [Displayed Wave Setting] on the Expanded Waveform

window (Custom) to display the setting window.
Parameter name
3. Change the key name.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS

iii) After the setting is complete, touch [Apply]. The name and displayed
waveform are set to the custom settings.
i
ii
iii

parameter again.
Selecting the Expanded Waveform Sweep Speed

You can set the waveform sweep speed for each Expanded Waveform window
(Single Wave, ECG 12 Lead, All Waves, Custom) when the expanded waveforms
are full size display.
This setting is available when the Expanded Waveform window (Single Wave,
ECG 12 Lead, All Waves, Custom) is a full size display. The sweep speed is
fixed to 25 mm/s in a split display.
Touch [ ] → [Sweep Speed] on the Expanded Waveform window (Single

Settings: 6.25, 25, 50 mm/s

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Setting the Alarm Display in the Alarm Priority Color

You can set whether to indicate the arrhythmia alarm occurrence on the ECG
waveform in the color of the alarm priority.
Touch [ ] → [Waveform Alarm Color] on the Expanded Waveform window

(Single Wave, ECG 12 Lead, All Waves, Custom) to display the setting window
and touch the key to change.
NOTE
When the arrhythmia analysis is set to OFF, the display color cannot be
changed.
ON: Indicates the arrhythmia alarm occurrence on ECG waveform in the alarm
priority color.
OFF: ECG waveform display color does not change.
Turning Pacing Mark On or Off

When the pacing detection and pacing mark display is set to ON on the [ECG]
→ [Other] of the Parameter Setup, you can set whether to display the pacing
mark on the ECG waveform.
Touch [ ] → [Display Pacing Mark] on the Expanded Waveform window

(Single Wave, ECG 12 Lead, All Waves, Custom) to display the setting window
and touch the key to change.
ON: Display the pacing mark on the ECG waveform.

OFF: Do not display the pacing mark on the ECG waveform.
You can set whether to display the pacing mark [Above Wave] or [Overlap
Wave] on the [Monitor Setting] → [Display Settings] → [ECG Display] →
[Pacing Mark Position] of the System Setup screen. Refer to Section 6-1 of the

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Measuring a Waveform
You can measure an expanded waveform on the window with the calipers or
dividers.
Caliper Measurement
Measure the distance between any two points using calipers. When you register
the measurement data, the data is displayed in the event list. Measurement items
depend on the waveform of the parameter.
Use the optional mouse to measure the expanded waveform with the caliper
more precisely.
Waves, Custom).
2. Touch [ ] → [Caliper Measurement] on the Expanded Waveform window

9
to display the setting window.
3. Touch [Measured Waveform] and touch the parameter waveform to measure.
4. Measure the waveform.

i) Select a measurement item.

ii) Touch a start point and an end point on the waveform. A line appears
between the two points and the horizontal or vertical distance of the two
points is displayed.
To measure another distance, touch another two points on the waveform.

The previous measurement result disappears and the new measurement
result is displayed.
iii) To register the measurement results to the event list, touch [Entry]. Refer
to “Event List”.
NOTE
The line and measured values on the waveforms are temporary
information and are deleted when you exit the caliper
measurement mode.
If you change the measured waveform during caliper measurement, the line and
measured value on the waveform are deleted.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Example: Measuring R-R of the ECG (II leads)

Start Point End Point
ii ii
i
Clear
Deletes all the measurement results.
[ ]
iii Records the caliper measurement values and expanded
waveforms. Refer to “Recording Caliper Measurement
Values with the Expanded Waveform” in this section.
List of measured items for each parameter
Item Direction Unit

R-R R-R: ms
(HR is also displayed) HR: bpm
P-R, QRS-WIDTH, Horizontal
ECG
Q-WIDTH, Q-T, QTc*1, ms
P-Q
ST, Q-HEIGHT Vertical mV
PR Horizontal /min
IBP (SYS/DIA) Amplitude, SYS/DIA
Vertical mmHg
measurement*2
PR Horizontal /min
IBP (MEAN)
Amplitude Vertical mmHg
Pulse wave PR
/min
RR Horizontal
Inspired time, Expired time ms
I:E (measurement value)*3 –– ––
Respiration wave
(Gas) Inspired partial pressure
(concentration)*4,
Vertical mmHg
Expired partial pressure
(concentration)*4
RR /min
Respiration wave Horizontal
Inspired time, Expired time ms
(Other)
I:E (measurement value)
–– ––
Other None
*1 “QTc” is a calculation value.

QT interval (ms)
QTc (QTc interval) =
R-R interval (s)
*2 “SYS/DIA measurement” selects the highest and lowest point of the

waveform.
* “I:E (measurement value)” is a calculation value. When the inspired time and
3
expired time is measured, inspired time is “1”.

*4 Select either the Inspired partial pressure (concentration) or Expired partial
pressure (concentration).

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Divider Measurement
You can measure an expanded waveform with the dividers.
Waves, Custom).
2. Touch [ ] → [Divider Measurement] on the Expanded Waveform

3. Measure the waveform with the dividers.

Regular interval line Divider Measurement OFF
Displays as the same interval as the divider. Ends the divider measurement.
9
Touch and drag to move the divider
keeping the divider interval.

to the measurement start point. Displays a interval of divider.
Divider
(Defaults: 100 ms, HR: 60/min)
to the measurement end point.
4. Touch [Divider Measurement OFF] to end the measurement.

You can set the scale of the displayed parameter on the Expanded Waveform
window. The set scale is common for all Expanded Waveform windows (Single
Wave, ECG 12 Lead, All Waves, Custom).
Waves, Custom).
Scale 2. Set the scale of the displayed parameter.

i) Touch the parameter scale to be displayed on the Expanded Waveform

i
iii
ii

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Customize Scale
When [Customize Scale] is touched, waveforms can be displayed on the
desired scale. The value of the customize scale is set on the Trend window.
The [Customize Scale] appears when the parameter waveform is a scale type
(except for FLOW, FLOW(EXT), VOL, EEG1 to EEG8). Refer to “Setting the
Customized Scale” in Trend section.
Recording the Expanded Waveform

You can record the displayed expanded waveforms with the WS-960P Recorder
Unit. Display the Expanded Waveform window and touch [ ] on the bottom
of the pane.

You can record the displayed expanded waveform with the WS-960P Recorder
Unit. Display the Expanded Waveform window and touch [ ] on the bottom
of the window.
can be recorded.
Recording Caliper Measurement Values with the Expanded

Waveform
You can also record the displayed expanded waveform together with
measurement values at the calipers with the WS-960P Recorder Unit. Display the
Caliper window and touch [ ].

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Printing the Expanded Waveform

You can print the displayed expanded waveform with the network printer. The
caliper measurement value and comment within 5 seconds before and after the
displayed expanded waveform are also printed.
Display the Expanded Waveform window and touch [ ] on the bottom of the
pane.

You can print the displayed expanded waveform with the network printer. The
9
displayed expanded waveform are also printed.
Display the Expanded Waveform window and touch [ ] on the bottom of the
window.
can be printed.
NOTE
Only one caliper measurement value and comment are printed for one
expanded waveform. If there is more than one caliper measurement value
or comment within 5 seconds before and after the expanded waveform,
the oldest caliper measurement value and comment are printed.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Event List
The Event List window displays the latest 120 hours of events on the monitored
beds. The most recent 10,000 files can be saved for each bed.
The following events can be displayed in the event list.

• Arrhythmia: Arrhythmia alarms
• Limit: Upper and lower limits and ST alarms
• Technical: Technical alarms
• System: System alarms
• Comment: Comments
• Caliper: Caliper measurements
NOTE
• When the bed’s data is saved on a central monitor other than
CNS-6201, the data cannot be displayed on the Event List window.
• If a new file is created when the maximum number of files has already
• IBP (SYS/DIA/MEAN) technical alarms are treated as one file and
displayed on the Event List window as one file.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Arrhythmia recall waveform

When the arrhythmia recall waveform is displayed on
the arrhythmia alarm, the waveform can be expanded by
touching the waveform.
NOTE: The arrhythmia waveforms which are not set

on [Create Recall Waveform] on Arrhythmia Recall
window cannot be displayed. Refer to Section 9.
[ ]
Touch to display the setting
window and select the event
Sort type. The [ALL] toggles key, Annotation
Touch to sort the list. all select or all deselect. Refer to “Arrhythmia Recall”. Arrhythmia name
• Date/Time (Duration): Sort by date and time of
event occurrence.
• Level: Sort by alarm priority.
* Comment entered time and caliper

measurement time are displayed for a
comment or caliper measurement event.
Event occurrence time* Event end time*
Event duration time* Level Displays the event Displays the contents of events.
Displays the duration time of the alarm. Displayed in case of types.
alarm.
Alarm Notice Icon [ ]

Appears on the list when an alarm
occurs (when [Alarm Notice
Icon] is set to [ON]). The icon
disappears after you touch the list
to check. Refer to Section 5.
Prints event list.

Cursor
Synchronizes with other review windows. Select the list on Records event list.
the window.
Touch [ ] or [ ] or drag the
NOTE: When you display the Arrhythmia Recall scroll bar to scroll the cursor up
window from the Event List window and the cursor on and down.
the Event List window is at a file whose parameter is
“Arrhythmia”, the cursor appears at the file with the [ ]: Changes between split display and full size
nearest clock time on the Arrhythmia Recall window, display.
regardless of the arrhythmia type. [ ]: Changes to a different review window.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Recording the Event List

You can record up to 48 items, including the selected one, in the event list in
6 pages with the WS-960P Recorder Unit.
Display the Event List window and touch [ ] on the bottom of the pane.

You can record up to 48 items, including the selected one, in the event list in
6 pages with the WS-960P Recorder Unit. Display the Event List window and
touch [ ] on the bottom of the window.
can be recorded.
Printing the Event List

You can print up to 48 items, including the selected one, in the event list in
1 page with the network printer. Display the Event List window and touch [ ]
on the bottom of the pane.

You can print up to 48 items, including the selected one, in the event list in
1 page with the network printer. Display the Event List window and touch [ ]
on the bottom of the window.
can be printed.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
ST Recall
The ST Recall window displays ST recall files of up to 120 hours. ST recall files
are created every one minute and saved for each bed.
NOTE
If a new file is created when the maximum number of files has already
been reached, the oldest file is deleted.
CAUTION
• Although the ST algorithm has been tested for accuracy of the ST
analysis result, the significance of the ST level changes need to be
determined only by a physician.
9
• The ECG from transmitters other than ZM series is not processed
by a 3.2 second time constant filter. Therefore, the ST level
measurement of other transmitters is not designed to be accurate
enough for diagnosis. Do not rely on this ST level measurement.
When the monitored bed is a multiple patient receiver, ST measurement point

(ISO point and ST point) can be set on [ECG] → [ST Point] of the Parameter
setting. Refer to Section 12.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Comment icon
Displayed when a comment is entered. Touch to check the
comment. Refer to “Checking Comments”. Touch [ ] or [ ] or
Sensitivity
Changes the displayed sensitivity. drag the scroll bar to scroll
Cursor
Refer to “Setting the Sensitivity”. the list up and down.
Synchronizes with other review
Heart rate windows. Select the file on the window. Date and time
Lead name
Changes the displayed
lead. Refer to ”Setting
the Displayed Lead”.
ST value
ST recall waveform
Reference file
ST recall file registered as a
Check box
reference file is displayed. [ ]: Changes between split display and full size
Touch to check the file to record or print.
To register the reference file, display.
Touch again to deselect the file.
select the file to register and [ ]: Changes to a different review window.
touch [Reference]. [ ]: Touch [ ] → [Interval] to display the setting
window and set the display interval of the ST
recall file. (1, 5, 10, 30, 60 minutes)
Registers a comment to the file at the Time axis (120 hours) Range before admission Cursor
cursor. Refer to “Registering Comments”. Range before admission and the cursor are
cursor by dragging it or by directly touching
the time axis.
Scroll keys Prints ST

Check or clear all displayed files. recall files.
• : Scrolls displayed time width (by one window).
Records ST
recall files.
Setting the Displayed Lead

You can set the lead of the ST recall waveform.
1. Touch the lead name on the ST Recall window to display the setting window.
2. Select the lead.
To deselect the parameter, touch the selected lead again.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
3. Touch [ ] to close the setting window after the setting is complete.

Lead name
Setting the Sensitivity

9
Sensitivity You can set the sensitivity of the ST recall waveform.
1. Touch the sensitivity on the ST Recall window to display the setting window.
2. Select the sensitivity.
Recording the Waveform of ST Recall File

You can record the selected file of the ST recall waveform (file with the check
mark) with the WS-960P Recorder Unit. Select the file on the ST Recall window
and touch [ ] on the bottom of the pane.

You can record the selected file of the ST recall waveform (file with the check
mark) with the WS-960P Recorder Unit. Select the file on the ST Recall window
and touch [ ] on the bottom of the window.
can be recorded.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Printing the ST Recall Window

You can print the ST Recall window with the network printer.
Display the ST Recall window and touch [ ] on the bottom of the pane.

You can print the ST Recall window with the network printer.
Display the ST Recall window and touch [ ] on the bottom of the window.
can be printed.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Arrhythmia Recall
The Arrhythmia Recall window displays the list of arrhythmia recall files. The
arrhythmia recall files are created for the most recent 1,500 arrhythmias for each
bed.
One arrhythmia recall waveform is 8 seconds or 10 seconds depending on

the connected bedside monitor. An arrhythmia recall file is created so that the
detected arrhythmia is displayed in the center of the recall waveform. If several
arrhythmias occur while creating an arrhythmia recall file, a recall file is created
according to the priority. Refer to “Arrhythmia Classification and Priority”.
[ ]
Touch to display the
setting window and set 9
the displayed arrhythmia
Sort types. [ALL] selects or Sort
Touch to sort the list. deselects all files. Touch to sort the list by
• Date/Time: Sort by date and time of file check mark on or off.
creation. Arrhythmia recall waveform
• Event: Sort by arrhythmia name. Displays expanded waveform window by touching
the waveform when [ ] is set to [List Display]. QRS annotation
File creation date and Check box

Arrhythmia Lead name Sensitivity Heart rate VPC rate
time Touch to check the file to record/print or
name
delete. Touch again to deselect the file.
Touch [ ] or [ ] or drag the scroll bar to
scroll the cursor up and down.
Cursor
Synchronizes with other
review windows. Select the
list on the window.
Comment icon
Displayed when a comment
is entered. Touch to check the
comment. Refer to “Checking
Comments”.
Registers a comment to the

file at the cursor. Refer to
“Registering Comments”. Check or clear all files on the display.

[ ]: Records arrhythmia recall files.
[ ]: Prints arrhythmia recall files.
Delete all the selected files (with a check mark). [ ]: Changes to a different review window.
When the confirmation window is displayed after [ ]: Change the display pattern of the Arrhythmia Recall window.
[Delete] is touched, touch [Yes] and delete the file. • Waveform Display: Displays 5 files in split display and 11 files in full size
display.
NOTE: Arrhythmia recall files can be deleted on • List Display: Displays 12 files in split display and 27 files in full
a central monitor where the bed’s data is saved. size display.
[Delete] cannot be touched on the central [ ]: Touch [ ] → [Create Recall Waveform] to display the setting window and
monitor where the bed’s data is not saved. set the arrhythmia to create the arrhythmia recall file.
[ALL] selects or deselects all files. The [Create Recall Waveform] is available
when the bed’s data is saved in this central monitor.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
MANUAL arrhythmia recall files are created on the Full Disclosure Waveform
window. Refer to “Creating a Recall File of Desired ECG” in this section.
NOTE
• When [Arrhythmia Analysis] is set to [OFF] on the bedside monitor and
central monitor, arrhythmia recall files cannot be created.
• Arrhythmia recall files are created only when the arrhythmia which is set
on [Create Recall Waveform] are detected.
• End A-FIB is not displayed on the Arrhythmia Recall window.
Arrhythmia Classification and Priority

If several arrhythmias occur while creating an arrhythmia recall file, a recall file
is created according to the priority shown below. The following arrhythmia types
are available.
Arrhythmias might not be displayed depending on the bedside monitor model.
Classification Description
ASYSTOLE Asystole
V FIB Ventricular fibrillation
V TACHY Ventricular tachycardia
EXT TACHY Extreme tachycardia
EXT BRADY Extreme bradycardia
VPC RUN VPC short run
V BRADY* Ventricular bradycardia
SV TACHY* Supraventricular tachycardia
Low ← Priority → High
TACHYCARDIA Tachycardia
BRADYCARDIA Bradycardia
PAUSE* Pause
COUPLET VPC couplet (Paired VPCs)
EARLY VPC Early VPC
MULTIFORM Multi-form ECG
V RHYTHM* Ventricular rhythm
BIGEMINY Ventricular bigeminy
TRIGEMINY* Ventricular trigeminy
A-FIB* Atrial fibrillation
VPC Ventricular premature contraction
IRREGULAR RR* Irregular RR
PROLONGED RR Prolonged R-R interval
NO PACER PULSE* Oversensing
PACER NON-CAPTURE* Non-capture
* These arrhythmias become available when “Extended” is selected for

Arrhythmia Type on bedside monitor. Refer to Section 6-1 “ORG Setting” of

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
QRS Waveform Classification

When the arrhythmia recall waveform is expanded, QRS waveform classification
is displayed. The following annotations are available.
Annotation Description
N Normal QRS complex
S Supraventricular contraction
V Ventricular premature contraction
A Abnormal beat
E Early VPC
P Paced QRS
QRS which cannot be analyzed because of noise, or
―
QRS which is currently being learned.
? QRS which cannot be judged.
Outputting a Screen Image of an Arrhythmia Recall File

9
You can output a screen image of the selected file (one with a check mark) to the
specified folder as a PNG file. Select the file on the Arrhythmia Recall window
and touch [Image Output] at the bottom of the pane.
File name: Patient ID + date and time of the arrhythmia recall event. png
NOTE
• The [Image Output] key is only available when the image output
destination folder is set in the System Setup screen. To set the
destination folder, the administrator password and maintenance
password are required. For details, refer to the administrator’s guide.
• An image cannot be output if the patient does not have a patient ID.
Recording the Waveform of an Arrhythmia Recall File

You can record the selected file of the arrhythmia recall waveform (file with the
check mark) with the WS-960P Recorder Unit. Select the file on the Arrhythmia
Recall window and touch [ ] on the bottom of the pane.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS

You can record the selected file of the arrhythmia recall waveform (file with the
check mark) with the WS-960P Recorder Unit. Select the file on the Arrhythmia
Recall window and touch [ ] on the bottom of the window.
can be recorded.
Printing the Arrhythmia Recall Window

You can print the Arrhythmia Recall window with the network printer. The
arrhythmia recall waveform are also printed.
Display the Arrhythmia Recall window and touch [ ] on the bottom of the
pane.

You can print the Arrhythmia Recall window with the network printer. The
arrhythmia recall waveform are also printed.
Display the Arrhythmia Recall window and touch [ ] on the bottom of the
window.
can be printed.
NOTE
Only one caliper measurement value and comment are printed for
one arrhythmia recall waveform. If there is more than one caliper
measurement value or comment within 5 seconds before and after the
arrhythmia recall waveform, the oldest caliper measurement value and
comment are printed.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
SpO2 Trend
The SpO2 Trend window displays the trend information of a selected period in
the most recent 120 hours. It shows trendgraphs and histograms of SpO2 values
including number and duration of SpO2 drops.
To display the SpO2 Trend window, display the Review window and touch [ ]
to select [SpO2 Trend].

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Fall: Number of times the SpO2 dropped below the threshold

Max Continuation: Longest duration of SpO2 below the threshold
Displays the Histogram MIN, MAX, MEAN: SpO2 minimum, maximum and mean values
window. Refer to Calm, Fall: SpO2 value of the calm, resting state and the % decrease
“Displaying the Histogram below the calm value set on the [ ] → [Threshold
Window”. Setting]. Refer to “Setting the SpO2 Trend Threshold”.
Time bar
(Displayed
Window name time width)
Scale Threshold
You can touch to change the The threshold is automatically set according to
scale. Refer to “Setting the Scale the SpO2 value of the calm, resting state and
Trendgraph
of a Displayed Parameter”. the % decrease below the calm value. Refer to Measurement data at the
“Setting the SpO2 Trend Threshold”. cursor position
Parameter name
You can touch to change the
displayed parameters. Refer
to “Setting the Displayed
Parameters and Events”.
SpO2 and other

parameter
trendgraphs
Event
trendgraphs
You can touch
to change the
displayed event.
Event
Events are displayed in the color corresponds to the alarm Number of events
priority. The width of event is from the alarm occurrence to
alarm end. [ ]: Changes to a different review window
Cursor [ ]: Changes to a different SpO2 Trend window
Synchronizes with other review windows. The date and time (SpO2 Trend 1 and 2)
at the cursor position is displayed above the cursor. You can [ ]: Changes the SpO2 trend display format and
move the cursor by touching directly on the cursor. threshold setting. Refer to “Changing the
Display Format of the SpO2 Trendgraph”.
Range before admission Range of displayed time width

Start Time Time axis (120 hours)
The start time of the displayed range is The range before admission and the
based on the end time and displayed time range of the displayed time width and
width. The start time cannot be changed. the cursor are displayed on the time axis.
Cursor
Displayed time width End Time

Touch to change the display time width of the SpO2 trend window. You can touch to
(1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours, 8 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours) change the end time.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Displaying the Histogram Window

The Histogram window displays the SpO2 trendgraph, the number of SpO2
measurements and number of times SpO2 drop below the threshold for each
minutes.
Touch [Histogram] on SpO2 Trend window (SpO2 Trend 1 and 2) to display the
Histogram window.
Only SpO2 can be displayed as a histogram. The histogram can only be displayed
when the displayed parameter is set to SpO2.
Displays the same data as the upper part of the

SpO2 Trend window. Refer to the previous page.
9
SpO2 trendgraph SpO2

maximum,
minimum and
mean values
Time bar
(Displayed
time width)
The most frequent

SpO2 value in
the histogram is
indicated
The most frequent

continuation time
in the histogram is
indicated Continuation time histogram SpO2 value histogram
This histogram shows the number of times This histogram shows the measured SpO2
SpO2 dropped below the threshold and how values and how many times each value was
long it remained below the threshold. measured.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Changing the SpO2 Trend Window

Touch [ ] of each SpO2 Trend window (SpO2 Trend 1 and 2) to change the
SpO2 Trend window. The number of displayed parameters and events depends on
the SpO2 Trend window.
Number of
SpO2 Trend Window Number of Events
Parameters
SpO2 Trend 1 3 parameters 5 events
SpO2 Trend 2 5 parameters 3 events
Changing the Display Format of the SpO2 Trendgraph

Touch [ ] → [Display Setting] of each SpO2 Trend window (SpO2 Trend
1 and 2) to display the setting window and change the display format of the
trendgraph (MAX, MIN, AVE).
The display format of the trendgraph and cursor display label depends on the
parameter. For the display format for each parameter, refer to “Changing the
Display Format of the Trendgraph” in this section.
Setting the SpO2 Trend Threshold

You can set the SpO2 value of the calm, resting state and the % decrease below
the calm value which is judged as SpO2 decrease. The threshold is automatically
set according to the Calm and Fall setting.
1. Touch [ ] → [Threshold Setting] of each SpO2 Trend window (SpO2

Trend 1 and 2) to display the setting window.
2. Touch the [ ] or [ ] to set each value.
3. Touch [ ] to close the setting window after the setting is complete.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Threshold
The threshold is shown as a yellow line on the SpO2 trendgraph. The threshold is
automatically set according to the SpO2 value of the calm, resting state and the %
decrease below the calm value.
If “SpO2 fall” is set as the displayed event, the time when the threshold is lower
than the SpO2 value is displayed as the event. Also the number of times that the
threshold is lower than the SpO2 value is displayed. Refer to the “Setting the
Displayed Event” in this section.
Example: If you set Calm 96% and Fall 2%, then threshold is automatically set
to 94%.
Threshold
Setting the Displayed Parameters and Events

You can set the displayed parameters and events on each SpO2 Trend window
(SpO2 Trend 1 and 2).

1. Display the SpO2 Trend window (SpO2 Trend 1 and 2).
For changing the SpO2 Trend window, refer to “Changing the Trend
Window”.
Parameter name
2. Touch the parameter name to display the setting window.
3. Set the parameter to be displayed on the window.

ii) Touch the parameter to be displayed.

parameter again.

The parameter on the bottom area can be changed to event.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
AUTO
The monitoring parameters are set according to the
parameter priority. The event trends are not displayed
and all the parameter trendgraphs are displayed.
iii
i
ii
Setting the Displayed Events

2. Touch the event name to display the setting window.
3. Set the event to be displayed on the window.

i) Touch [Event].
ii) Select the category of event.
iii) Touch the event to be displayed. Several events can be selected

depending on the display layout.
Event name
To deselect the event, touch [NONE] or touch the selected event again.
To display an event which is not displayed on the window, touch [ ] or

[ ] to change the window.
When deselecting all the selected events, iv) Touch [ ] to close the setting window after the setting is complete.
the [Parameter Setup] tab is available.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Number of selected events
AUTO
The monitoring parameters are set according to the
parameter priority. The event trends are not displayed
and all the parameter trendgraphs are displayed.
Available number of events
iv
ii
iii
i 9
Clear All Events
Deselects all the settings in each event category of
Arrhythmia, Limit and Technical.

You can set the scale of the displayed parameter on the SpO2 Trend window.
Scale
2. Set the scale of the displayed parameter.
i) Touch the parameter scale to be displayed on the SpO2 Trend window to
i
ii
Setting the Customized Scale

The parameter scale on the SpO2 Trend window can be customized.
1. Touch [Customize] to display the Customize Scale window.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
2. Touch the scale to set the scale.
3. Enter the scale using the numeric key pad and touch [ENTER].
2
4. After entering the upper limit and lower limit scale, touch [OK] to close the
Customize Scale window.
SpO2 Trend Types and Scale

For the SpO2 trendgraph types and available parameter scales, refer to
“Trendgraph Types and Scale” in this section.
Printing the SpO2 Trendgraph

You can print the displayed SpO2 trendgraph on the SpO2 Trend window with the
network printer. Display the SpO2 Trend window and touch [ ].

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
ECG 12 Lead Analysis
The ECG 12 Lead Analysis window displays the results of ECG 12 lead analysis
performed at bedside monitors. Up to 200 files can be saved for each bed at the
central monitor.
The ECG 12 Lead Analysis window has the following analysis or comparison
windows.
• Analysis Wave (3 × 4)
• Averaged Wave (3 × 4)
• Analysis Wave Comparison
• Averaged Wave Comparison
9
The analysis report cannot be displayed on the following analysis or comparison
windows.
• Averaged Wave Comparison
NOTE
• For details about the analysis and the clinical findings, refer to the
ECAPS 12C Program User’s Guide.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS

[ ]: Change the displayed window.
(Analysis Wave (3 × 4, 6 × 2, 12 × 1), Averaged Wave (3 × 4), Analysis
Wave Comparison, Averaged Wave Comparison)
[ ]: Change settings.
Touch [ ] or [ ] to scroll the analysis

report up and down.
Analysis report
Displays an analysis
report at the cursor file.
Analysis and comparison

window
Displays an analysis and
comparison window at the
cursor file.
Comment icon
Displayed when a comment
is entered. Touch to check the
Comments”.
Analysis date and time
Representative measurement
value of analysis
Reference file
The file registered as a
reference file is displayed.
Registers a cursor file as a Check or clear all files on the

Registers a comment to the Touch [ ] or [ ] or
reference file. display.
file at the cursor. Refer to drag the scroll bar to
“Registering Comments”. scroll the list right and
left.
Delete all the selected files (with a check mark). When the confirmation window Check box Cursor
is displayed after [Delete] is touched, touch [Yes] and delete the file. Touch to check the file to Synchronizes with other review
record or delete. windows. Select the file on the
NOTE: Files can be deleted on a central monitor where the bed’s data is Touch again to deselect window.
saved. [Delete] cannot be touched on the central monitor where the bed’s the file.
data is not saved.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Analysis Wave Window

Touch [ ] → [Analysis Wave (3 × 4)], [Analysis Wave (6 × 2)] or [Analysis
Wave (12 × 1)] on the ECG 12 Lead Analysis window to display the Analysis
Wave window.
Example: Analysis Wave (3 × 4)

ST value
Analysis waveform lead
Analysis date and time 2 seconds
Rhythm waveform lead Rhythm waveform Calibration waveform (1 mV)

and ST value Changes the lead. Refer and sensitivity
to “Setting the Rhythm Changes the display sensitivity.
Waveform Lead”. Refer to “Setting the
Sensitivity”.
Averaged Wave Window

Touch [ ] → [Averaged Wave (3 × 4)] on the ECG 12 Lead Analysis window
to display the Averaged Wave window.
Analysis date and time
QRS start point

Each waveform lead
P wave end point QRS end point Calibration waveform (1 mV) and
and ST value
P wave start point T wave end point sensitivity
Changes the display sensitivity.
Refer to “Setting the Sensitivity”.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Analysis Wave Comparison Window

Touch [ ] → [Analysis Wave Comparison] on the ECG 12 Lead Analysis
window to display the Analysis Wave Comparison window. Compare the
analysis waveform by the reference file and cursor file.
Calibration waveform (1 mV)
and sensitivity
Changes the display sensitivity.
Analysis date and time of the Analysis date and time Refer to “Setting the Sensitivity”.
reference file of the cursor file
Lead of each analysis

waveform and ST value
Touch [ ] or [ ] to scroll
the list right and left.
Analysis waveform of the reference file Analysis waveform of the cursor file
Averaged Wave Comparison Window

Touch [ ] → [Averaged Wave Comparison] on the ECG 12 Lead Analysis
window to display the Averaged Wave Comparison window. Compare the
reference file and selected three files of the average waveforms.
Display the comparison waveform file in the following procedure.

1. Touch the position to display.
2. Touch the file to compare.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Calibration waveform (1 mV) and sensitivity

Lead of each average waveform Changes the display sensitivity.
and ST value Refer to “Setting the Sensitivity”.
Analysis date and time of the Analysis date and time of the
reference file comparison file
9
Average waveform of the Average waveform of the
reference file comparison file
Setting the Sensitivity

You can set the sensitivity of the analysis waveform and average waveform.
The setting is common for all analysis and comparison windows.
1. Touch [ ] → [Sensitivity Setting] on the analysis and comparison

1 2. Select the sensitivity.
Calibration waveform (1 mV) The setting window can be displayed by directly touching the calibration
waveform.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Setting the Rhythm Waveform Lead

You can set the rhythm waveform lead on the Analysis Wave (3 × 4) and
Analysis Wave (6 × 2) window.
The setting leads are common for all analysis windows.
1. Touch [ ] → [Rhythm Wave Lead] on the Analysis Wave (3 × 4) or

Analysis Wave (6 × 2) window to display the setting window.
2. Select the lead.
1 2
The setting window can be displayed by directly touching the rhythm waveform
on each analysis window.
Rhythm waveform
Measuring an Analysis Waveform and Average Waveform

You can measure an analysis waveform and average waveform with the calipers
or dividers.
Caliper Measurement
Measure the distance between any two points using calipers. Caliper
measurement can be performed on the following windows.
• Averaged Wave (3 × 4)
Use the optional mouse to more precisely measure the analysis waveform and
average waveform with the caliper.
1. Display the analysis waveform or average waveform window to measure.
2. Touch [ ] → [Caliper Measurement] on the analysis waveform or average

waveform window to display the measurement window.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
3. Touch [Measured Waveform] and touch the lead to measure.
4. Measure the waveform.

i) Select a measurement item.

ii) Touch any two points on the waveform. A line appears between the
two points and the horizontal or vertical distance of the two points is
displayed.
To measure another distance, touch two more points on the waveform.

The previous measurement result disappears and the new measurement
result is displayed.
NOTE
The line and measured values on the waveforms are temporary
information and are deleted when you exit the caliper
9
measurement mode.
Start point End point
ii ii
Clear
Deletes all the measurement results.
If you change the lead during caliper measurement, the measured value, the
line and measured value on the waveform are deleted when you exit the caliper
measurement mode.
Measurement Items List
Item Direction Unit

R-R R-R: ms
(HR is also displayed) HR: bpm
I, II, II, aVR, aVL, P-R, QRS-WIDTH, Horizontal
aVF, V1 to 6 Q-WIDTH, Q-T, ms
QTc*, P-Q
ST, Q-HEIGHT Vertical mV
* “QTc” is a calculation value.

QT interval (ms)
QTc (QTc interval) =
R-R interval (s)

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Divider Measurement
You can measure an analysis waveform with the dividers. Divider measurement
can be performed on the following analysis and comparison windows.
1. Display the analysis waveform or average waveform window to measure.
2. Touch [ ] → [Divider Measurement] to display the dividers.
3. Measure the waveform with the dividers.

Regular interval line Divider Measurement OFF
Displays as the same interval as the divider. Ends the divider measurement.

keeping the divider interval.
Displays a divider.
(Defaults: 1,000 ms, HR: 60/min)
to the measurement start point.
Touch and drag to move the divider Divider
to the measurement end point.
4. Touch [Divider Measurement OFF] to end the measurement.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Outputting ECG 12 Lead Analysis Results in ECTP Format

You can output 12 lead analysis results in ECTP format.
This function is enabled when the optional QL-010P physiological examination

system compatibility license is installed.
Automatic Transfer
When ECTP automatic transfer is set to ON in the External Output window of
the System Setup screen, 12 lead analysis results are transferred automatically
as they are received. For details, refer to “External Output” in Section 6-1 of the
Manual Transfer
1. Select the output file in the 12 Lead Analysis window and touch [Trans Start]
at the bottom of the window.
9
2. When the confirmation window is displayed, touch [Yes].
The 12 lead analysis results are transferred in ECTP format to the save
destination folder.
NOTE
When QTc correction is used, analysis data cannot be output for settings
other than ECAPS.
Printing the ECG 12 Lead Analysis Window

You can print the ECG 12 Lead Analysis window with the network printer.
Display the analysis or comparison window and touch [ ].

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Hemodynamics List
The Hemodynamics List window displays hemodynamics parameter values

registered on the CO measurement window, blood pressure values entry window
and hemodynamics parameters which are automatically registered at the CCO
measurement on the bedside monitor.
Comment icon [ ]: Changes between split display and full size
Displayed when a comment display.
is entered. Touch to check the [ ]: Changes to a different review window.
Comments”. Cursor
Parameter name Synchronizes with other review windows. You can move the Registered
cursor right and left by touching directly on the cursor. date and time
Tabular trend for

each hemodynamics
parameter
(8 files/display)
Registers a comment
to the selected list.
Refer to “Registering Touch [ ] or [ ] or drag the scroll Prints hemodynamics list.
Comments”. bar to scroll the hemodynamics list
right and left. Touch [ ] or [ ] or drag
the scroll bar to scroll the
hemodynamics list up and down.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Abbreviations
The following table shows the abbreviations, units and calculations of the
parameters used in the hemodynamics list. “---” is displayed when the
parameters is not measured.
Abbreviation Description Units Equation

HR Heart Rate beat/min —
CO*1 Cardiac Output L/min —
CI Cardiac Index L/min/m2 CI = CO / BSA*2
CCO*1 Continuous Cardiac Output L/min —
CCI Continuous Cardiac Index L/min/m2 CCI = CCO / BSA*2
ART-SYS Arterial Systolic Pressure
ART-DIAS Arterial Diastolic Pressure
ART-MEAN Arterial Mean Pressure
Pulmonary Artery Systolic
PAP-SYS
Pressure
Pulmonary Artery Diastolic mmHg 9
PAP-DIAS
Pressure
Pulmonary Artery Mean —
PAP-MEAN
Pressure
Pulmonary Capillary Wedge
PCWP
Pressure
Pulmonary Capillary Wedge
PCWP TIME hh:mm
Pressure Measurement Time
LAP Left Atrial Pressure
mmHg
CVP Central Venous Pressure
SV Stroke Volume mL SV = (CO × 1000) / HR
SVI Stroke Volume Index mL/m2 SVI = (CI × 1000) / HR
LVSW = {SV × (ART-MEAN − PCWP)} ×
LVSW*3 Left Ventricular Stroke Work g·m
0.0136
Left Ventricular Stroke Work LVSWI = {SVI × (ART-MEAN − PCWP)} ×
LVSWI*3 g·m/m2
Index 0.0136
SVR Systemic Vascular Resistance dyn·s/cm5 SVR = {(ART-MEAN − CVP) × 80} / CO
Systemic Vascular Resistance
SVRI dyn·s·m2/cm5 SVRI = {(ART-MEAN − CVP) × 80} / CI
Index
Pulmonary Vascular
PVR*3 dyn·s/cm5 PVR = {(PAP-MEAN − PCWP) × 80} / CO
Resistance
Pulmonary Vascular
PVRI*3 dyn·s·m2/cm5 PVRI = {(PAP-MEAN − PCWP) × 80} / CI
Resistance Index
RVSW = {SV × (PAP-MEAN − CVP)} ×
RVSW Right Ventricular Stroke Work g·m
0.0136
Right Ventricular Stroke Work RVSWI = {SVI × (PAP-MEAN − CVP)} ×
RVSWI g·m/m2
Index 0.0136
RPP Rate Pressure Product mmHg/min RPP = ART – SYS × HR
CPP Coronary Perfusion Pressure mmHg CPP = ART – DIAS – PCWP
*1 CCO is calculated instead of CO when CCO is measured.

*2 BSA = 0.007184 × weight0.425 × height0.725 (m2) (DuBois equation)
*3 “---” is displayed when PCWP is not measured.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Printing the Hemodynamics List

You can print the hemodynamics list with the network printer.
Display the Hemodynamics List window and touch [ ] on the bottom of the
pane.

You can print the hemodynamics list with the network printer.
Display the Hemodynamics List window and touch [ ] on the bottom of the
window.
can be recorded.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Alarm Events
The Alarm Events window displays up to 10,000 files of alarm events for
one patient in the most recent 120 hours. You can register two Alarm Events
windows (Limit or Tech, Arrhy or Tech) and for each window, up to 12 events
can be displayed.
NOTE
The Alarm Events window can be displayed by one of the following methods:
• touching the bed name on the All Beds Alarm Events window. Refer to “All
9
Beds Alarm Events Window” in Section 7.
• touching the technical icon on the All Beds screen. Refer to “Technical Icon”
in Section 5.

[ ]: Changes to a different Alarm Events window (Limit or
Tech, Arrhy or Tech).
Comment icon Cursor

Displayed when a comment Synchronizes with other review windows. On Number of
Event name
is entered. Touch to check the the upper part of the cursor, the time at the generated
Changes the event name.
comment. Refer to “Checking cursor is displayed. You can move the cursor Time bar events
Refer to “Setting the (Displayed
Comments”. by touching directly on the cursor.
Displayed Event”. time width)
Window name
Alarm event For the bed which has red or yellow

Alarm Alarm technical status, the event (which causes an
Generated Recovered Displays in color corresponding to its alarm level from
alarm generation to recovery. action message) is shaded. Refer to “About
Action Messages”.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Time axis (120 hours) Range before admission Range of displayed

Range before admission and range of displayed time width
time width and the cursor are displayed on the
Registers a comment at
time axis. You can move the cursor by dragging
the date and time of the
it or by directly touching the time axis.
cursor position. Refer to Cursor
Scroll keys Prints alarm events.

Display time width
Touch to change the displayed time • : Scrolls the set width (per page, 30 min or 60 min) right and left. Refer to
width. (1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours, 8 “Function Keys Setting” in Section 6-1 of the Administrator’s Guide.
hours, 12 hours, 24 hours, 48 hours, • : Displays the latest data.
96 hours, 120 hours)
Setting the Displayed Event

You can set the event to be displayed on each Alarm Events window (Limit or
Tech, Arrhy or Tech).
1. Display the Alarm Events window (Limit or Tech, Arrhy or Tech).
Event name 2. Touch the event name and display the setting window.
3. Set the displayed event.

i) Touch the event type.
ii) Touch the event to be displayed.
To deselect the event, touch the selected event again.
Clear All Events
Touch to deselect all the selected events in the each
event categories [Arrhythmia], [Limit], [Technical].
iii
ii
When displaying the Limit or Tech window, the Arrhythmia tab is not available.
When displaying the Arrhy or Tech window, the Limit tab is not available.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Event List
The following table shows displayed events. When the displayed event is
changed, the event is displayed in the following display order in the table.
Default Settings*1
(Display Order)
Setting Item Displayed Alarm
Limit or Arrhy or
Tech Tech
Arrhythmia ASYSTOLE Each arrhythmia 1
V FIB alarm 2
V TACHY 3
EXT TACHY 4
EXT BRADY 5
VPC RUN 8
V BRADY
––
SV TACHY
TACHYCARDIA 6
BRADYCARDIA 7 9
PAUSE
COUPLET
EARLY VPC ––
MULTIFORM ––
V RHYTHM
BIGEMINY
TRIGEMINY
FREQ VPC 9
VPC
A-FIB
End A-FIB
IRREGULAR RR
PROLONGED RR
NO PACER PULSE
PACER NON-CAPTURE
Limits HR Upper and lower 1
PR limit alarm of each 2
ST parameter ––
RR 7
APNEA (T) 8
––
NIBP 3
SpO2 5
ART*2 4
CVP
PAP
ICP ALL ––
TEMP ALL
O2
CO2 6
GAS ALL
BIS ––
EEG
Technical ECG Technical LEAD OFF alarm,
9 10
NOISE alarm

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Default Settings*1
(Display Order)
Setting Item Displayed Alarm
Limit or Arrhy or
Tech Tech
Technical SpO2 Technical SpO2 technical
11 11
alarm*3
ART*2 + NIBP ART and NIBP
10
technical alarm*3
TEMP Technical TEMP technical
––
alarm*3
––
CO2 Technical CO2 technical
alarm*3
SIGNAL LOSS*4 SIGNAL LOSS
12*5 12*5
alarm*4
COMMUNICATION COMMUNICATION
12*6 12*6
LOSS LOSS
BATTERY BATTERY alarm*6 –– ––
*1 Default display order is different from the display order in the table.
*2 Typical labels of arterial pressure (ART, ART2, RAD, DORS, AO, and FEM)
*3 For details about technical alarms, refer to “Error Messages” in Section 14.
*4 For a bed monitored through an ORG-9100 series multiple patient receiver
*5 Default display order for a bed monitored through an ORG-9100 series multiple patient
receiver
* Default display order for a hardwired bedside monitor
6
Technical Icon Function

ECG or SpO2 technical icons can be displayed on the All Beds screen when
the ECG or SpO2 technical status become yellow or red on the Alarm Events
window.
Technical icon
When a technical icon is touched, the Alarm Events window and action message
for the icon are displayed.
Refer to Section 5 “Technical Icon” for details.
NOTE
To display the technical icons, [Technical Icon] of the [System
Configuration] → [Alarm] on the System Setup screen must be set
to [ON]. The default setting is [OFF]. Refer to “System Configuration
Settings” in Section 6-1 of the Administrator’s Guide.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
About Action Messages

When ECG or SpO2 technical status become yellow or red on the All Beds screen
and display the Alarm Events window, an action message is displayed on the
Alarm Events window.
Action message
When [Yes] is touched, the technical icon and action message disappear. When
[No] is touched, the message disappear but the icon is displayed continuously.
The cause of action message is shaded.
When [Yes] is touched on the action message window, the past technical alarms
are cleared and the technical status becomes green.
Printing the Alarm Events Window

You can print the Alarm Events window with the network printer.
Display the Alarm Events window and touch [ ] on the bottom of the pane.

You can print the Alarm Events window with the network printer.
Display the Alarm Events window and touch [ ] on the bottom of the window.
can be recorded.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
Discharged Patients List
The Discharged Patients List window displays the past 120 hours of review
windows of discharged patients or patients whose data were deleted on this
central monitor.
NOTE
To display the Discharged Patients List window, set the [System Composition]
→ [System] → [Admit] → [Discharge Mode] of the System Setup screen to
[Discharge]. Refer to “System Composition” in Administrator’s Guide.
Displaying the Discharged Patients List Window

1. Touch [Menu] on the left lower corner of the screen → [Discharged Patients
List] to display the Discharged Patients List window.
When [Discharged Patients List] is assigned to one of the all beds function
keys, the Discharged Patients List window can be displayed by touching
the function key. Refer to “Function Keys Setting” in Section 6-1 of the
Discharged
date and time Patient ID Patient Name Physician
Sort
• Discharge Time: Sort by date and time of
discharge.
• Patient ID: Sort by patient ID.
• Patient Name: Sort by patient name.
• Physician: Sort by physician.
Up to 300 patients of the list of discharged

patients or patients whose data were deleted
in the past 120 hours can be displayed on
the Discharged Patients List window. Touch
the data to display the review window.

9. REVIEW WINDOWS
2. Touch the patient to display the review window. The Discharged Patients
List window is displayed in the display pattern of Custom Review. For the
operation of each review window, refer to each section.
Discharged time
Discharged time of the patient is
Discharged Patients List displayed.
Changes to the Discharged Patients List window.
Patient name Window title

When you touch inside the frame for a bed,
the Individual Waveforms window for the
touched bed is displayed.
The right end of the time axis is the

discharged time.
9
Displays each
Records or prints the displayed window.
review window.
Displays the All Beds screen. Returns to the previous

screen or window.
Displays a Review Menu.
The display pattern of the Review Menu Changes to the Admit/Discharge window and
cannot be set on the Discharged Patients display the discharged patient information. [Admit/
List window. Refer to “Displaying the Discharge] can be selected by touching [ ] to
Review Window”. display the Setup Menu.
The review window is displayed in the display pattern of Custom Review when
Admit/Discharge window is displayed from the Discharged Patients List window
by touching [Review]. For displaying the review window, “Displaying the
Review Window”.

Section 10 Recording
Overview............................................................................................................................................................. 10.3
Types of Recording and Printing.............................................................................................................. 10.3
Recording....................................................................................................................................... 10.3
Printing........................................................................................................................................... 10.3
Description of Recording Modes.............................................................................................................. 10.4
Manual Recording.......................................................................................................................... 10.4
Waveform Printing.......................................................................................................................... 10.4
All Beds Alarm Management Printing............................................................................................ 10.4
Review Recording or Printing......................................................................................................... 10.5
Automatic Recording...................................................................................................................... 10.6
Remote Recording......................................................................................................................... 10.6
10
Recording Priority..................................................................................................................................... 10.7
Recorder Unit (WS-960P).............................................................................................................. 10.7
Printer............................................................................................................................................ 10.7
Recorded/Printed Data............................................................................................................................. 10.7
Manual Recording.............................................................................................................................................. 10.9
Necessary Settings for Manual Recording..................................................................................... 10.9
Starting Manual Recording............................................................................................................ 10.9
Waveform Printing............................................................................................................................................ 10.10
Individual Waveforms Printing................................................................................................................ 10.10
All Beds Waveforms Printing.................................................................................................................. 10.10
Starting All Beds Waveforms Printing.......................................................................................... 10.10
Stopping All Beds Waveforms Printing......................................................................................... 10.11
All Beds Alarm Management Printing............................................................................................................... 10.12
Review Recording and Printing........................................................................................................................ 10.12
Automatic Recording........................................................................................................................................ 10.13
Periodic Recording................................................................................................................................. 10.13
Necessary Settings for Periodic Recording.................................................................................. 10.13
Clock Time Periodic Recording.............................................................................................................. 10.13
Necessary Settings for Clock Time Periodic Recording............................................................... 10.13
Alarm Recording.................................................................................................................................... 10.14
Remote Recording............................................................................................................................................ 10.15
Call Recording........................................................................................................................................ 10.15
Necessary Settings for Call Recording........................................................................................ 10.15
Remote Delayed Waveform Recording.................................................................................................. 10.16
Necessary Settings for Remote Delayed Waveform Recording................................................... 10.16
Changing Recording Settings........................................................................................................................... 10.17
Changing Settings on the [Recording] of the Setup Window.................................................................. 10.17
Overview of Reports......................................................................................................................................... 10.18
Report Settings................................................................................................................................................. 10.19
Report Setting on the Setup Window..................................................................................................... 10.19
Printing a Report.............................................................................................................................................. 10.21

Printing a Report in Manual Mode.......................................................................................................... 10.21
Printing a Report in Periodic Mode........................................................................................................ 10.21
Printing Example.................................................................................................................................... 10.22

10. RECORDING
This section explains the types of recording and procedure for recording, printing
and reports and settings of the recording and report.
Overview
Types of Recording and Printing

This central monitor has six types of recording and printing. For details, refer to
“Description of Recording Modes” in this section.
• Manual recording
• Waveform printing
• All beds alarm management printing
• Review recording/printing
• Automatic recording
10
• Remote recording
Recording
Records the data with the WS-960P Recorder Unit that is connected to the
central monitor. The WS-960P Recorder Unit is an option. Touch [ ] to start
recording. It records on 50 mm width recording paper.
Recording may be available from function keys depending on the recording type.
Printing
Prints the data on a printer in the network. Touch [ ] to start printing. Data is
printed on A4 size or letter size paper.
Printing may be available from function keys depending on the printing type.

10. RECORDING
Description of Recording Modes

Following are the recorded data, recording time, how to start recording and
screen or window of each type of recording and printing. For details, refer to
each section.
Manual Recording
How to Start Available Screen/

Recording Type Recorded Data Recording Time
Recording Window
Time set at [Recording]
→ [Recording Time]
Manual recording • Three waveforms that are set → [Manual Recording] [ ] for each
on [Recording] → [Record All screens with [ ]
of the System Setup bed
Wave Selection] of the Setup screen
window.
[Record All] Menu window
• Numerical data at the recording Time of manual
start time [Record All]
All beds recording recording × the number
all beds All Beds screen
of all beds
function key
Waveform Printing

Recording Window
• Waveforms on the Individual
Individual Bed
10 seconds [ ] window of each bed
waveforms printing • Numerical data at the recording
and overview beds
start time
• Waveforms on the Individual [Print All] Menu window
Individual waveforms
All beds waveforms Bed window for all beds [Print All]
printing × the number
printing • Numerical data at the recording all beds All Beds screen
of beds
start time function key
All Beds Alarm Management Printing

Recording Window
All beds alarm Displayed alarm events for all All Beds Alarm
events printing beds Events window
––– [ ]
All beds limits Displayed upper/lower limits for All Beds Limits
printing all beds window

10. RECORDING
Review Recording or Printing

Recording Window
Record [ ]
Trendgraph Displayed trendgraph Displayed time width Trend window
Print [ ]
Tabular Record [ ]
Displayed tabular trend Displayed data Tabular Trend window
trend Print [ ]
Full disclosure Displayed full disclosure Depends on the number [ ]

Full Disclosure
waveform printing waveform of displayed waveforms window
Expanded waveform
Displayed expanded waveform [ ]
window
Caliper measurement
Record Displayed data
Expanded • Displayed expanded waveform [ ]
window on the
waveform • Caliper Expanded waveform
window
• Displayed expanded waveform Depends on the number Expanded waveform
Print [ ]
• Caliper, comment of displayed waveforms window
Record [ ]
Event list Displayed event list Event List window 10
Print [ ]
For the selected (checked) file:

• ST recall waveform –––
Record [ ]
• Numerical data when the file is
ST recall ST Recall window
created
ST recall list of the selected
Print [ ]
(checked) files
Arrhythmia recall waveform of
Record [ ]
the selected (checked) file
Arrhythmia Arrhythmia Recall
• Arrhythmia recall list of the 8 or 10 seconds*
recall window
Print selected (checked) files [ ]
• Caliper, comment
SpO2 trendgraph
Displayed SpO2 trendgraph Displayed time width [ ] SpO2 Trend window
printing
ECG 12 lead Selected ECG 12 lead analysis [ ]
ECG 12 Lead
analysis printing window Analysis window
Hemodynamics list Hemodynamics List
Displayed hemodynamics list ––– [ ]
printing window
Alarm events
Displayed alarm events [ ] Alarm Events window
printing
* Depends on the bedside monitor model.

10. RECORDING
Automatic Recording
Automatic recording starts at the preset time if the preset conditions are met.

Recording Window
• Three waveforms that are set
Periodic recording on [Recording] → [Record
→ [Recording Time] →
Wave Selection] of the Setup
[Periodic Recording]
window
Clock time periodic of the System Setup
• Numerical data at the recording
recording screen
start time Automatically All screens and
• Three waveforms that are set starts windows
on [Recording] → [Record
→ [Recording Time] →
Alarm recording [Alarm/Call Recording]
window
of the System Setup
• Numerical data at the alarm
screen
occurrence
Remote Recording
Remote recording is performed when there is a recording request from a
transmitter.
NOTE
Remote recording is available only at the central monitor where the bed’s
data is saved.
Recording from a Transmitter (call recording)

The recording starts when the CALL button on the transmitter is pressed under
the following conditions.
• When using a transmitter with a bedside monitor that is not connected to a
recording device.
• When receiving data from a transmitter through the multiple patient receiver.

Recording Window
• Three waveforms that are set
on [Recording] → [Record
→ [Recording Time] → CALL
window All screens and
Call recording [Alarm/Call Recording] button on the
• Numerical data of the alarm windows
of the System Setup transmitter
occurred time
screen
• Numerical data of the recording
start time

10. RECORDING
Recording Priority Recorder Unit (WS-960P)

When using the WS-960P Recorder Unit, the following recording priority
applies.
Postponed Canceled
Stop Manual recording • Alarm recording Manual recording on each review window
Recording > (All beds recording) > • Periodic recording
• Call recording
• Manual recording (all beds recording) has the highest priority. If manual
recording starts during other recording, the other recording is canceled.
• During any type of recording, if an equal priority recording occurs, the second
recording is not performed; only the current recording is performed.
• When other recording is performed at the start of alarm, periodic or call
recording, the alarm, periodic or call recording starts after the other recording
stops.
• If a higher priority recording occurs, during call recording, alarm recording
and periodic recording, the current recording changes to standby and is 10
continued after the higher priority recording.
Printer
When printing with the printer there is no priority. All print requests are printed.
Recorded/Printed Data
Numeric data when recording starts or file is
Recording date and created
Bed name Patient name
time or file creation
date and time
Lead and sensitivity
Parameter name and

sensitivity
Recording Recording time Recording speed Recorded

name waveform

10. RECORDING
Record name list
Recording Type Recorded Name

Manual recording Manual Record
Manual
All beds recording All Beds Record
Periodic recording
Periodic Clock time periodic Periodic Record
recording
Vital (parameter name) Alarm Record
Alarm
ST ST (lead name) Alarm Record
Alarm recording
Arrhythmia (arrhythmia name) Alarm Record
Call recording Call Record
Arrhythmia recall recording Arrhythmia Recall Record
ST recall recording ST Recall Record
Expanded waveform
Expanded Waveform Record
Review recording
Trendgraph recording Trend Record
Tabular trend recording Tabular Trend Record
Event list recording Event List Record
Printer (network printer)

10. RECORDING
Manual Recording
Touch [ ] to record the monitoring numeric value and selected waveforms (up
to three channels) with the WS-960P Recorder Unit. When [Record All] is set
to an all beds function key, you can perform manual recording for all monitored
beds on the All Beds screen. Refer to “All Beds Recording” in Section 6.
Manual Recording
Manual recording is available on all screens and windows with the [ ] key.
Displayed numeric values and selected waveforms (up to three channels) are
recorded. For recording example, refer to “Recorded/Printed Data” in this
section.
Necessary Settings for Manual Recording

Set the following settings for each bed on [Recording] of the Setup window.
• Select the parameter of the recording waveform (First Wave, Second Wave and 10
Third Wave) on [Record Wave Selection]. If [NONE] is set, the waveform is
not recorded.
• Set the Record sweep speed (25 mm/s or 50 mm/s) at [Recording Sweep
Speed].


Guide.
Starting Manual Recording

On the Individual Bed window, you can Touch [ ] on the screen or window to start recording. Recording continues for
start manual recording by touching [ ]
the preset recording time.
on the data area of the each bed.
All Beds screen Individual Bed window
To stop recording, touch [ ] again.

10. RECORDING
Waveform Printing
All displayed waveforms and numeric data on the Individual Bed window are
printed on A4 or letter size paper on a network printer. The waveform printing
has individual waveforms printing and all beds waveforms printing.
Individual Waveforms Printing

All displayed 10 seconds of waveforms and numeric data on the Individual Bed
window are printed. For details, refer to “Individual Bed Window Printing” in
Section 8.
All Beds Waveforms Printing

All displayed 10 seconds of waveforms and numeric data on the Individual Bed
window are printed for all beds displayed on the All Beds window. Refer to
“Recorded/Printed Data” in this section for a printing example.
Starting All Beds Waveforms Printing

1. Touch [Menu] on the left lower corner of the screen. The Menu window
opens.
2. Touch [Print All] on the Menu window. The Confirmation window appears.
Or, touch the [Print All] function key to display the Confirmation window
when [Print All] is assigned as a function key. For details on assigning
function keys, refer to “Function Keys Setting” in Section 6-1 of the
1 2
3. Touch [Yes] on the Confirmation window. Printing starts.
To cancel printing, touch [No] on the upper right corner of the window.

10. RECORDING
Stopping All Beds Waveforms Printing

1. Touch [Menu] on the left lower corner of the screen. The Menu window
opens.
2. Touch [Print Stop] on the Menu window. The Confirmation window appears.
Or, touch the [Print Stop] function key to display the Confirmation window
when [Print Stop] is assigned as a function key. For details on assigning
function keys, refer to “Function Keys Setting” in Section 6-1 of the
1 2
3. Touch [Yes] on the Confirmation window. The printing stops.
To continue printing, touch [No] on the upper right corner of the window.
10

10. RECORDING
All Beds Alarm Management Printing
You can print the displayed All Beds Alarm Management window. For details,
refer to “Printing on the All Beds Alarms Window” in Section 7.
Review Recording and Printing
You can record or print the displayed review window. For details, refer to the
following sections.
Review Refer to
Trend Recording the Trendgraph
Printing the Trendgraph
Tabular Trend Recording the Tabular Trend
Printing the Tabular Trend
Full Disclosure Printing the Full Disclosure Waveform
Expanded Waveform Recording the Expanded Waveform
Printing the Expanded Waveform
Event List Recording the Event List
Printing the Event List
ST Recall Recording the Waveform of ST Recall File
Printing the ST Recall Window
Arrhythmia Recall Recording the Waveform of an Arrhythmia Recall
File
Printing the Arrhythmia Recall Window
SpO2 Trend Printing the SpO2 trendgraph
ECG 12 Lead Analysis Printing the ECG 12 Lead Analysis Window
Hemodynamics List Printing the Hemodynamics List
Alarm Events Printing the Alarm Events Window

10. RECORDING
Automatic Recording
Recording starts automatically at the preset recording conditions. There are three
automatic recording modes: periodic recording, clock time periodic recording
and alarm recording. For recording examples, refer to “Recorded/Printed Data”
in this section.
Periodic Recording
The numeric values and selected waveforms of up to three channels are recorded
at the preset intervals with the WS-960P Recorder Unit. Recording stops when
[ ] of the recording bed is touched.
The recording sweep speed is the same as manual recording. Refer to “Necessary
Settings for Manual Recording” in this section.
10
Necessary Settings for Periodic Recording
Set the following settings for each bed on the [Recording] of the Setup window.
• Set the [Periodic Recording] to [Periodic Recording]. The factory default
setting is [OFF].

• Recording time (Periodic Recording)
• Custom interval for periodic recording

Guide.
Clock Time Periodic Recording

The numeric values and selected waveforms of up to three channels are recorded
at the preset time with the WS-960P Recorder Unit. Recording stops when
[ ] of the recording bed is touched.
Necessary Settings for Clock Time Periodic Recording

• Set the [Clock Time Periodic Recording]. The factory default setting is [OFF].

10. RECORDING

• Recording time (Periodic Recording)
• Clock time (master clock time for recording)

Guide.
Alarm Recording
Refer to “Alarm Recording” in Section 5.

10. RECORDING
Remote Recording
There are two types of remote recording; call recording and remote delayed
waveform recording. Call recording is performed when there is a recording
request from a transmitter. Remote delayed waveform recording is performed
when there is a recording request from a bedside monitor.
For recording examples, refer to “Recorded/Printed Data” in this section.
NOTE
For transmitters, remote recording is available only at the central monitor
where the bed’s data is saved. For bedside monitors, remote recording
is available only when the central monitor is specified as the remote
recording destination on the bedside monitor.
Call Recording 10
This recording starts when there is a recording request from a transmitter. The
numeric values and selected waveforms of up to three channels are recorded with
the WS-960P Recorder Unit.
To start recording, press the CALL button on the transmitter. The recorder
automatically stops after the preset recording time.
To stop recording, touch [ ] of the recording bed.
Necessary Settings for Call Recording

• Set [Call Recording] to [ON] at [Alarm Recording]. The factory default setting
is [OFF].

• Recording time (Alarm/Call Recording)

Guide.

10. RECORDING
Remote Delayed Waveform Recording

This recording starts when there is a recording request from a bedside monitor.
The waveform and numerical data displayed on the bedside monitor is recorded
with the WS-960P Recorder Unit.
To start recording, press the key with the print function on the bedside monitor.
The recorder automatically stops after the preset recording time.
You can manually stop recording by touching [ ] of the recording bed when
the bedside monitor is being monitored by the central monitor.
Necessary Settings for Remote Delayed Waveform Recording

On the bedside monitor, specify the central monitor as the recording destination
and select the waveform to be recorded. For details, refer to the Administrator’s
Guide of the bedside monitor.

10. RECORDING
Changing Recording Settings
You can change recording settings on the [Recording] of the Setup window.

• Periodic recording interval (1 to 1440 min)
• Clock time (master clock time for recording)

Guide.
Changing Settings on the [Recording] of the Setup Window 10

To display the Recording window:
1. Touch the data area of the bed you want to change settings for.
3. Touch [Recording] of [Other Setup] on the Setup Menu. The Recording

window opens.
You can display the Recording window by touching the [Recording]

individual function key if Recording is registered to an individual function
key. For setting individual function keys, refer to “Changing the All Beds
Screen Display Settings” in Section 6.
4. Set the following recording settings for each bed.

10. RECORDING
Recording settings on the Setup window

Record Wave Selection First Wave to Third Select from monitoring Set the parameter to record the waveform.
Wave waveforms
Alarm Recording Alarm Limits ON, OFF Select whether or not to perform alarm
[Recording] on Setup Window
Recording recording when an alarm occurs.

Arrhythmia Record
NOTE
Call Recording Call recording is only available when
receiving data from a transmitter that has a
Call button.
Periodic Recording OFF, Periodic Select whether or not to perform periodic
Recording, Clock Time recording and clock time periodic recording.
Periodic Recording Touch [Change] to display the setting window
and select the time to record.
Recording Sweep Speed 25 mm/s, 50 mm/s Set the recording sweep speed.
Overview of Reports
The central monitor can print review data for a patient as a report. Reports are
printed on a printer in the network. Report printing has manual and periodic
modes.
NOTE
The periodic mode is only for beds whose data is saved in this central
monitor. A bed whose data is not saved in this central monitor is fixed to
manual mode.
• Manual: You can print the past review data (already saved data) as a report.
• Periodic: Automatically prints the report at periodic intervals.

10. RECORDING
Report Settings
Before printing a report, set the report settings on the [Report] of the Setup
window.

• Trend display (Trend 1 to 3 and Common Scale)
• Tabular trend display (Vital Sign 1 to 4, NIBP)
• Full disclosure display (Single Wave, ECG 12 Lead, All Waves)
• Expanded wave display (Single Wave, ECG 12 Lead, All Waves)
• Alarm event display (Limit + Tech, Arrhy + Tech)
• ST recall interval (1, 5, 10, 30, 60 min)
• Arrhythmia (each arrhythmia, All)
• Event list (Arrhythmia, Limit, Technical, System, Caliper, Comment, All)
For the settings, refer to “Report” in Section 6-1 of the Administrator’s Guide.
10
Report Setting on the Setup Window

1. Touch the data area of the bed you want to change settings for.
3. Touch [Other Setup] → [Report] of the Setup Menu. The Report window
opens.
When [Report] is assigned to one of the individual function keys, the Report
window can be displayed by touching the function key. For setting individual
Section 6.

10. RECORDING
4. Set the following report settings for each bed.
Report settings on the Setup window
Setting Item Setting Range Description

Report Mode Manual, Periodic Set the report mode.
• Manual: Prints the report in manual mode.
• Periodic: Prints the report in auto mode
Manual Saved Data Display only Displays the time range of the data saved in this central
mode Range monitor.
Print Start Time Enter the report printing Set the print start and end time in manual mode. Touch each
start time item to display the setting window and set the item. On the
setting window, touch date and enter time with the numeric
keypad.
Print End Time Enter the report printing
end time
You can set the print start time and print end time by
touching the time axis. Set the print start time by touching
the time axis once. Set the print end time by touching the
time axis again. To clear the setting, touch the time axis
[Report] on Setup Window
again.
Periodic Report Interval 1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours, 8 Set the interval to print the report in auto mode.
mode hours, 12 hours, 24 hours
Print Start Time Enter the report printing Set the time to print the report first in auto mode. Touch
start time [Print Start Time] to display the input window and enter the
time.
You can set the print start time by touching the time axis.
Report Items Trend, Tabular Trend, Touch and select review items to print on the report.
Full Disclosure,
Expanded Waveform,
Arrhythmia Recall, ST
Recall, Hemodynamics
List, ECG 12 Lead
Analysis, Event List,
Alarm Events
Nurse Notes Up to 500 characters, Set the nurse notes to print on the report. Touch [ ] to
up to 11 lines when display the input window, then enter the notes.
inserting the line
Touch [Save] to register the input notes as a template. Touch
[Recall] to recall the registered notes.

10. RECORDING
Printing a Report
Check the settings to create a report. The Nurse Notes are not printed if the notes
are entered beforehand. In periodic mode, the report is automatically printed at
the set intervals. Refer to “Report Settings” in this section.
Printing a Report in Manual Mode

Check the settings on the Report window and touch [Print] to print a report.
Refer to “Report Setting on the Setup Window” in this section.
10
To stop printing, touch [Print Stop].
Printing a Report in Periodic Mode

Check the settings on the Report window and touch [Print] to print a report.
Refer to “Report Setting on the Setup Window” in this section.
NOTE
If [Print] is not touched after setting the items, periodic printing cannot be
performed.
To stop printing, touch [Print Stop] or change the mode to manual mode.

10. RECORDING
Printing Example

Section 11 Overview Bed Window
About the Overview Bed Window....................................................................................................................... 11.2

Displaying the Overview Bed Window and Selecting the Overview Bed............................................................ 11.3
Recording and Printing the Overview Bed Data....................................................................................... 11.4
11

11. OVERVIEW BED WINDOW
This section explains how to display the Overview Bed window and recording
and printing on the window.
About the Overview Bed Window
If you want to temporarily monitor a bed which is not a monitored bed on this
central monitor, you can monitor it on the Overview Bed window. The Overview
Bed window has almost the same display items as the monitored bed. You can
select one overview bed from up to 300 bedside monitors in the network.
NOTE
On the Overview Bed window, alarms are not displayed even if the
Individual Waveforms window is displayed. If you want to monitor the
alarms of the bed, set the bed as a monitored bed.
Available Items Overview Bed Monitored Bed

Individual waveforms
Individual bed windows Individual numeric vital
signs
Trendgraph
Tabular trend
Full disclosure
Expanded waveform
Event list
Yes
Review windows ST recall
Arrhythmia recall
SpO2 trendgraph
ECG 12 lead analysis
Hemodynamics
Alarm events Yes
Patient information
(display only)
Personal setup
Admit/discharge
Alarm settings
No
Parameter settings
All beds screen setup
Individual bed window
Yes
setup
Other setup Parameter priority settings No
Recording settings (Record
Yes
Wave setting only)
Report settings No
Recording, printing Refer to Section 10.

Displaying the Overview Bed Window and Selecting the

Overview Bed
1. Touch [Menu] on the left lower corner of the screen → [Overview] to

display the Overview bed window.
When [Overview] is assigned to one of the all beds function keys, the
Overview bed window can be displayed by touching the function key. Refer
2. Select the bed.
The Individual Bed window of the overview bed is displayed. For the screen
operation, refer to each item.
Scrolls the list up and down
11
with [ ] and [ ] keys.
Group name Bed Name Patient Name Physician
Sort
• Group: Sort by group.
• Bed Name: Sort by bed name.
• Patient Name: Sort by patient name.
• Physician: Sort by physician.
Up to 16 patients who can be overviewed are listed on one page.

Touch the patient to display the Overview Bed window for that
patient.

Group name/Bed name

Receiving channel*/Transmitter battery status icon*
Overview bed list * Only available for beds connected through the
Changes to the Overview Bed List ORG-9100 series multiple patient receiver.
window. Patient name Window title

When you touch inside the frame
for a bed, the Individual Bed
window for the touched bed is
displayed.
Records or prints the displayed window.
Displays each screen.

When [ ] is touched and display the Setup Menu,
only [Admit/Discharge], [Individual Bed Screen
Setup] and [Recording] can be selected.
When the [Review] is touched on the Overview Bed window when the window
other than review window is displayed, the display pattern is “Custom Review”.
Refer to the “Displaying the Review Window” in Section 9.
NOTE
When the overview bed data is not saved in CNS-6201, event list and
alarm events data cannot be displayed.
Recording and Printing the Overview Bed Data

On the Overview Bed window, displayed Individual Bed window and review
windows can be recorded or printed.
NOTE
• Reports cannot be printed.
• All beds recording, automatic recording and remote recording cannot
be performed.

Section 12 Parameter Setup
Overview of Parameter Setup............................................................................................................................. 12.2

Displaying Each Parameter Setup Window.............................................................................................. 12.2
ECG Settings...................................................................................................................................................... 12.4
Main Settings............................................................................................................................................ 12.4
Learning ECG.......................................................................................................................................... 12.5
Setting Arrhythmia Alarms........................................................................................................................ 12.5
Setting ST Alarms.................................................................................................................................... 12.5
Arrhythmia Analysis Setting..................................................................................................................... 12.5
ST Point Settings...................................................................................................................................... 12.9
QTc/QRSd Settings................................................................................................................................ 12.10
Other Settings........................................................................................................................................ 12.11
RESP Settings.................................................................................................................................................. 12.15
Main Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 12.15
Display Settings...................................................................................................................................... 12.16
Other Settings........................................................................................................................................ 12.16 12
SpO2 Settings................................................................................................................................................... 12.17
Main Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 12.17
NIBP Settings................................................................................................................................................... 12.18
Main Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 12.18
PRESS Settings............................................................................................................................................... 12.21
Main Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 12.21
Label Name List........................................................................................................................... 12.23
Other Settings........................................................................................................................................ 12.23
TEMP Settings.................................................................................................................................................. 12.24
Main Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 12.24
Label Name List........................................................................................................................... 12.25
Anesthesia Gas Settings.................................................................................................................................. 12.26

12. PARAMETER SETUP
This section explains about each parameter settings for each bed.
Overview of Parameter Setup
On the Parameter Setup window, set the ECG, RESP, SpO2, NIBP, PRESS,
TEMP and anesthesia gas settings.
Displaying Each Parameter Setup Window

The procedure to display the parameter setting window is the same for all
parameters.
1. Touch the data area of the bed you want to set the settings for. The Individual
Bed window appears.
3. Touch a parameter key under Parameter Setup to display the setting window
for the parameter.
Example: ECG

12. PARAMETER SETUP
You can also display the Parameter Setup windows by the following operation.
• On the Individual Bed window, touch the parameter you want to display the
setting window for.
• Touch the parameter individual function key if the parameter is registered
to an individual function key. For setting individual function keys, refer to
“Changing the All Beds Screen Display Settings” in Section 6.
12

12. PARAMETER SETUP
ECG Settings
On the Setup Menu of the Individual Bed window, touch [ECG] to display the
ECG window.
1
The ECG window has six tabs. Touch the tab of the category name to switch to
another category.
• Main
• Arrhythmia Alarm
• ST Alarm
• Arrhythmia Analysis Setting
2 • ST Point
3
• Other
Main Settings
The upper half of the window shows the first ECG trace and measurement
information. You can also change the sensitivity or learn ECG. The lower half of
the window shows the upper and lower alarm limits of the HR (Heart Rate). You
can set the HR upper/lower limit.
ECG
ECG set at [Arrhythmia Detection Lead 1] is [Learn ECG]
displayed. You can change the sensitivity by Touch to relearn ECG. Refer to
touching the waveform. Section 12.
Sens/Scale window
Touch to change
sensitivity. The
sensitivity setting is
synchronized with All
Beds screen display and
setting.
Measurement information
For beds connected through an
ORG-9100 series multiple patient
receiver, the current ECG settings
(filter, analysis, QRS detection type
and pacing) are displayed.
Current heart rate
Heart rate trendgraph

of the past four hours
HR alarm limits setting Pacing mark display

The setting procedure is the same as on the Alarm Limits When the pacing waveform is
window of the Personal Setup. Refer to Section 5. monitored, the pacing mark is
indicated on the waveform on the
Main window if the [Detection] or
[Mark] setting is set to [OFF].

12. PARAMETER SETUP
Learning ECG
If there is any doubt about the arrhythmia analysis result, relearn the dominant
ECG. During ECG learning, the “LEARNING” message appears on the screen.
CAUTION
If there is any doubt about the arrhythmia analysis, make the monitor
relearn the patient’s ECG and check that the dominant QRS is
appropriate. Otherwise, an important arrhythmia may be overlooked.
NOTE
• When you touch [Learn ECG] at the central monitor, the command is
sent to the bedside monitor and the bedside monitor relearns ECG.
• Some bedside monitor models automatically relearn ECG whenever the
pattern of normal ECG changes.
Setting Arrhythmia Alarms

Sets the arrhythmia alarms. Touch [Arrhythmia Alarm] to change the window.
The setting procedure is the same as on the Arrhythmia Alarm window of the
Personal Setup. Refer to Section 5. 12
Setting ST Alarms
Sets the ST alarms. Touch [ST Alarm] to change the window. The setting
procedure is the same as on the ST Alarm window of the Personal Setup. Refer
to Section 5.
Arrhythmia Analysis Setting

This setting is only available when the bed is monitored through the
ORG-9100 series multiple patient receiver or when the monitored bed is a vital
sign telemeter.
Sets the arrhythmia analysis settings. Touch [Arrhythmia Analysis Setting] to

change the window.

12. PARAMETER SETUP

Arrhythmia Analysis ON, OFF Set arrhythmia analysis on or off. Touch [ON] or [OFF] in [Arrhythmia
Analysis]. When you set the arrhythmia analysis to off, the “Arrhythmia
Analysis Off” message is displayed.
WARNING
For arrhythmia monitoring, set [Arrhythmia Analysis] on the ECG
window to [ON]. Otherwise, there is no sound or indication for
arrhythmia alarms (except for ASYSTOLE).
WARNING
It is not possible to obtain 100% accurate detection of every
arrhythmia.
WARNING
The monitor requires a minimum of 2 minutes of continuous
analysis before A-FIB can be detected. Detection may take up to
2.5 minutes.
NOTE
When arrhythmia analysis is set to OFF, the following operations for
arrhythmia analysis are not performed.
• Display of VPC count and ST measurement value
• Generating arrhythmia alarms
• Creating arrhythmia recall files
• Arrhythmia alarm recording
• Creating ST recall files
• Learning ECG waveform
Analysis Mode Single, Multi When [Arrhythmia Analysis] is set to [ON], you can set the analysis lead.
Touch Single (one lead analysis) or Multi (2 lead analysis).

12. PARAMETER SETUP

Arrhythmia Detection I, II, III, aVR, Touch to set the ECG lead for each analysis.
Lead 1 aVL, aVF, V1
to V6, V, MCL, The set analysis lead is synchronized with displayed waveform depending on
Arrhythmia Detection ECG1, ECG2 the All Beds screen and Individual Bed window setting. But when the [AUTO
Lead 2 LEAD CHANGE] is set to [ON], the lead is not synchronized. Refer to
“Changing the All Beds Screen Display Settings” in Section 6, “Changing the
Individual Bed Window Display Settings” in Section 8 and “Other Settings”
in this section.
Optimum Lead
NOTE
Follow the physician’s instructions for lead position when available.
It is generally considered that Lead II and Lead V1 are suitable for arrhythmia
monitoring and that Lead V4 and Lead V5 are suitable for myocardial
ischemia monitoring.
Some types of ECGs are difficult for automatic analysis, and heart rate or
arrhythmia detection level is not accurate for some patients. In these cases, use
the following procedure to find the appropriate lead for automatic analysis.
1. Measure the patient’s ECG with the standard 12 ECG leads using an ECG
instrument.
2. Select the optimum lead according to the following guidelines: 12
i) Select the lead with the highest QRS wave amplitude and least
difference in amplitude compared with a VPC or pacing pulse.
0.5 ≤ QRS1/QRS2 ≤ 2
ii) Select the lead with less than 0.2 mV amplitude of the P-wave.
P ≤ 0.2 mV
iii) Select the lead with a T-wave amplitude which is less than one-third
of the QRS wave.
T1 ≤ 1/3QRS1, T2 ≤ 1/3QRS2
QRS1
P T1 T2
QRS2

12. PARAMETER SETUP

QRS QRS Adult, Child, Set the QRS detection type. Touch [Adult], [Child] or [Neonate] in QRS
Detection Detection Neonate Detection Type.
Sensitivity Type
CAUTION
At the start of ECG monitoring, check that the correct patient type
is set for QRS Detection Type. If an inappropriate patient type is
set, heart rate cannot be counted accurately and noise or P
waves may be counted as QRS and cardiac arrest may be
overlooked.
NOTE
When [Adult] or [Neonate] is selected, QRS Detection Sensitivity
setting is not displayed.
The following table shows the difference of each QRS detection type.
QRS Detection Setting

Items
Adult Child Neonate
Detection of thin QRS Not available Available Available
QRS detection Same as the
Automatic Automatic
sensitivity setting Sensitivity
sensitivity sensitivity
setting*
* When QRS is narrow, the QRS detection sensitivity is not the same as the
Sensitivity setting.
When [Match QRS Sens to ORG] → [System Configuration] on the System

Setup screen is set to [ON], the display sensitivity and detection sensitivity are
synchronized. Refer to “System Configuration Settings” in Section 6-1 of the
When [Discharge] or [Delete Data] is performed, the setting of the QRS

detection type is the setting of Alarm Master 1.
Sensitivity ×1/4, ×1/2, ×3/4, When [QRS Detection Type] is set to [Child] and heart rate counting is
×1, ×3/2, ×2, ×4 incorrect because the ECG waveform is too large or small, change the QRS
detection sensitivity.
• For too large ECG: Select lower sensitivity.
• For too small ECG: Select higher sensitivity.

12. PARAMETER SETUP
ST Point Settings
This setting is only available for beds connected through an ORG-9100 series
multiple patient receiver.
Set the ST analysis point (ISO point and ST point). Based on the QRS wave
position (R point), set the time from the position as ISO (Isolation) point and ST
point. The ST value is measured according to the set value.
ST waveform sensitivity key

Touch to change the sensitivity
of ST waveform.
Time from the

current R point
Touch [ ▲ ] or [ ▼ ] to
set each value. One touch
increases or decreases the
value by 4 ms.
12
Time from the
current R point
[Reset] [Apply]
Returns to the Set the setting value and
R default setting. apply to the ST analysis.
Setting range and default setting

T
P Item Setting Range Steps Factory Default Setting Unit
ISO point 0 to 248 4 80
Q ms
Isolation Point S ST Point ST point 0 to 340 4 108

12. PARAMETER SETUP
QTc/QRSd Settings
Sets the QTc and QRSd measurement settings. Touch [QTc/QRSd] to change the
window.

QTc Display ON, OFF Set whether or not to display QTc measurement value. Touch
[ON] or [OFF].
QRSd Display ON, OFF Set whether or not to display QRSd measurement value. Touch
[ON] or [OFF].
QTc/QRSd Lead* ALL, TRACE1, I, II, III, Select the lead to be used for QTc/QRSd measurement. (For
aVR, aVL, aVF, V1, V2, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5 and V6, only the currently used leads are
V3, V4, V5, V6 available.)
* Only available for vital sign telemeters. This setting is not available when the
monitored bed is a bedside monitor or when monitoring a bed through a
ORG-9100 series multiple patient receiver.

12. PARAMETER SETUP
Other Settings
Sets the detailed settings for ECG. Touch [Other] to change the window.
12

12. PARAMETER SETUP

PACING Detection* ON, OFF Select whether or not to reject a pacemaker spike from the heart
rate count. Touch [ON] or [OFF] in [Detection].
When the patient has an implanted cardiac pacemaker, the

pacing pulse may be counted as QRS and the heart rate may be
miscounted. The pacing pulse is a very small wave which cannot
be displayed on the monitor. When pacing spike detection is set
to ON, the pacemaker spikes are rejected which allows correct
heart rate counting.
WARNING
Turn the pacing pulse detection* to [ON] when
monitoring a pacemaker patient. Otherwise the
pacemaker pulse is not rejected. However, even when
the pacing pulse detection is set to [ON], the
pacemaker pulse might not be rejected. When the
pacemaker pulse is not rejected, the pacemaker pulse
is detected as QRS and false heart rate may be
indicated or critical arrhythmia such as asystole may
be overlooked. Keep pacemaker patients under close
observation.
* For the pacemaker pulse rejection capability, refer to the

operator’s manual of the monitor.
WARNING
Even when the pacing pulse detection is set to [ON],
the pacemaker pulse can be overlooked or detected
as QRS. You cannot confirm the pacemaker operation
only from the detected pacemaker pulse.
NOTE
When you monitor a premature baby or infant and the
monitor miscounts the narrow width QRS, set this to [OFF].
Mark* ON, OFF Set whether or not to display pacing marks on the ECG
waveform. Touch [ON] or [OFF] in [Mark].
Hum Filter ON, OFF Set the hum filter on or off. Set to [ON] when there is a lot of AC
hum interference from the use of an electrosurgical unit or other
instrument. Touch [ON] or [OFF] in [Hum Filter].
* If the pacing pulse is detected, pacing marks are indicated on waveform of the Main page of the ECG window if the
[Detection] and [Mark] in PACING are set to [OFF].

12. PARAMETER SETUP

AUTO LEAD CHANGE ON, OFF This setting is only available for beds connected through an
ORG-9100 series multiple patient receiver.
Select whether or not to change the lead automatically. Touch

[ON] or [OFF] in [AUTO LEAD CHANGE].
AUTO LEAD CHANGE

When set to [ON], the analysis leads 1 and 2 automatically
change to stable leads when there is an electrode detachment
on the analysis lead. When the analysis leads become stable
again, the analysis leads change back to the original leads.
When analysis lead 1 changes automatically, the “AUTO LEAD
CHANGE” message is displayed, but when there is a message
of a higher priority, this message is not displayed. When analysis
lead 2 changes automatically, no message is displayed.
ECG Measurement ON, OFF This setting is only available for vital sign telemeters or beds
connected through an ORG-9100 series multiple patient receiver.
CAUTION
When the [ECG Measurement] is [OFF], ECG alarms
do not occur even if each ECG alarm item is set to
[ON].
NOTE 12
• This setting cannot be set to [OFF] while ECG is being
monitored.
• When [ECG Measurement] is set to [OFF] at the central
monitor when ECG monitoring starts at the monitoring
device (bedside monitor, transmitter, etc.), ECG
measurement automatically turns to [ON] at the central
monitor. If ECG does not appear on the screen in 10
seconds, manually turn it to [ON].
• After setting [ECG Measurement] to [ON], confirm that
ECG is displayed on the screen.
• When a transmitter which can set the ECG measurement
[ON] or [OFF] is used and the ECG measurement is
turned OFF at the transmitter, the ECG measurement
automatically turns OFF and cannot be set to ON.
This setting turns ECG measurement ON or OFF.

ON: ECG waveforms and numeric data of the ECG related
parameters are displayed on the screen. ECG related
alarms can be generated.
OFF: ECG waveform and numeric data of the ECG related
parameters are not displayed on the screen. ECG settings
other than this settings are not available. PR alarm
automatically turns to ON.

12. PARAMETER SETUP

ECG Leads Limb Lead, I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, This setting is only available for beds connected through an
Chest Lead V1 to V6, V, MCL, ECG1, ORG-9100 series multiple patient receiver.
ECG2
Select the ECG lead name to be displayed on the screen.
NOTE
This setting only changes the lead name displayed on the
screen. It does not change the ECG lead measured at
transmitters or bedside monitors. This setting can only be
set when receiving from a transmitter without lead switching
function.
ECG Filter OFF, ON, Maximum, This setting is only available when a vital sign telemeter is used.
Monitor, ST, Diagnosis Select the ECG filter to be applied.
OFF: This mode is best for viewing the details of the

waveform. It is similar to the real ECG.
ON: Not used.
Maximum: Applies the drift-free filter and high cut filter. Select
when hum interference is high, or when using an
ESU.
Monitor: Applies the low cut filter and high cut filter.
ST: Not used.
Diagnosis: Not used.

12. PARAMETER SETUP
RESP Settings
On the Setup Menu of the Individual Bed window, touch [RESP] to display the
RESP window.
1
The RESP window has three tabs. Touch the tab of the category name to switch
to another category.
• Main
• Display Settings
• Other
2
3
Main Settings
The upper half of the window shows the respiration curve and measurement
information. You can change the sensitivity. Touch the respiration parameter tab
to change the window. The lower half of the window (RR tab only) shows the
upper and lower alarm limits of the RR (Respiration Rate). You can set the RR
upper/lower limit. 12
Respiration curve
Displays respiration waveform. You can change
the sensitivity by touching the waveform.
Sens/Scale window
Touch to change
sensitivity. The
sensitivity setting is
synchronized with All
Beds screen display and
setting.
Respiration parameter tab

Touch to display the waveform of
the parameter. Parameters that are
not monitored are not available.
Current RESP setting is
displayed.
Current respiration rate
Respiration rate
trendgraph of the
past four hours
RR alarm limits setting

The setting procedure is the same as on the Alarm Limits
window of the Personal Setup. Refer to Section 5.

12. PARAMETER SETUP
Display Settings
Sets the RESP display settings. Touch [Display Settings] to change the window.

RR Display RR*, RR (IMP), RR (THM), RR (CO2), Set the setting when displaying values other than RR
RR (FLOW), RR (EXT), RR (GAS) representative values on the screen. Selected label is
* RR representative value displayed.
Other Settings
Sets other RESP settings. Touch [Other] to change the window.

Sensitivity ×1/4, ×1/2, ×3/4, When respiration counting is incorrect because the respiration waveform is too large or
×1, ×3/2, ×2, ×4 small, change the detection sensitivity.
• For too large respiration waveform: Select smaller sensitivity
• For too small respiration waveform: Select larger sensitivity
The display sensitivity of respiration curve on the All Beds screen and Individual Bed
window is not synchronized with this respiration detection sensitivity setting.
Impedance ON, OFF
Respiration CAUTION
Measurement When measuring respiration by impedance method and [Impedance
Respiration Measurement] on the RESP window is set to [OFF],
respiration alarms do not occur even if each respiration alarm item is set
to [ON].
NOTE
Respiration settings are only available while measuring respiration.
Set whether or not to use impedance method respiration measurement. Touch [ON] or
[OFF] to change the setting.

12. PARAMETER SETUP
SpO2 Settings
On the Setup Menu of the Individual Bed window, touch [SpO2] to display the
SpO2 window.
1
The SpO2 window has one tab.
• Main
3
2
Main Settings
The upper half of the window shows the SpO2 or SpO2-2 waveform and
measurement information. You can change the sensitivity. Touch the SpO2 or
SpO2-2 tab to change the window. The lower half of the window shows the upper
and lower alarm limits of the SpO2 or SpO2-2. You can set the upper/lower limit.
12
SpO2 waveform
Displays the SpO2 or SpO2-2 waveform. You can change the
sensitivity by touching the waveform.
Sens/Scale window
Touch to change sensitivity.
The sensitivity setting is
synchronized with All Beds
screen display and Individual
Bed window setting.
SpO2 and SpO2-2 tab

Touch to display the waveform
and alarm limits of the SpO2,
SpO2-2 or Delta SpO2. SpO2-2 and
Delta SpO2 tabs are not available
if they are not monitored.
Current SpO2 or SpO2-2
setting is displayed.
Current SpO2 value
SpO2 trendgraph of the

past four hours
SpO2 alarm limits setting


12. PARAMETER SETUP
NIBP Settings
On the Setup Menu of the Individual Bed window, touch [NIBP] to display the
NIBP window.
1
The NIBP window has one tab.
• Main
3 2
Main Settings
The upper half of the window shows the Measurement Interval, NIBP
Measurement START and STOP key, and Connected Cuff type. The lower half of
the window shows the upper and lower alarm limits of the NIBP. You can set the
upper/lower limit of SYS, DIA and MAP.
You can start or stop NIBP masurement by the touching the [NIBP Measurement]
individual function key if the [NIBP Measurement] is registered to an individual
function key. For setting individual function keys, refer to “Changing the All
Beds Screen Display Settings” in Section 6.

12. PARAMETER SETUP
CAUTION
Before you remotely start and stop NIBP measurement from the
central monitor, confirm the state of the patient at the bedside monitor.
Carefully start and stop NIBP measurement from the central monitor.
Start measurement
Touch [START] to start NIBP measurement. A confirmation window is
displayed. Touch [YES] to start measurement.
Stop measurement
To stop measurement during NIBP measurement, touch [STOP]. For
When an interval is set, the interval measurement, only the current measurement stops.
measurement continues at the interval
until [Manual] is set. NOTE: When the bedside monitor is connected to the network
through QI-910R interface, you cannot stop the monitoring from the
central monitor. Stop monitoring on the bedside monitor.
Type of cuff that is

connected to the
bedside monitor
Measurement Interval
Touch to change the
interval. 12
Current NIBP value

(SYS/DIA/MAP)
NIBP trendgraph of
the past four hours
NIBP alarm limits setting

12. PARAMETER SETUP

Measurement Manual, STAT,
Interval 1 min, 2 min, WARNING
2.5 min, 5 min, When performing long term measurement at intervals less than 2.5
10 min, 15 min,
minutes, perform measurements while observing the state of the patient,
30 min, 60 min,
2 hours, 4 hours, blood vessels and limb to ensure adequate circulation. Congestion may
8 hours occur at the measurement site. When performing periodic measurement
for a long time, periodically check the circulation condition.
Sets the measurement interval of the NIBP measurement. The connected cuff and
setting keys are displayed on the screen.
Manual: Perform single measurement. If the measurement finishes, the
individual bed window appears.
STAT: Continuously repeat measurements for 15 minutes.
(Specific interval): Intervals selectable at the bedside monitor appear in [Measurement
Interval]. Perform measurements at the selected interval.
When setting the measurement interval to 2.5 min or less, a confirmation message is
displayed. Check the message and touch [YES].
If one measurement takes a long period of time in auto measurement when measured
at intervals of less than 2.5 minutes, the next measurement may be canceled.

12. PARAMETER SETUP
PRESS Settings
On the Setup Menu of the Individual Bed window, touch [PRESS] to display the
PRESS window.
1
The PRESS window has three tabs. Touch the tab of the category name to switch
to another category.
• Main
• Other
3 2
Main Settings
The upper half of the window shows the blood pressure waveform of each blood
pressure label and measurement information. You can change the scale. The
lower half of the window shows the upper and lower alarm limits of each blood
pressure label. You can set the upper/lower limit.
12
Blood pressure waveform

Displays the blood pressure waveform of the selected blood
pressure line (label). You can change the scale by touching
the waveform.
Sens/Scale window
Touch to change sensitivity.
The sensitivity setting is
synchronized with All Beds
screen display and Individual
Bed window setting.
Press label tab

Touch to display the waveform
of the label. You cannot select
the label that is not monitored.
Displays the current PRESS settings.
Current PRESS value

(SYS/DIA/MEAN)
Blood pressure
trendgraph of the past
four hours
PRESS alarm limits setting


12. PARAMETER SETUP
Display Settings
Sets the settings for PRESS label and display. Touch [Display Settings] to change
the window.

Label Name/ Label Name Refer to the This setting is only available for beds connected through an
Display Pattern “Label Name ORG-9100 series multiple patient receiver.
List” on the next
page. Set the label name for each blood pressure measurement site.
Touch the label name key. The label selection window opens. Touch
the desired label.
Display Pattern S/D/M, MEAN Select the display style for each label. Touch the key to change the
setting.
• S/D/M: systolic/diastolic/mean
• Mean
BP Scale Separate, Set the scale display mode of the blood pressure waveform.
Common, High/ • Separate: Waveforms are displayed separately on
Low Pressure different scales.
• Common: Waveforms are displayed on the same scale.
• High/Low Pressure: Waveforms are separated into high and low
pressures.
PPV/SPV PPV, SPV, OFF Select whether to display PPV or SPV when [All Beds Screen Setup]
or [Individual Bed Screen Setup] → [Numerical Selection] is set to
Auto.
CPP ON, OFF Select whether to display CPP when [All Beds Screen Setup] or
[Individual Bed Screen Setup] → [Numerical Selection] is set to
Auto.

12. PARAMETER SETUP
Label Name List
Blood Pressure Blood Pressure Line

Label Name
Measurement Site Setting
ART Arterial Pressure You can set up to 2 lines
(ART, ART2)
RAD Radial Artery Pressure —
DORS Dorsal Artery Pressure —
AO Aortic Pressure —
FEM Femoral Artery Pressure —
UA Umbilical Artery Pressure —
UV Umbilical Vein Pressure —
PAP Pulmonary Artery Pressure —
CVP Central Venous Pressure —
RAP Right Atrial Pressure —
RVP Right Ventricular Pressure —
LAP Left Atrial Pressure —
LVP Left Ventricular Pressure —
P Others You can set up to 3 lines
(P1 to P3)
ICP Intracranial Pressure You can set up to 4 lines
(ICP, ICP2 to ICP4)
12
Other Settings
This setting is only available for beds that are monitored through an ORG-9100
multiple patient receiver which accepts the arterial pressure detection sensitivity
setting.
Touch [Other] to change the window.

Arterial Pressure Detection Adult/Child, Set the detection sensitivity of the arterial pressure to measure the
Sensitivity Neonate pulse rate. Select [Adult/Child] or [Neonate] according to the patient.

12. PARAMETER SETUP
TEMP Settings
On the Setup Menu of the Individual Bed window, touch [TEMP] to display the
TEMP window.
1
The TEMP window has two tabs. Touch the tab of the category name to switch to
another category.
• Main
3 2
Main Settings
The upper and lower alarm limits of each temperature are displayed. You can set
the upper/lower limit.
TEMP label tab

Touch to display the alarm
limits of the label. You cannot
select the label that is not
monitored.
Current TEMP value
Temperature trendgraph
of the past four hours
TEMP alarm limits setting


12. PARAMETER SETUP
Display Settings
This setting is only available for a bed that is monitored through an ORG-9100
Sets the settings for TEMP label and ∆T calculation formula. Touch [Display
Settings] to change the window.
Item Settings Description 12

Label Name Refer to the following This setting is only available for a bed that is monitored through the
label name list. ORG-9100 multiple patient receiver.
Set the label name of the temperature measurement part.
Touch the desired label name key. The label select window opens.
Touch the label to set.
Delta T T1 (label name) - T2 Select the calculation formula to display as ∆T.
(label name), T2
(label name) - T1
(label name)
Label Name List
Label Name Temperature Measurement Part

Tb Blood temperature
Tskin Skin temperature
Up to 3 sites can be set. (Tskin, Tskin2, Tskin3)
Trect Rectum temperature
Tcore Core temperature
Tnaso Nasal cavity temperature
Teso Esophagus temperature
Ttymp Tympanic membrane temperature
Tblad Bladder temperature
Taxil Axillary temperature
T Others (T1 to T8)

12. PARAMETER SETUP
Anesthesia Gas Settings
On the Setup Menu of the Individual Bed window, touch [Anesthesia Gas] to
display the Anesthesia Gas window.
1
The Anesthesia Gas window has one tab.
2
3
Display Settings
Sets the display settings for anesthesia gas.

Waves CO2 (GAS), O2 (GAS), Select the parameter to display the waveform when [All Beds
N2O (GAS), GAS1, Screen Setup] or [Individual Bed Screen Setup] → [Wave
FLOW (GAS), Paw (GAS), Selection] → [Display Settings] is set to Auto, Auto + 1 ECG or
GAS2 Auto + 2 ECG. Touch the parameter to display.
Numeric Data ETCO2 (GAS), CO2 (I) (GAS), Select the parameter to display the numeric values when [All Beds
N2O (E) (GAS), N2O (I) (GAS), Screen Setup] or [Individual Bed Screen Setup] → [Numerical
O2 (E) (GAS), O2 (I) (GAS), Selection] is set to Auto.
HAL (E) (GAS), HAL(I) (GAS), Touch the parameter to display.
ISO (E) (GAS), ISO (I) (GAS),
ENF (E) (GAS), ENF (I) (GAS),
DES (E) (GAS), DES (I) (GAS),
SEV (E) (GAS), SEV (I) (GAS)

Section 13 System Setup Screen
Overview of the System Setup Screen............................................................................................................... 13.2

Displaying the System Setup Screen....................................................................................................... 13.3
Sound Control..................................................................................................................................................... 13.4
Alarm........................................................................................................................................................ 13.4
Sync Sound.............................................................................................................................................. 13.4
13

13. SYSTEM SETUP SCREEN
On the System Setup screen, you can set settings that affect the system.
Overview of the System Setup Screen
The System Setup screen has the following settings.
NOTE
The shaded settings need an administrator password to access. These
settings can only be entered or changed by authorized personnel.
Setting Window Setting Items Refer to

Sound Control Alarm sound volume, QRS sound settings (on or off, tone,
Section 13
current bed, volume)
Recording Recording time, Recording start position, Manual recording
mode, Periodic recording interval, Clock time
Report Review window items for report printing
System Configuration Composition of the central monitor (system, alarm and alarm
events)
Monitor Setting Screen composition, Monitored beds, Display, Bed name
Parameter Setup Registered parameters (you can select parameters which
aren’t currently measured to be displayed on setting keys.),
Parameter display colors
Alarm Master Registering alarm conditions as an alarm master
Telemetry Setting Registering parameter settings as a master when the patient
Master is monitored through an ORG-9100 series multiple patient
receiver.
Pre-registration Registering common information for the hospital
• Bed names
• Group names and colors
• Pause reasons and pause times
• ORG channel numbers
• Hospital names
ORG Setting Settings for the ORG-9100 Multiple Patient Receiver Administrator’s
GZ Setting Settings for the vital sign telemeter Guide
Patient Attribute Read Bar code reader settings
Setting
External Output RS-232C communication, HL7, Arrhythmia Recall Image
Output, MFER file output, and ECTP settings
Function Keys Assigning functions to individual and all beds function keys
Mouse Setting Settings for the mouse when operating several central
monitors with one mouse
Remote Controller Remote control channel
Group Name Registering CNS group name
Network Network settings
Date & Time Settings for date and time
NOTE
Changing this setting affects all the central monitors and
bedside monitors in the network.
Maintenance Settings for the administrator password, Displaying monitored
beds information
Other Maintenance windows are protected by the
maintenance password.

Displaying the System Setup Screen

Touch [Menu] on the left lower corner of the screen → [System Setup] to
When [System Setup] is assigned to one of the all beds function keys, the
Information window of the System Setup screen can be displayed by touching
the function key. Refer to “Function Keys Setting” in Section 6-1 of the
Tabs Password input column
Touch to display another When the password is entered, setting
window. Touch [ ] or [ ] to windows for the administrator are
scroll the tab right and left. available.
13
POWER OFF
Central monitor information Refer to “Turning the
Power Off” in Section 3.

Sound Control
Set alarm sound volume, sync sound on or off, sync sound pitch, sync sound bed
and sync sound volume.
There are two tabs of sound control settings. The windows can be changed by
touching the tab.
• Alarm
• Sync Sound
Alarm
Touch [Alarm] on the Sound Control window and set the alarm volume. Refer to
“Adjusting the Alarm Sound Volume” in Section 5.
Sync Sound
Touch [Sync Sound] tab on the Sound Control window and set the sync sound
setting.
CAUTION CAUTION
The central monitor does not perform ECG The QRS sound at the central monitor has a time
analysis. Therefore, the QRS sync sound at the delay of several seconds because of network
central monitor might not synchronize with the connection.
patient’s actual QRS during pacing or when
complicated arrhythmias occur.

Sync Sound ON, OFF Select whether or not to make a sync sound (a beeping
sound).
Sync Sound Pitch High, Low Change the tone of the sync sound.
Sync Sound Bed Current Bed, Specific beds Select the bed of the sync sound source.
Touch a desired key in [Sync Sound Bed].
Current Bed: Sync sound source is a currently selected
bed.
Specific beds: Sync sound source is always the specific
bed.
Sync Sound Volume 7 levels Sets the sync sound volume in seven steps. Touch
[ ] or [ ] to set the volume. Even the volume is
minimum, the sync sound occurs.

Section 14 Error Messages and
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................................................. 14.2
System..................................................................................................................................................... 14.2
CPU Reset..................................................................................................................................... 14.3
Network.................................................................................................................................................... 14.3
Measurement Value.................................................................................................................................. 14.5
Alarm........................................................................................................................................................ 14.5
Admitting or Discharging.......................................................................................................................... 14.5
All Beds Screen and Individual Bed Window............................................................................................ 14.7
Trend Window........................................................................................................................................... 14.8
Tabular Trend Window.............................................................................................................................. 14.8
Full Disclosure and Expanded Waveform Windows................................................................................. 14.9
ST Recall Window.................................................................................................................................... 14.9
Arrhythmia Recall Window..................................................................................................................... 14.10
ECG 12 Lead Analysis Window.............................................................................................................. 14.10
Hemodynamics List Window.................................................................................................................. 14.10
Recording, Printing or Report................................................................................................................. 14.11
Overview Bed Window........................................................................................................................... 14.12
Parameter Setup.................................................................................................................................... 14.12
Remote Control...................................................................................................................................... 14.12 14
Error Messages................................................................................................................................................ 14.13
Messages From Bedside Monitors, Vital Sign Telemeters and Multiple Patient Receivers.................... 14.13
Messages about Measurement Conditions of Each Parameter................................................... 14.13
Other............................................................................................................................................ 14.18
Messages from Central Monitor............................................................................................................. 14.20
WS-960P Recorder Unit............................................................................................................... 14.20
Printer.......................................................................................................................................... 14.20
Other............................................................................................................................................ 14.20
Messages from Multiple Patient Receiver.............................................................................................. 14.21
General........................................................................................................................................ 14.21
ECG Monitoring........................................................................................................................... 14.22
SpO2 Monitoring........................................................................................................................... 14.23
NIBP Monitoring........................................................................................................................... 14.24
CO2 Monitoring............................................................................................................................. 14.24

14. ERROR MESSAGES AND TROUBLESHOOTING
This section explains troubleshooting when the central monitor does not operate
properly and error messages displayed on the screen.
Troubleshooting
Following is the list of causes and countermeasures for troubles. After the action,
check that the problem is solved and the central monitor operates properly. Then
restart monitoring.
NOTE
If the following countermeasures do not solve the problem, attach an
“Unusable” or “Repair request” label to the central monitor and contact
your Nihon Kohden representative.
System
Trouble Possible Cause/Criteria Action Refer to

The touch screen keys do not The touched position and Calibrate the touchkeys with the following
function. activated position do not procedure.
match. 1. Check that the USB cable between
display unit and PU-621R central
monitor processing unit is not damaged.
2. Touch [Menu] → [Touchkeys Setting]
and calibrate the touch keys. Refer to
Section 15
“Calibrating the Touchkeys” in Section
15.
If the trouble remains after actions 1 and 2,
exit the central monitor program and restart
your computer.
Display position is not The screen is out of Select the correct screen frequency referring
correct. synchronization. to the LCD display manual.
Data is deleted when the Faulty storage device. Contact your Nihon Kohden representative.
central monitor power is The central monitor may lose its function as
turned off. a monitor.
The system crashes when
––
trying to review the past data.
The system crashes
periodically such as once a
day.
Incorrect date and time. Clock error. Set the date and time on [Date & Time] of Administrator’s
the System Setup screen. Guide
The backup battery is run Contact your Nihon Kohden representative.
out. (The date and time is
––
incorrect again after adjusting
them.)
• Slow operation. The central monitor is Shut down the central monitor system
• It takes time to read out the unstable. program and restart it. For stable operation,
Section 15
saved data. restart the central monitor once every three
• Malfunction. months.
A Windows error message Windows detected that Wait for the monitor to recover
appears. an unexpected condition automatically. If the monitor fails to recover, ––
occurred. contact your Nihon Kohden representative.


A “System maintenance is Restart the central monitor.
required. Restart the central — —
monitor.” message appears.
CPU Reset
CAUTION
The central monitor CPU may be reset when there is unit failure,
considerable static electricity or noise. If this occurs, there is a
5-beep alarm sound for 5 seconds and monitoring stops for about
3 minutes. To secure patient safety, carefully observe the patients
and alarm information from the instruments which are connected to
the patients. After the central monitor is reset, check that it is working
properly.
If the CPU is reset, settings and all patient data except for the data during the
CPU reset are backed up and monitoring can continue. There are no settings for
the CPU reset.
Network

A desired bed is not displayed The bedside monitor or Turn on the bedside monitor or multiple
in the selected group. multiple patient receiver for patient receiver. –– 14
that bed is turned off.
The desired bed belongs to On the [Monitor Setting] window, check
another group. other groups to find the desired bed. Check
group names of each bedside monitor and
Extended Network setting is Monitor Network setting was If you change the Monitor Network setting,
set to Off. changed. the Extended Network setting will be set to
Off. Check the Extended Network setting
after restarting the system.
When trying to monitor a bed Communication could Change the central monitor ORG Settings as
that was registered on this not be established or was follows. Administrator’s
central monitor through a disconnected because • Set the “Protocol” setting to “1st Gen”. Guide
multiple patient receiver from “Protocol” is set to “2nd • Set the “Available Alarm Types” setting to
another central monitor, any Gen”, “Available Alarm “Main”.
of the following occurs: Types” is set to “All”, or • Set the “Arrhythmia Type” setting to
• The bed cannot be displayed “Arrhythmia Type” is set “Standard”.
at all. to “Extended” on the ORG Alternatively, upgrade all the instruments in
• A “COMMUNICATION Setting of this central monitor the network to the recommended software
LOSS” message appears and while the other central version.
the communication was lost. monitor does not support the
aforementioned functions.


When trying to monitor a Communication could Set the “Protocol” setting of the GZ Setting
vital sign telemeter (such as not be established or was to “1st Gen”.
GZ-130P) that was registered disconnected because Alternatively, upgrade all the instruments in
on this central monitor from “Protocol” is set to “2nd the network to the recommended software
another central monitor, any Gen” on the GZ Setting of version.
of the following occurs: this central monitor while the Administrator’s
• The data from the vital other central monitor does not Guide
sign telemeter cannot be support the function.
displayed at all.
• A “COMMUNICATION
LOSS” message appears and
the communication was lost.
WLAN transport does not Central monitors and bedside Upgrade all instruments to the same version.
start. monitors have different ––
versions.
Incompatible host monitor is Connect a compatible host monitor.
Section 1
connected.
WLAN transport is not Save the data in a compatible central
available on the central monitor.
––
monitor which saves the host
monitor data.
Transport setting on the host Set the correct transport settings. Host monitor
monitor is incorrect. Operator’s
Manual
Transport setting on the Set the correct transport settings on the BSM-1700
BSM-1700 series bedside BSM-1700 series bedside monitor. series
Operator’s
monitor is incorrect. Manual
WLAN transport failed to <WLAN TRANSPORT> is Set the <WLAN TRANSPORT> setting BSM-1700
start. set to OFF on the BSM-1700 to ON on the BSM-1700 series bedside series
Administrator’s
series bedside monitor. monitor. Guide
Temporary communication Disconnect the BSM-1700 series bedside
error. monitor from the host monitor then ––
reconnect it.
The BSM-1700 series bedside Remove the BSM-1700 series bedside
monitor is already registered monitor bed registration from the central Section 4
on the central monitor. monitor.

Measurement Value

Heart rate is not counted QRS detection type is not set Change the QRS detection type.
correctly. correctly.
QRS detection threshold is Adjust the QRS detection sensitivity.*
not set correctly.
Waveform is too large or too
small.
QRS detection threshold is
changed.
QRS and pacemaker spikes Turn pacing detection [ON].
are not distinguished.
Arrhythmia is not measured ECG learning is not correct. Relearn the patient’s ECG.
correctly.
Section 12
Heart rate and arrhythmia are ECG lead that is inappropriate Change the ECG lead used for analysis.
not measured correctly. for analysis is selected.
Noise on the ECG waveform. Hum interference on the ECG Set the hum filter to [ON].
waveform.
The ST value is inaccurate. The ST analysis point is not Confirm that the ST analysis point setting is
set properly. properly set for ST analysis.
Respiration is not measured Waveform is too large or too Set the proper sensitivity.
correctly. small.
Respiration sensitivity is
changed.
Respiration measurement is Turn the respiration measurement [ON].
set to [OFF].
* The QRS detection sensitivity can be set when the QRS detection type is Child.
14
Alarm

No alarm. Each alarm setting is set to Turn on the necessary alarm settings (vital
Section 5
[OFF]. sign, arrhythmia, ST) [ON].
Arrhythmia analysis is turned Turn arrhythmia analysis [ON].
Section 12
[OFF].
All alarms are set to [OFF] at This operation cannot be done at the central
the bedside monitor. monitor. Turn all alarms [ON] at the bedside
Section 5
All alarms for a bed cannot be monitor.
––
turned [ON/OFF] together.
Admitting or Discharging

Cannot transfer a patient’s The patient’s data is not saved Perform this operation on the central
data, pause monitoring and in the central monitor. monitor where the patient’s data is saved.
exchange monitoring beds.
Cannot change the receiving ––
channel.
Cannot admit/discharge a The bedside monitor is turned Turn on the bedside monitor.
patient. off.


The patient’s data before The patient was transferred When the patient was transferred too many
patient transfer is lost. too many times between the times between the different central monitors,
different central monitors. old review data might not be displayed.
The patient’s data before The central monitor where Turn on the central monitor where the
patient transfer cannot be the patient’s data is saved is patient’s data before the patient transfer is
reviewed. turned off. saved.
A “Transferring” message During patient transfer, the When a patient data remains on the
appears on the screen central monitor was turned Discharged Patients List window, readmit
but it does not change to off. Or, there was trouble on the patient. Set alarm settings because
“Completed” after patient the network and the transfer the alarm settings are initialized when the
transfer. failed. patient is readmitted. Section 4
A “Patient Transfer: Failed”
message appears on the screen When the patient data does not remain on
after patient transfer. the Discharged Patients List window, the
All patient’s data is lost after patient data is deleted. The deleted data
patient transfer. cannot be recovered. Admit the patient
A “Change Device: Failed” During changing the monitor, again.
message appears on the screen the central monitor was turned
after changing the monitor. off. Or, there was trouble on
the network and changing the
monitor failed.
Cannot resume monitoring. The bed is paused on a Turn the transmitter on and off and resume
Transmitter
transmitter which has a pause monitoring.
Operator’s
function and the transmitter
Manual
power is on.

All Beds Screen and Individual Bed Window

Numeric data and messages The display is refreshed. This
–– ––
disappear for a moment. is normal.
Waveform is not displayed. The bed is discharged. Admit the patient.
The monitoring of the bed is Resume monitoring. Section 4
paused.
The bedside monitor or the Turn on the bedside monitor or the multiple
multiple patient receiver is patient receiver. ––
turned off.
The currently measured lead/ Confirm the setting so that the currently
label is different from the measured lead/label matches the lead/label
Section 12
lead/label to be displayed on to be displayed on the screen.
the screen.
The waveform is not selected Set the waveform as a displayed waveform. Sections 6
as a displayed waveform. and 8
The bed is not registered as a Register the bed to the monitored bed. Administrator’s
monitored bed. Guide
Network is disconnected. Confirm the network connection. ––
Numeric data is not displayed. The parameter of the numeric Set the parameter of the numeric data to the
Sections 6
data is not selected as the displayed parameter.
and 8
displayed parameter.
The label of the currently Confirm the setting so that the label of the
measured numeric data is currently measured numeric data matches
Section 12
different from the label to be the label to be displayed.
displayed.
A vital sign alarm occurred in The numeric data of a parameter whose
a parameter that is not set to vital sign alarm is currently occurring has a
a displayed parameter and its higher priority to be displayed. 14
Section 5
numeric data took the place
of a numeric data that is set to
the displayed parameter.
The desired waveform or The waveform or numeric Measure the waveform or numeric data. ––
numeric data cannot be data is not measured. Confirm the setting so that the currently
selected. measured lead/label matches the lead/label Section 12
to be displayed on the screen.
Register the desired parameter on the
[Parameters] window of the System Setup
screen. A parameter registered at the Administrator’s
[Parameters] window of the System Setup Guide
screen is displayed on setting keys even
when it is not currently measured.
The desired parameter cannot The parameter is a parameter Refer to “Setting Parameter Priority” in
be displayed. that cannot be displayed. Section 6 for the list of parameters that can Section 6
be displayed on the central monitor.

Trend Window

Trend data is not displayed. The central monitor where the Turn on the central monitor where the bed’s
bed’s data is saved is turned data is saved.
off.
––
Trend data is not saved. The central monitor where the Trend data is not created when the central
bed’s data is saved was turned monitor where the bed’s data is saved is
off during measurement. turned off.
Tabular Trend Window

Tabular trend data is not The central monitor where the Turn on the central monitor where the bed’s
displayed. bed’s data is saved is turned data is saved. ––
off.
Cannot select a parameter The parameter is not Register the parameter at the [Parameters]
you want to add to the tabular registered at the [Parameters] window of the System Setup screen. Administrator’s
trend. window of the System Setup Guide
screen.
NIBP numeric data is not When the display interval is Use NIBP Tabular Trend or set [ ]→
displayed on the tabular trend not [1 min], NIBP numeric [+NIBP] to [ON] on each trend.
(Vital Sign 1 to 4). data other than NIBP Section 9
measurement time is not
displayed.
Tabular trend data is not The central monitor where the Tabular trend data is not created when the
saved. bed’s data is saved was turned central monitor where the bed’s data is ––
off during measurement. saved is turned off.

Full Disclosure and Expanded Waveform Windows

Full disclosure waveform is The central monitor where the Turn on the central monitor where the bed’s
not displayed. bed’s data is saved is turned data is saved. ––
off.
The desired full disclosure The full disclosure waveform Choose the waveform for the stored
Section 9
waveform is not displayed. is not saved. waveform on the Full Disclosure window.
The desired waveform cannot The parameter is not Measure the parameter.
be selected for a stored measured. ––
waveform.
The stored waveform setting Set the stored waveform setting on the
is on a central monitor where central monitor where the bed’s data is Section 9
the bed’s data is not saved. saved.
The waveforms that are The central monitor where the Turn on the central monitor where the bed’s
selected for the stored bed’s data is saved is turned data is saved. ––
waveform are not saved. off.
The currently measured lead/ Make the currently measured lead/label
label is different from the match the lead/label to be saved.
lead/label to be saved.
On the Full Disclosure Arrhythmia analysis is set to Set arrhythmia analysis to [ON] at both the Section 12
window, the arrhythmia [OFF] at the bedside monitor bedside monitor and central monitor. You
waveform does not have and/or the central monitor. cannot set color to an arrhythmia that does
color. not have color.
The arrhythmia alarm is set to Turn the arrhythmia alarm to [ON] at both
[OFF] at the bedside monitor the bedside monitor and central monitor.
Section 5
and/or the central monitor. You cannot set color to an arrhythmia that
does not have color.
Noise interference You cannot set color to an arrhythmia that
Poor electrode attachment does not have color. ––
condition
14
[Waveform Alarm Color] on Set the [Waveform Alarm Color] on the Full
the Full Disclosure window or Disclosure window or Expanded Waveform
Section 9
Expanded Waveform window window to [ON].
is set to [OFF].
ST Recall Window

ST recall files are not saved. The central monitor where the Turn on the central monitor where the bed’s
bed’s data is saved is turned data is saved.
off.
––
The bedside monitor cannot The central monitor cannot save or display
output ST recall files to a ST recall files of the BSM-4100 series
network. bedside monitor older than version 02-09.

Arrhythmia Recall Window

Arrhythmia recall files are not Arrhythmia analysis is set to Turn the arrhythmia analysis to [ON].
Section 12
created. [OFF].
Arrhythmia recall files for a Recall file creation for the Select the arrhythmia to create a recall file
particular arrhythmia are not arrhythmia is set to [OFF]. on [ ] → [Create Recall Waveform] of
created. the Arrhythmia Recall window.
Section 9
Arrhythmia recall files for Recall file creation for the Unselect the arrhythmia to create a recall
unnecessary arrhythmias are arrhythmia is set to [ON]. file on [ ] → [Create Recall Waveform]
created. of the Arrhythmia Recall window.
Arrhythmia recall files are The number of arrhythmia Deleted files cannot be recovered.
deleted. recall files for one bed
exceeded the limit and older
files are deleted.
[Delete] is touched when
––
several files have a deletion
mark.
Arrhythmia recall files are not The central monitor where the Turn on the central monitor where the bed’s
displayed. bed’s data is saved is turned data is saved.
off.
The arrhythmia types to be Touch [ ] on the Arrhythmia Recall
displayed on the screen are window to display the setting window.
not selected. Section 9
Select the arrhythmias to be displayed on
the screen.
Arrhythmia recall files are not The central monitor where the Arrhythmia recall files are not created when
saved. bed’s data is saved was turned the central monitor where the bed’s data is ––
off during measurement. saved is turned off.
ECG 12 Lead Analysis Window

ECG 12 Lead analysis files The bedside monitor cannot The central monitor can display ECG 12
are not displayed. output ECG 12 lead analysis lead analysis files of the BSM-4100 series
––
files to a network. bedside monitor only when the bedside
monitor version is 03-02 or later.
Hemodynamics List Window

Hemodynamics data is not The central monitor where the Turn on the central monitor where the bed’s
displayed. bed’s data is saved is turned data is saved.
off.
Hemodynamics data is not The central monitor where the Hemodynamics data is not created when
saved. bed’s data is saved was turned the central monitor where the bed’s data is
off during measurement. saved is turned off. ––
The bedside monitor cannot The central monitor can display
output hemodynamics data to hemodynamics data of the BSM-4100 series
the network. bedside monitor only when the bedside
monitor version is 02-09 or later.

Recording, Printing or Report

In the following recordings, Select the desired waveform at the [First
waveforms that you do not Wave], [Second Wave] and [Third Wave] on
want to record are recorded. the [Recording] → [Record Wave Selection]
• Periodic recording of the Setup window.
–– ––
• Clock time periodic
recording
• Alarm recording
• Call recording
In the following recordings, The waveforms to record are Select the desired waveform at the [First
waveforms that you do not not selected. Wave], [Second Wave] and [Third Wave] on
want to record are recorded. the [Recording] → [Record Wave Selection] Section 10
• Manual recording of the Setup window.
• All beds recording
Alarm recording is not Recall file creation for the Select the arrhythmia to create a recall file
performed for a particular arrhythmia is set to [OFF]. on [ ] → [Create Recall Waveform] of Section 5
arrhythmia. the Arrhythmia Recall window.
Vital sign alarm recording is Vital sign alarm recording is Set each recording to [ON] on the
not performed. set to [OFF]. [Recording] → [Alarm Recording] of the
Arrhythmia alarm recording is Arrhythmia alarm recording is Setup window.
not performed. set to [OFF].
Call recording is not Call recording is set to [OFF]
performed. on the Recording window of
the Setup window.
Section 10
Periodic or clock time [Recording] → [Periodic Set [Recording] → [Periodic Recording] of
periodic recording is not Recording] of the Setup the Setup window to [Periodic Recording]
performed. window is set to [OFF]. or [Clock Time Periodic Recording].
Only one waveform is Only one waveform is set to Select the desired waveform at the [First 14
recorded on the manual record. Wave], [Second Wave] and [Third Wave] on
recording. the [Recording] → [Record Wave Selection]
of the Setup window.
Printing is not possible from The setup is wrong. If you have replaced the printer or central
Administrator’s
the network printer. monitor, you need to install the network
Guide
printer again.
In the report printing, The report setting is not Set [Report] → [Report Items] of the Setup
waveforms that you do not appropriate. window correctly.
want to print are printed. Set the display contents to print on the
Section 9
report on [Report] of the Setup window.
Report printing starts The report printing mode is Set [Report] → [Report Mode] of the Setup
automatically. set to [Periodic]. window to [Manual].
In the remote delayed Recorded waveform is
waveform recording, selected at the bedside
–– Section 10
waveforms that you do not monitor.
want to record are recorded.

Overview Bed Window

The desired bed cannot be The bed is a 8000 series To display data of a 8000 series bedside
selected for the Overview Bed bedside monitor. monitor on this central monitor, a central
––
screen. monitor on the network must be monitoring
the bed.
Parameter Setup

Available settings differ Available settings depend on the bedside
–– Section 12
among bedside monitors. monitor model and connection method.
Remote Control

The remote control does not The batteries in the remote Replace the batteries with new ones.
Section 3
function. control are old.
Wrong bed is selected. Select the correct remote control channel of Administrator’s
the bed. Guide
Nothing appears on the The batteries in the remote Replace the batteries with new ones.
display window of the remote control are weak.
control. Section 3
LED on the remote control The batteries in the remote Replace the batteries with new ones.
does not blink or light. control are weak.

Error Messages
Error messages are categorized into two types, messages sent from bedside
monitors/multiple patient receiver and messages generated at the central monitor.
Messages From Bedside Monitors, Vital Sign Telemeters and Multiple Patient Receivers
Messages about Measurement Conditions of Each Parameter
The central monitor receives error messages from bedside monitors, multiple
patient receivers and vital sign telemeters and displays them on the screen. Here
is the message list. For causes and countermeasures for each message, refer to
the bedside monitor, multiple patient receiver or vital sign telemeter operator’s
manual.
Some messages displayed at the bedside monitor or multiple patient receiver are
not displayed or are different on the central monitor.
An item with an asterisk (*) is an alarm.
Parameter Message
* CHECK ELECTRODES
* CHANGE ELECTRODE
* NOISE 14
* CANNOT ANALYZE
— PACING
ECG — Arrhythmia Analysis Off
— SMALL QRS
— RHYTHM CHANGE
— LEARNING
— LOW mV
— HIGH mV
Parameter Message
* Module Failure
* Too Many Params
* Connector Off
* Probe Off
* Probe Broken
— No Pulse
SpO2
* Light Interfer.
— Pulse Search
* Check Probe Site
—/* M (Unstable Pulse)*1
— Small Pulse
* Change Probe

Parameter Message
* Module Failure
* Too Many Params
RESP
* Connector Off
* Check Sensor
Parameter Message
* Module Failure
* Too Many Params
* Connector Off
* Safety Valve Open
* No Pulse
* Meas Time Out
* Check Cuff/Hose
NIBP
* Systolic Over
— Re-measuring
— Please Wait
— Small Pulse
— Zeroing
— Noise
* Check Interval Setting*2
Parameter Message
* Module Failure
* Too Many Params
* Check Label
* Connector Off
* Check Sensor
— Out of Range
PRESS
— Zero Imbalance
— Zero Unstable
— Zero Out of Range
— Zeroing Complete
* Catheter Disconnect*2
* Cannot Detect Pulse*2
Parameter Message
* Module Failure
* Too Many Params
TEMP * Check Label
* Connector Off
* Check Sensor

Parameter Message
* Module Failure
* Too Many Params
* Connector Off
* Check Sensor
CO2
* Adapter Error
(Mainstream)
* Unspecified Accuracy*2
* Out of Range*2
* Check CO2 Cell*2
* CO2 Cell Off*2
Parameter Message
* Module Failure
* Module Overheat
CO2
* Line Block
(Sidestream)
* Filter Line Off
* Replace Scrubber
Parameter Message
* Module Failure
* Too Many Params
* Connector Off
O2
* Check Sensor
— Cal?
— Calibrating 14
Parameter Message
* Module Failure
* Connector Off
FLOW/Paw * Check Sensor
* Change Sensor
— Calibrating
Parameter Message
* Unit Failure
* Connector Off
* Check Catheter
* Catheter Location
— CO<1.0L/min
— Signal Adapting
— Unstable Tb
CCO
* Check Waveform
* Unstable
* Highly Variable Pulse Rate
* Check Patient Information
* Zero Imbalance
* Zero Unstable
* Zeroing Complete

Parameter Message
* Module Failure
* Connector Off
PiCCO (EXT)
* Check Sensor
* Alarm
Parameter Message
* Unit Failure
GAS * Too Many Params
* Com Error
Parameter Message
* Module Failure
tcPO2/tcPCO2 * Connector Off
(EXT) * Com Error
* Too Many Params
Parameter Message
* Module Failure
* Too Many Params
BIS
* Connector Off
* Com Error
Parameter Message
* Unit Failure
* Connector Off
* Check Sensor
CNIBP
— Pulse Search
— Sensor Expired
— Out of Range
Parameter Message
* Module Failure
* Too Many Params
* Connector Off
* Check Sensor
* Check Electrodes
* High Impedance
* Noise
EEG
* EEG Check External Device
* EEG Connector Off
* EEG Check Head Set
* EEG No Communication
* EEG Low Battery
EEG Unstable
*
Communication
Parameter Message
* Connector Off
VENT (EXT)
* Alarm

Parameter Message
* Connector Off
rSO2
* Alarm
Parameter Message
* Alarm
* esCCO Error
esCCO — Check ECG/SpO2
— Check ECG
— Check SpO2
Parameter Message
* Module Failure
* Check Sensor
* Alarm
* AP Check Sensor
* AP Sensor Error
* AP Zero Imbalance
— Zeroing Complete
* PCCO No Catheter
* PCCO Catheter Disconnect
* PCCO Catheter Unavailable
* PCCO ProAQT Sensor Error
PCCO * PCCO Ext Device Error
* PCCO Check Ext Device
* PCCO Parameter Duplicated
— ScvO2 Warming Up
* ScvO2 Signal Too High 14
* ScvO2 Signal Too Low
* ScvO2 Light Interference
* ScvO2 Ambient Temp High
* ScvO2 Overheat
* ScvO2 Module Error
* ScvO2 Check
— ScvO2 Cal Error
*1 Normally, M (Unstable Pulse) is a message. When the ECG measurement is

set to OFF, it is displayed as an alarm.
* These alarms is displayed when Available Alarm Types is set to All.
2

Other
Message Possible Cause/Criteria Action

The power cord of the bedside monitor Connect the power cord of the bedside
AC Power Error*5 is disconnected from the AC outlet. monitor to the AC outlet.
Power failure Supply power to the bedside monitor.
“ORGXXXXX SRAM
The backup battery in the multiple
Battery Low. Contact NIHON Consult your Nihon Kohden representative.
patient receiver has run out.
KOHDEN”
An alarm is detected on the bedside
ALARM Check the bedside monitor status.
monitor.
ALARMS SUSPENDED Alarms are suspended. ––
When the Alarm Reset function key is
The Alarm Reset function key was
touched on the bedside monitor or the Reset
touched on the bedside monitor or the
ALARM RESET Alarms key is touched on the vital sign
Reset Alarms key was touched on the
telemeter during the alarm reset condition,
vital sign telemeter.
all alarms are reactivated.
The data is being sent from the bedside
Receiving Data*4 —
monitor.
The data cannot be transferred from a
bedside monitor to the central monitor
for one or more of the following reasons.
• The network cable is not connected
Data Send Error*4*5 Check the network connection condition.
firmly.
• The network setting is incorrect.
• The network cable is damaged or hub
failure.
• The selected bedside monitor power
is OFF or disconnected from the
network.
Check the patient condition and ensure the
• The network communication is lost
COMMUNICATION LOSS patient’s safety. Then check the monitoring
during sleep mode.
systems.
The multiple patient receiver for the
transmitter is disconnected from the
network.
The battery pack that is installed in the Change the monitor to AC power operation
Monitor Battery Weak*5
bedside monitor is weak. and charge the battery pack.
OFF The bed is discharged. ––
The cable of an unavailable parameter is Disconnect the cable of the unavailable
Parameter Not Available*5
connected. parameter.
ALL ALARMS OFF All alarms are off. ––
Two or more transmitters have the same Set all of the transmitters to different
Duplicate Transmitter
channel.*2 channels.
Two or more multiple patient receivers Set all of the multiple patient receivers to
have the same channel. different channels.
Change the channel number of the bed
Duplicate Receiver Two or more beds whose data is
whose data is received by the multiple
received by the multiple patient receiver
patient receiver on the Admit/Discharge
use the same channel number.* 3
window.
Change Transmitter Battery*1 Weak transmitter battery. Replace the batteries with new ones.
A technical alarm is detected on the
Check Device Check the bedside monitor status.
bedside monitor.
FALLING DOWN*6 The patient has fallen down. ––
Weak electric field strength of a wireless Check the patient condition and ensure the
telemeter. patient’s safety. Then check the following:
• Remaining charge of the transmitter
SIGNAL LOSS*1 battery
The network communication is lost
• Transmitter antenna lead condition
during sleep mode.
• Distance between the multiple patient
receiver and transmitter


An input unit is not inserted into the
Input Unit Disconnected*4 —
bedside monitor or data acquisition unit.
Arrhythmia is detected on the bedside
Arrhythmia Check the bedside monitor status.
monitor.
Arrhythmia Analysis Off The arrhythmia analysis is set to OFF. ––
WANDERING*6 The patient is moving around. ––
The CALL button on the transmitter was
CALL*1 ––
pressed.
Monitor Busy The bed is already being monitored by Change the network configuration so that
four other devices. the number of devices monitoring the bed
(including the central monitor) is four or
less.
HiQ-View is performed using a bed The bed is automatically discharged when
(transmitter or vital sign telemeter) HiQ-View is ended.
which is already being monitored.
*1 Displayed only when receiving data from a transmitter.

*2 “Duplicate Transmitter” is displayed only when using a transmitter which accepts the “Duplicate Transmitter” message.
*3 “Duplicate Receiver” is displayed only when using a multiple patient receiver which accepts the “Duplicate Receiver”
message. Multiple patient receiver might not detect channel duplication properly within 3 minutes after turning on the
*4 “Input Unit Disconnected” and “Receiving Data” are only displayed when the bedside monitor on which transport
function is set to on is connected.
* Displayed only when Available Alarm Types is set to All on the System Setup screen.
5
14

Messages from Central Monitor

Mainly displays messages about the recorder or printer.

The recorder unit door is not closed Close the door completely.
RECORDER DOOR OPEN
completely.
No recording paper in the recorder Set recording paper in the recorder unit. If
unit. there is recording paper in the recorder unit
RECORDER OUT OF PAPER and the message still appears, the paper
detection sensor is malfunctioning. Clean
the sensor part in the recorder unit.
RECORDER POWER OFF OR The recorder unit is disconnected. Connect the recorder unit.
DISCONNECTED
Printer

Printer is OFF LINE The laser printer is not registered. Contact your Nihon Kohden representative.
Job Error Error in the printer. Refer to the printer manual.
Other

Monitoring of the bed is paused. To resume monitoring, touch [Resume] on
Resume the Pause window of the [Admit/Discharge]
window.
The central monitor processing unit Check if the fan works.
Main Unit Overheat
temperature is too hot. Check if the vent hole is blocked.
The central monitor processing unit Contact your Nihon Kohden representative.
Main Unit Abnormal Voltage
voltage is abnormal.
Central monitor processing unit fan
Main Unit Fan Error
error.
CPU Fan Error CPU fan error.
HDD [Port X] Error Error on the hard disk.
PU-621R type I: X is 0 or 1
PU-621R type II: X is 1 or 2

Messages from Multiple Patient Receiver

General
Message Possible Cause/Criteria Action Refer to

The transmitter battery is Insert the battery correctly.
reversed.
Transmitter
The transmitter battery is If a beep sounds continuously on the
Operator’s
weak. transmitter or there is no sound even when
Manual
the call key is pressed, replace the battery
with a new one.
The channel number of the Set the channel number of the monitor to
monitor does not match that match the transmitter channel. Section 4
of the transmitter.
Receiving antenna is Connect the antenna properly. Administrator’s
disconnected. Guide
The transmitter power is Turn on the transmitter power. Transmitter
SIGNAL LOSS
turned off. Operator’s
Manual
The antenna system is faulty. Contact your Nihon Kohden representative.
The antenna is not placed at Place the antenna at an appropriate position. Telemetry
an appropriate position. system
Installation
Guide
The transmitter type (A or C) Check the combination of the transmitter Multiple
does not match the receiver and multiple patient receiver. patient
(A or C). receiver
Operator’s
Manual
An alarm has been generated Take appropriate action depending on the
XXX alarm by an item that is not alarm level. Section 5 14
displayed.
The transmitter battery is Replace the battery with a new one Transmitter
Change Transmitter Battery weak. immediately. Operator’s
Manual
The Call button on the
CALL –– ––
transmitter has been pressed.
ORGXXXXX SRAM Battery The backup battery of the Contact your Nihon Kohden representative.
Low. Contact NIHON multiple patient receiver is
KOHDEN old.

ECG Monitoring

The baseline is not stable due to Change the electrode positions to where
respiration or body movement. there is less influence from the body
movement.
EMG noise is superimposed. Change the electrode position to where
there is less muscle.
Eliminate conditions of cold and tension
from the patient.
The electrode is pulled by the lead. Put some slack into the electrode lead.
The electrode is dry. Replace the electrode with a new one.
The electrode cannot be attached
firmly to the skin.
NOISE The contact between the lead and Clean the electrode lead clip or replace the
electrode is poor. electrode lead with a new one.
High electrode impedance. Rub the skin with “skinPure” skin
preparation gel.
An electric blanket is used. Use another warming method.
ESU emits strong electromagnetic Keep the ESU away from the transmitter
interference. or bedside monitor or turn off the emitter
source power.
Equipotential grounding is not Connect the equipotential ground terminal
acquired. on the bedside monitor to the equipotential
ground terminal on the wall with the
grounding lead.
Noise interference for more than Remove noise.
30 seconds and heart rate cannot be
CANNOT ANALYZE
counted and arrhythmia cannot be
analyzed.
The electrode lead is detached. Connect the electrode lead to the electrode
firmly.
The electrode cannot be attached Replace the electrode with a new one.
firmly to the skin.
The electrode lead is disconnected Connect the electrode lead to the transmitter
from the transmitter or bedside or bedside monitor.
monitor.
Poor contact between the lead and Replace the electrode lead with a new one.
CHECK ELECTRODES electrode.
The electrode lead is damaged.
Differential offset voltage at Replace the electrode with a new one.
electrodes.
ECG waveform baseline wanders Change the electrode positions to where
due to body movement and it is there is less influence from the body
difficult to detect QRS. movement.
Large hum noise on the ECG Check that the central monitor is properly
waveform. grounded.
PACING QRS of a pacing pulse is detected. ––

(This message appears only when An electric blanket is used. Use another warming method.
pacing detection is set to [ON] on ECG of a neonate is monitored. Set the pacing detection to [OFF] on the
the ECG window.) ECG window.

SpO2 Monitoring

Considerable body movement. When the message is displayed frequently,
The probe is not attached to the check the patient condition and, if
M (highlighted) patient properly. necessary, change the attachment site.
NIBP measurement is in process. The message will disappear once the
measurement process is completed.
A surgical light, bilirubin lamp, or Cover the attachment site with a blanket.
LIGHT INTERFERE
sunlight is close to the probe.
Searching for the correct pulse Wait until the pulse wave is detected.
wave.
The probe attachment site is not Attach the probe to an appropriate place.
appropriate. Refer to the each probe manual.
Poor blood circulation for Check the patient condition, probe
measuring SpO2. attachment or change the attachment site.
DETECTING PULSE
The probe is too tight and it is Reattach the probe.
obstructing the blood circulation.
The probe is not attached to the Attach the probe to the patient properly.
patient properly.
The probe cable is disconnected Connect the probe cable to the SpO2
from the SpO2 connection cord.* connection cord.
The probe attachment site is not Attach the probe to an appropriate place.
appropriate. Refer to the each probe manual.
Poor blood circulation for Check the patient condition, probe
measuring SpO2. attachment or change the attachment site.
The probe is secured too tightly Reattach the probe.
and it is obstructing the blood
circulation.
14
CANNOT DETECT PULSE
patient properly.
One of the following messages is Refer to each screen message section and
displayed for 30 seconds. remove the cause of the alarm or message.
• LIGHT INTERFERE
• CHECK PROBE
• DETECTING PULSE
from the SpO2 connection cord.* connection cord.
from the SpO2 connection cord. connection cord.
The probe is deteriorated. Replace the probe with a new one.
The probe is damaged or short- Replace the probe with a new one.
circuited.
The SpO2 connection cord failure. Replace the SpO2 connection cord with a
new one.
CHECK PROBE
The SpO2 connection cord is Firmly connect the SpO2 connection cord to
disconnected from the bedside the bedside monitor.
monitor.
The probe cable is disconnected Firmly connect the probe cable to the
from the transmitter. transmitter.
patient properly.
* This applies only when data is being sent from a combination of a vital sensor (a monitor from A&D Co., Ltd.) and a
ZB-900P or ZS-900P transmitter.

NIBP Monitoring

NIBP SAFETY CIRCUIT The air hose is bent or squeezed. Remove the cause.
RUNNING The inflation time is too long. Stop measurement.
NOTE In auto mode measurement, the Stop measurement.
When this message is cuff inflation started before the cuff
displayed, measurement deflation is complete.
cannot be performed for 40
seconds.
Enormous pressure was applied by When measuring an adult, ask the patient
HIGH CUFF PRESS
the pressure of the cuff. not to move too much.
The cuff is disconnected from the Firmly connect the cuff to the air hose.
air hose.
CHECK CUFF/HOSE
The cuff or air hose is damaged. Replace the cuff or air hose with a new one.
The air hose is bent or squeezed. Remove the cause.
The maximum blood pressure Measure by palpation, auscultation or the
exceeded 290 mmHg when using invasive blood pressure method.
SYSTOLIC OVER
the adult cuff, or 125 mmHg when
using the neonate cuff.
The measuring time exceeded the If the cause is arrhythmia, measure by
MEAS TIME-OUT specified time due to arrhythmia or invasive blood pressure measurement.
noise. Remove the cause if due to noise.
The patient’s pulse wave is too Measure by palpation or the invasive blood
small. pressure method.
WEAK PULSE
The cuff is wrapped too loosely. Wrap the cuff around the arm properly.
The cuff size is inappropriate. Use the appropriate cuff.
The patient’s pulse wave is small. Measure by palpation or invasive blood
pressure measurement.
CANNOT DETECT PULSE
The cuff is not wrapped on the Wrap the cuff around the arm of the patient
patient correctly. properly.
NIBP MODULE ERROR Module malfunction. Contact your Nihon Kohden representative.
CO2 Monitoring

Insufficient sensor light. Refer to the CO2 sensor kit manual. If
necessary, replace the kit with a new one.
CHECK SENSOR
The CO2 sensor is damaged. Replace the CO2 sensor with a new one.
The CO2 adapter is damaged. Replace the CO2 adapter with a new one.

Section 15 Maintenance
Daily Check........................................................................................................................................................ 15.2

Checking Sound Generation from the Speaker........................................................................................ 15.2
Calibrating the Touchkeys......................................................................................................................... 15.2
Adjusting the LCD Display........................................................................................................................ 15.3
Inspection After Use........................................................................................................................................... 15.4
Cleaning and Disinfecting................................................................................................................................... 15.5
PU-621R Central Monitor Processing Unit............................................................................................... 15.5
Cleaning......................................................................................................................................... 15.5
Disinfecting..................................................................................................................................... 15.5
LCD Display............................................................................................................................................. 15.6
WS-960P Recorder Unit........................................................................................................................... 15.6
Panel.............................................................................................................................................. 15.7
Thermal Head................................................................................................................................ 15.7
Sensor............................................................................................................................................ 15.8
RY-910PA Remote Controller................................................................................................................... 15.8
Cleaning and Disinfecting the Remote Control.............................................................................. 15.8
Replacing the Batteries.................................................................................................................. 15.8
Network Printer........................................................................................................................................ 15.8
Disposal.............................................................................................................................................................. 15.9
RY-910PA Remote Controller................................................................................................................... 15.9
Disposal of Batteries...................................................................................................................... 15.9 15
Regular Inspection............................................................................................................................................ 15.10
Periodic Replacement Parts............................................................................................................................. 15.12
Repair Parts Availability Policy......................................................................................................................... 15.12

15. MAINTENANCE
Daily Check
Checking Sound Generation from the Speaker

Use the alarm volume and QRS sync sound volume settings on [Sound Control]
of the System Setup screen and check that there is sound from the speaker. Refer
to “Sound Control” in Section 13.
Calibrating the Touchkeys

Calibrate the touchkeys when the touched position and activated position do not
match.
1. Touch [Menu] on the left lower corner of the screen → [Touchkeys Setting]
and display the setting window. A confirmation window appears.
When [Touchkeys Setting] is assigned to one of the all beds function keys,
the [Touchkeys Setting] screen can be displayed by touching the function
key. Refer to “Function Keys Setting” in Section 6-1 of the Administrator’s
Guide to assign a function to the function key.
2. Touch [Yes] on the confirmation window. The calibration screen appears.

15. MAINTENANCE
3. Touch the exact center of the mark. When the mark is correctly touched, the
mark appears in another place. The mark appears in three places.
Touch before the timeout

bar on the screen is
finished.
When all three places are touched correctly, the screen changes.
4. Touch [ ] on the screen. The calibration finishes.
To calibrate the touchkeys again, touch the [ ].
Touch before the timeout

bar on the screen is
finished. 15
Calibrating the Touchkeys in Dual Display Composition

In dual display composition, the touchkeys calibration starts from the main
display. After the marks in the three places are touched on the main display,
touchkeys calibration on the second display starts. The calibration is complete
after the marks in the three places are touched on the second display.
Adjusting the LCD Display

Refer to the LCD display manual.

15. MAINTENANCE
Inspection After Use
Do the following inspection after every use.
• Previous patient data is deleted.

• Temporarily changed settings are changed back to the previous settings.
• There was no abnormal performance during use.
• There is no dirt, damage or scratches on the monitor.
• Accessories are cleaned and stored properly.
• There are enough consumables, such as recording paper, and disposable
electrodes for the next use.
• The power switch on the monitor and transmitter are turned off.
• Dead batteries of the transmitter are disposed of properly.
• The batteries are removed from the transmitter when you are not going to use
it for a while.
• The monitor is not in a wet place and there are no chemicals around the
monitor.
• The transmitter is completely dry in case the transmitter is wet.
• The monitor and transmitter are stored properly.

15. MAINTENANCE
Cleaning and Disinfecting
CAUTION
Before maintenance, cleaning or disinfection, turn
the central monitor power off and disconnect the
power cord from the AC socket. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in electrical shock and
central monitor malfunction.

Cleaning
CAUTION CAUTION
This instrument is not waterproof. Be careful not If the instrument accidentally gets wet,
to let any liquid get inside the instrument. immediately stop using it and disconnect the
power cord from the AC outlet. Contact your
Nihon Kohden representative for inspection.
CAUTION
Do not use volatile liquid such as thinner or
benzine as these agents will melt or crack the
materials.
15
Wipe the panel with a soft cloth moistened with water, neutral soap or alcohol
(76.9 to 81.4 vol%) and wrung out. Wipe off moisture with a dry cloth or gauze
and thoroughly dry before use.
Check if the vent hole is dusty. Wipe the dust off with a cotton swab or vacuum it
with a cleaner.
Disinfecting
CAUTION CAUTION
Do not use volatile liquids such as thinner or This instrument is not waterproof. Be careful not
benzine as these agents will melt or crack the to let any liquid get inside the instrument.
materials.
CAUTION CAUTION
If you put spray on the instrument, wipe off the Do not sterilize. It deteriorates and damages the
instrument with a dry cloth after spraying. instrument surface and causes malfunction.

15. MAINTENANCE
To disinfect, wipe the main unit with a soft cloth moistened with any of the
disinfectants listed below. Use the recommended concentration. Wipe off
moisture with a dry cloth or gauze and thoroughly dry before use.
Disinfectant Concentration (%)

Glutaraldehyde solution 2.0
Alkyldiaminoethylglycine hydrochloride 0.5
Benzalkonium chloride 0.2
Benzethonium chloride solution 0.2
Chlorhexidine gluconate solution 0.5
LCD Display
Disable the touchkeys function before cleaning.
1. Touch [Menu] on the left lower corner of the screen → [Touchkeys Off] and
When [Touchkeys Off] is assigned to one of the all beds function keys,
the [Touchkeys Off] can be displayed by touching the function key. Refer
2. Clean the LCD display. Refer to the LCD display manual.
3. Click the mouse, press any key on the keyboard or touch the icon which
appears during a touchkeys off to restore the touchkeys function. Or, wait for
120 seconds to restore the touchkeys function.
CAUTION
Do not touch the thermal head inside the recorder unit. The thermal
head may be damaged by static electricity or become dirty and
cause printing failure.

15. MAINTENANCE
Panel
Clean the panel of the recorder unit in the same way as cleaning the PU-621R
Central Monitor Processing Unit. Refer to the “PU-621R Central Monitor
Processing Unit” section.
Thermal Head
To protect the thermal head from abrasion or damage and assure optimum
performance for a long time, clean the head surface of the recorder with the
thermal head cleaning pen (recorder unit accessory) after every 10 to 15 sets of
recording paper.
CAUTION
Be careful not to cut yourself with the paper cutter on the recorder.
1. Turn off the recorder power before cleaning.
2. Push down the magazine release lever and open the magazine.
15
3. Clean the black part of the thermal head with the thermal head cleaning pen.

15. MAINTENANCE
Sensor
The paper sensor is located by the thermal head. Clean the sensor surface with a
dry cotton swab.

Cleaning and Disinfecting the Remote Control
Clean and disinfect the remote control in the same way as cleaning and
disinfecting the PU-621R Central Monitor Processing Unit. Refer to the
“PU-621R Central Monitor Processing Unit” section.
Replacing the Batteries

Replace the batteries when the batteries are discharged. Refer to the “Preparing
the Remote Control” in Section 3.
Network Printer
Refer to network printer manual.

15. MAINTENANCE
Disposal
CAUTION
Dispose of Nihon Kohden products according to your local laws and
your facility’s guidelines for waste disposal. Otherwise, it may affect
the environment. If there is a possibility that the product may have
been contaminated with infection, dispose of it as medical waste
according to your local laws and your facility’s guidelines for medical
waste. Otherwise, it may cause infection.
For detailed information about disposal, contact your Nihon Kohden

representative.

Disposal of Batteries
Batteries are consumables. Before disposing of the batteries, check with your
local solid waste officials for details in your area for recycling options or proper
disposal.
15

15. MAINTENANCE
Regular Inspection
CAUTION CAUTION
Software upgrade must only be done by qualified Do the regular inspection twice a year. Otherwise,
service personnel or a person with technical a decrease and loss in function will not be
knowledge. If upgrade is not done correctly, the noticed and this results in incorrect monitoring.
central monitor may freeze.
CAUTION CAUTION
During maintenance and servicing, patients Restart the central monitor once every three
monitored by the central monitor must be months. Otherwise operation becomes unstable
monitored by alternate instruments such as and monitoring may stop. While restarting,
bedside monitors. patients monitored by the central monitor must be
monitored by alternate instruments such as
bedside monitors.
CAUTION
Never disassemble or repair the central monitor.
Disassembly and repair must be performed by
qualified service personnel. When there is any
abnormality, contact your Nihon Kohden
representative.
Perform the periodic inspection at least twice every year. Make sure that the
monitor operates properly and replace the consumables.
If the periodic inspection is not performed, degradation or loss of function may

go unnoticed and lead to misdiagnosis.
If you found abnormalities as a result of inspection and the monitor is suspected

to be faulty, attach an “Unusable” or “Repair request” label to the monitor and
contact your Nihon Kohden representative. For inspection, refer to the Service
Manual.
Check the following items regularly to keep your monitor in optimal condition.
• Monitor is not dirty, damaged or rusty.

• No key or switch is broken.
• No damage to the sockets on the monitor.
• The battery cover is attached to the transmitter.
• Receiving antenna position is correct.
• Channel settings are correct.
• Screen is clean and not damaged.
• Screen brightness can be adjusted.
• Screen display is correct.

15. MAINTENANCE
• The touchkeys is properly calibrated.

• The specified recording paper is used.
• Recorder unit operates properly.
• The laser printer operates properly.
• There are sufficient consumables for the recorder or printer.
• The paper sensor works correctly.
• Enough toner in the laser printer.
• No missing dots on the recorded data.
• The date and time on the paper is correct.
• The fan operates properly.
• System Setup settings are correct.
• Alarm setting is correct and functions properly.
• Date and time is correct.
• Alarm and sync sound can be heard clearly.
• Sound volume can be adjusted.
• Waveform display is correct. (All waveforms are properly displayed on the All
Beds screen and Individual Bed window.)
• All monitored beds are correctly recognized at the central monitor and
communication in the network is in good condition.
• Review data for each bed are properly displayed on the screen.
• The touchkeys operate correctly.
• The central monitor is properly connected to external instruments.
• Only the specified parts are used.
• The specified electrodes, sensors, transducers and probes are used.
• Alarm indicator lamps light.
• The central monitor is restarted once every three months.
The following items must be checked regularly by qualified service personnel. 15

• Receiving condition in the required range.
• Power cord is not damaged.
• Grounding lead is properly connected.
• Supplied voltage is correct.
• No current leakage.

15. MAINTENANCE
Periodic Replacement Parts
To maintain the performance of the instrument, the following parts must be

periodically replaced.
Description Expected Life Span

Thermal array head (AJ048-8E802) Approx. 370 stacks of recording paper
After 370 stacks of recording paper, the recording becomes thin.
Paper drive motor (CD-0004 Motor Assy) Approx. 9,000 stacks of recording paper
After 9,000 stacks of recording paper, the paper drive motor is
deteriorated and cannot feed the recording paper.
Platen roller (Platen roller Ø 8) Approx. six years
When the platen roller is deteriorated, the paper cannot be fed.
PU-621R Type II Central Monitor Processing Unit
Filter One year
Repair Parts Availability Policy
Nihon Kohden Corporation (NKC) shall stock repair parts (parts necessary to
maintain the performance of the instrument) for a period of 5 years from the
date of delivery. In that period NKC or its authorized agents will repair the
instrument. This period may be shorter than 5 years if the board or part necessary
for the faulty section is not available.

Section 16 Factory Default Settings
Factory Default Settings..................................................................................................................................... 16.2

Setup........................................................................................................................................................ 16.2
Admit/Discharge............................................................................................................................. 16.2
Alarm.............................................................................................................................................. 16.3
All Beds Screen Setup................................................................................................................... 16.3
Individual Bed Screen Setup.......................................................................................................... 16.5
Parameter Priority.......................................................................................................................... 16.5
Recording....................................................................................................................................... 16.6
Report............................................................................................................................................ 16.6
Parameter Setup............................................................................................................................ 16.7
Review...................................................................................................................................................... 16.9
Review Menu.................................................................................................................................. 16.9
Trend............................................................................................................................................ 16.10
Tabular Trend................................................................................................................................ 16.11
Full Disclosure.............................................................................................................................. 16.12
Expanded Waveform.................................................................................................................... 16.13
Event List..................................................................................................................................... 16.14
ST Recall...................................................................................................................................... 16.14
Arrhythmia Recall......................................................................................................................... 16.14
SpO2 Trend................................................................................................................................... 16.15
ECG 12 Lead Analysis................................................................................................................. 16.16
Alarm Events................................................................................................................................ 16.16
All Beds Alarms............................................................................................................................ 16.16 16
System Setup......................................................................................................................................... 16.17
Sound Control.............................................................................................................................. 16.17

16. FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS
This section explains the setting items, description and factory default settings on
this manual.
Factory Default Settings
“—”, “OK”, and “NO” in the Copy Bed Settings, Backup Settings, and Copy
System Settings columns mean as follows:
OK: The copy bed settings, copy system settings and backup settings are
available.
NO: The copy bed settings, copy system settings and backup settings are not
available.
—: The displayed setting is the setting maintained on the bed. So the copy bed
settings, copy system settings and backup settings are not available.
Setup
Admit/Discharge
Copy Copy
Backup
Item Settings Bed System
Settings
Settings Settings
Bed Name Up to 10 alphanumeric characters — — —
Monitored
Select from the 10 groups and “None”. OK OK NO
group
Patient ID Up to 16 alphanumeric characters
Patient Name Up to 32 alphanumeric characters
Height 0.1 to 299.9 cm / 0 to 9 ft, 0.0 to 11.9 inch
Weight 0.1 to 449.9 kg / 0.1 to 654.9 lb
BSA Automatically calculated when the height and weight are entered.
Admit/ Date of Birth YYYY-MM-DD
Discharge From 0 years 0 months to 127 years 11 months
Automatically calculated when the date of birth is entered. You — — —
Age
can also enter the age manually. When the bedside monitor in the
network has day data, the day can be synchronized.
Gender Male, Female, unknown
Blood Type A−, A+, B−, B+, AB−, AB+, O−, O+, unknown
Physician Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
Up to 200 alphanumeric characters, up to 8 lines when inserting the
Diagnosis
line
Note Up to 64 alphanumeric characters NO OK NO

Alarm
Copy Copy
Backup
Settings
Settings Settings
Alarm Limits Refer to “Setting Alarm Limits” in Section 5.
Arrhythmia Alarm Refer to “Setting the Arrhythmia Alarm” in Section 5. –– –– ––
ST Alarm Refer to “Setting the ST Alarm” in Section 5.
All Beds Screen Setup

Factory Copy Copy
Backup
Item Settings Default Bed System
Settings
Setting Settings Settings
Auto, Auto + 1 ECG, Auto + 2 ECG, Auto + 1
Display Settings
Manual ECG
I, II, III, aVR,
aVL, aVF, V1
ECG
to 6, V, MCL, ×1/4, ×1/2, ×3/4, ×1, ×3/2, ×2, ×4 ×1
ECG1, ECG2
Trace1, Trace2
0-20, 0-50, 0-75, 0-100, 0-160, 0-200,
0-300, 50-200, Customize scale 0-200
ART, ART2, RAD, (mmHg)
DORS, AO, FEM,
LVP, P1 to 8 0.0-3.0, 0.0-7.0, 0.0-10.0, 0.0-14.0,
0.0-22.0, 0.0-28.0, 0.0-40.0, 7.0-28.0, 0.0-28.0
Customize scale (kPa)
0-20, 0-50, 0-75, 0-100, 0-160, 0-200,
0-300, 50-200, Customize scale 0-50
UV, PAP, CVP, RAP, (mmHg)
RVP, LAP, ICP, ICP2
to 4 0.0-3.0, 0.0-7.0, 0.0-10.0, 0.0-14.0,
0.0-22.0, 0.0-28.0, 0.0-40.0, 7.0-28.0, 0.0-7.0

Sensitivity/Scale
Wave 0-20, 0-50, 0-75, 0-100, 0-160, 0-200,

0-300, 50-200, Customize scale 0-100 OK OK NO
Selection
(mmHg)
UA
0.0-3.0, 0.0-7.0, 0.0-10.0, 0.0-14.0,
0.0-22.0, 0.0-28.0, 0.0-40.0, 7.0-28.0, 0.0-14.0 16
RESP, RESP (IMP),
×1/4, ×1/2, ×3/4, ×1, ×3/2, ×2, ×4 ×3/4
RESP (THM)
SpO2, SpO2-2 ×1/8, ×1/4, ×1/2, ×1, ×2, ×4, ×8 ×1
0-40, 0-60, 0-80, 0-120, 0-150,
0-80
CO2, CO2 (EXT), CO2 Customize scale (mmHg)
(GAS) 0.0-5.5, 0.0-8.0, 0.0-10.5, 0.0-16.0,
0.0-10.5
0.0-20.0, Customize scale (kPa)
0-40, 0-60, 30-602, 0-100, Customize
O2, O2 (GAS) 0-60
scale (%)
FLOW, FLOW (EXT),
−1-1, −2-2, −3-3 (L/s) −1-1
FLOW (GAS)
0-50, 0-100, 0-500, 0-1000, 0-2000,
VOL 0-1000
0-3000
PAW, PAW (EXT), 0-10, 0-20, 0-50, 0-100, 0-150,
0-50
PAW (GAS) Customize scale (cmH2O/hPa)

Factory Copy Copy

Backup
Settings
0-80, 0-100, 50-100, Customize scale
N2O (GAS) 0-80
(%)
Sensitivity/Scale GAS1, GAS2
0.0-6.0, 0.0-10.0, 0.0-20.0, Customize
0.0-6.0
Wave scale (%)
Selection EEG1 (BIS) ×1/8, ×1/4, ×1/2, ×1, ×2, ×4, ×8 ×1
EXT1 to EXT4 ×1/8, ×1/4, ×1/2, ×1, ×2, ×4, ×8 ×1
10, 20, 30, 50, 70, 100, 150, 200, 300,
EEG1 to EEG8 100
500, 750, 1000, 1500, 2000 (μV/cm)
Numerical
Display Settings Auto, Manual Auto
Selection
All Beds Numeric Area*1 Normal, Wide Normal
All Beds Numeric Size*1 Normal, Large Normal
Other
HR+VPC+
HR Display HR+VPC+ST, HR Only
ST
• Screen Admit/
Individual Waveforms, Individual Discharge,

Numeric Vital Signs, ECG 12 Alarm
Leads Limits,
• Personal Setup All Beds OK OK NO
Admit/Discharge, Alarm Limits, Screen
Arrhythmia Alarm, ST Alarm Setup,
• Other Setup Tabular
All Beds Screen Setup, Individual Trend,
Bed Screen Setup, Parameter Arrhythmia
Priority, Function Keys, Recording, Recall,
Report Event List
Function Keys • Parameter Setup
ECG, RESP, SpO2, NIBP, PRESS,
TEMP, Anesthesia Gas
• Review
Trend, Tabular Trend, Full
Disclosure, Expanded Waveform,
ST Recall, Arrhythmia Recall,
Hemodynamics List, ECG 12 Lead
Analysis, Event List, Alarm Events,
SpO2 Trend, Review*2
• Operation
NIBP Measurement, Learn ECG
• None
*1 [All Beds Numeric Area] and [All Beds Numeric Size] settings cannot be used when monitoring 24 or 32 beds.
*2 The Review window that is displayed when [Review] on the Individual Bed window is touched is displayed. (Default: Custom
Review)

Individual Bed Screen Setup
Factory Copy Copy

Backup
Settings
Auto, Auto + 1 ECG, Auto + 2 ECG,
Display Settings Auto + 2 ECG
Individual Bed Screen Setup
Wave Selection Manual

Sensitivity/Scale Same as those at All Beds Screen Setup
Display Settings Auto, Manual Auto
Numerical
Selection Empty Parameter
Fill, Leave Empty Leave Empty OK OK NO
Areas
Sweep Speed 50 ms, 25 ms 25 ms
Respiration Wave
Other 25 ms, 6.25 ms 25 ms
Sweep Speed
BP Scale Separate, Common, High/Low Pressure Separate
Parameter Priority
Copy Copy
Backup
Settings
Settings Settings
Select from all the parameters which can be displayed on this
Parameter Priority OK OK NO
central monitor.
Parameter Priority Factory Default Settings

Priority Parameter Priority Parameter Priority Parameter Priority Parameter
1 HR 25 P4 49 T1 72 VENT (EXT)
2 VPC 26 P5 50 T2 73 GAS
3 ST 27 P6 51 T3 74 BIS
4 ART 28 P7 52 T4 75 EXT
5 ART2 29 P8 53 T5 76 EEG1
6 RAD 30 NIBP 54 T6 77 EEG2
7 DORS 31 CNIBP 55 T7 78 EEG3
8 AO 32 RESP 56 T8 79 EEG4
9 FEM 33 RESP (IMP) 57 Delta T 80 EEG5 16
10 UA 34 RESP (THM) 58 Delta T2 81 EEG6
11 UV 35 SpO2 59 Delta T3 82 EEG7
12 PAP 36 SpO2-2 60 Delta T4 83 EEG8
13 CVP 37 Delta SpO2 61 Tb 84 rSO2-1
14 RAP 38 PR 62 CCO 85 rSO2-2
15 RVP 39 Tskin 63 Tb (CCO) 86 rSO2-3
16 LAP 40 Tskin2 64 SvO2 (CCO) 87 rSO2-4
17 LVP 41 Tskin3 65 PiCCO 88 QTc
18 ICP 42 Trect 66 esCCO 89 QRSd
19 ICP2 43 Tcore 67 CO2
20 ICP3 44 Tnaso 68 O2
21 ICP4 45 Teso tcPO2/PCO2
69
22 P1 46 Ttymp (EXT)
23 P2 47 Tblad 70 FLOW
24 P3 48 Taxil 71 Paw

Recording
Factory Copy Copy

Backup
Settings
Depends
First Wave, Second
Record Wave Measured parameters on the
Wave, Third Wave
bed
Alarm Limits
Recording
Recording
Alarm Recording ON, OFF OFF OK OK NO
Arrhythmia Record
Call Recording
OFF, Periodic Recording, Clock Time
Periodic Recording* OFF
Periodic Recording
Recording Sweep Speed 25 mm/s, 50 mm/s 25 mm/s
* When the Clock Time Periodic Recording on the [Recording] of the System Setup window is changed, this setting returns to the
factory default setting (OFF). When the Clock Time Periodic Recording on the System Setup window is changed, also check this
setting.
Report
Factory Copy Copy

Backup
Settings
Report Mode Manual, Periodic Manual OK OK NO
Saved Data Range Display only — — —
Print Start Time Blank
Manual mode Free setting OK OK NO
Print End Time Blank
Print Range Display only — — —
1 hour, 2 hours, 4 hours, 8 hours,
Report Interval 8 hours
12 hours, 24 hours OK OK NO
Report
Periodic mode Free setting 16:00

Print Start Time
Display only — — —
Duration Free setting 1 hour
Trend, Tabular Trend, Full Disclosure,
Expanded Waveform, Arrhythmia Recall, OK OK NO
Report Items Trend
ST Recall, Hemodynamics List, ECG 12
Lead Analysis, Event List, Alarm Events
Up to 500 alphanumeric characters, up to
Nurse Notes — NO OK NO
11 lines when inserting the line

Parameter Setup
Factory Copy Copy

Backup
Settings
Refer to “Setting Alarm Limits”
Main HR alarm
in Section 5.
Refer to “Setting the Arrhythmia
Arrhythmia Alarm *1
Alarm” in Section 5.
Refer to “Setting the ST Alarm”
ST Alarm
in Section 5.
Arrhythmia
ON, OFF ON*2
Analysis
Analysis
Single, Multi Multi*2
Mode
Analysis Arrhythmia
I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V1 to
Detection II*2
Arrhythmia V6, V, MCL, ECG1, ECG2
Lead 1
Analysis
Setting Arrhythmia I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V1 –– –– —
Detection to V6, V, MCL, ECG1, ECG2, NONE*2
Lead 2 NONE
QRS
QRS Detection Adult, Child, Neonate Adult*2
Detection
ECG
Type
Sensitivity
Sensitivity*3 ×1/4, ×1/2, ×3/4, ×1, ×3/2, ×2, ×4 ×1*2
ISO Point 0 to 248 80
ST Point
ST Point 0 to 340 108
QTc Display ON, OFF OFF
QRSd Display ON, OFF OFF
QTc/QRSd
ALL, TRACE1, I, II, III, aVR,
QTc/QRSd Lead ALL
aVL, aVF, V1 to V6
Detection ON, OFF ON*2
Pacing
Mark ON, OFF ON OK OK NO
Hum Filter ON, OFF ON*2
AUTO LEAD CHANGE ON, OFF OFF*2
Other ECG Measurement ON, OFF ON*2
I, II, III, aVR,
Limb Lead I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V1 to
ECG Leads aVL, aVF*2*4
V6, V, MCL, ECG1, ECG2 –– –– ––
Chest Lead ––*2*4
OFF, ON, Maximum, Monitor,
16
ECG Filter*5 OFF
ST, Diagnosis
Main Alarm limits *1
in Section 5.
RR, RR (IMP), RR (THM), RR
Display
RR Display (CO2), RR (FLOW), RR (EXT), RR OK OK NO
RESP
Settings
RR (GAS)
Sensitivity ×1/4, ×1/2, ×3/4, ×1, ×3/2, ×2, ×4 ×1*2
Other Impedance Respiration
ON, OFF ON*2
Measurement
SpO2

in Section 5.
–– –– ––
Alarm limits *1
in Section 5.
NIBP
Main Manual, STAT, 1 min, 2 min,

2.5 min, 5 min, 10 min, 15 min,
Measurement Interval Manual*2
30 min, 60 min, 2 hours, 4 hours,
8 hours

Factory Copy Copy

Backup
Settings
in Section 5.
Label that –– –– ––
Refer to “PRESS Settings” in
Label Name is currently
Section 12.
Label measured.*2
Name/ CVP, ICP,
Display ICP2-4:
PRESS
Pattern Display
Display S/D/M, MEAN MEAN
Pattern
Settings Others:
S/D/M OK OK NO
Separate, Common, High/Low
BP Scale Separate
Pressure
PPV/SPV PPV, SPV, OFF OFF
CPP ON, OFF OFF
Other Pulse Detection Sensitivity Adult/Child, Neonate Adult/Child*2
in Section 5.
Temperature –– –– ––
TEMP
that is
Display Label Name Refer to “TEMP Settings” in currently
Settings Section 12. measured.*2
Delta T T1 − T2*2
CO2 (GAS), O2 (GAS),
N2O (GAS), GAS1,
Numeric Data All settings
FLOW (GAS), Paw (GAS),
GAS2
Anesthesia Gas
ETCO2 (GAS), CO2 (I) (GAS),

Display N2O (E) (GAS), N2O (I) (GAS), –– –– ––
Settings O2 (E) (GAS), O2 (I) (GAS),
HAL (E) (GAS), HAL(I) (GAS),
Waves All settings
ISO (E) (GAS), ISO (I) (GAS),
ENF (E) (GAS), ENF (I) (GAS),
DES (E) (GAS), DES (I) (GAS),
SEV (E) (GAS), SEV (I) (GAS)
*1 • For a bed being monitored through the ORG-9100 series, “Alarm Master 1” is set as the default. Any other bedside monitor
depends on the setup value on the bed side.
• For a bed being monitored through the ORG-9100 series, “Alarm Master 1” is set as the default when the following operation is
performed: Discharge, Delete data, or Delete data upon transmitter channel change. Any other bedside monitor depends on the
setup value on the bed side.
*2 Depends on the settings at the bedside monitor.
*3 QRS Detection Sensitivity can be set only when the QRS Detection Type is set to “Child”.
*4 Depends on the monitoring leads at the central monitor.

Review
Review Menu
Copy Copy
Factory Default Backup
Setting Settings
Settings Settings
Custom Review to Hemodynamics
Displayed review pattern Custom Review
List
Frame Name Up 16 alphanumeric characters Custom Review
Upper Trend, Tabular Trend, Full Disclosure, Tabular Trend OK OK NO

Custom Expanded Waveform, Event List,
Review Displayed ST Recall, Arrhythmia Recall,
Review Window
SpO2 Trend, ECG 12 Lead Analysis,
Lower Hemodynamics List, Alarm Events Trend
Fixed display
Displayed Review
Displayed Pattern
Window
Upper Tabular Trend
Frame Name Tabular Trend
Lower Trend
Upper Trend
Trend
Lower Expanded Waveform
Upper Trend
Trend
Lower Alarm Events
Tabular Trend to Hemodynamics List
Full Upper Full Disclosure

Disclosure Lower Expanded Waveform
Arrhythmia Upper Arrhythmia Recall
Recall Lower Full Disclosure
Upper Event List
Event List
Lower Expanded Waveform — — —
Upper Alarm Events
Alarm Events
Lower Expanded Waveform
Full Disclosure (Full size
Full Disclosure
Displayed Review display)
Window ECG 12 Lead Analysis (Full
size display)
16
ST Recall ST Recall (Full size display)
Hemodynamics List (Full
Hemodynamics List
size display)

Trend
Copy Copy
Setting Settings
Settings Settings
Trend 1, Trend 2, Trend 3, Common
Displayed trendgraph Trend 1
Scale
Displayed
Trendgraph: 3 parameters
Parameters and
Event Trend: 6 events
Events
Monitoring
Select from the monitoring parameters
parameters when the
and parameters set on [Parameter
screen is displayed
Trend Parameter Selection] of System Setup screen.
at the start of
Setting Excluding the parameters which
monitoring and the
cannot be displayed on this central
parameter of the top
monitor.
3 priority.
ASYSTOLE, V FIB, V TACHY, EXT
TACHY, EXT BRADY, VPC RUN,
V BRADY, SV TACHY, PAUSE,
TACHYCARDIA, BRADYCARDIA,
ASYSTOLE, V FIB,
COUPLET, EARLY VPC,
Arrhythmia V TACHY, VPC
MULTIFORM, V RHYTHM,
RUN
BIGEMINY, TRIGEMINY, FREQ.
VPC, VPC, IRREGULAR RR,
Trend 1, 2
Event Setting
PROLONGED RR, NO PACER

PULSE, PACER NON-CAPTURE
HR, PR, ST, RR, APNEA, NIBP,
SpO2, ART (ART2, RAD, DORS, AO,
Limit FEM), CVP, PAP, ICP ALL, TEMP NONE
ALL, O2, CO2, GAS ALL, BIS, EEG,
rSO2
ECG Technical, SpO2 Technical,
ART+NIBP, TEMP Technical, CO2
ECG Technical,
Technical Technical, SIGNAL LOSS OK OK NO
SIGNAL LOSS
Trend
(COMMUNICATION LOSS
(wired)), BATTERY
Scale Setting Refer to Section 9.
Display
MAX - MIN, AVE MAX - MIN
Setting
VPC
1 min, Integrate 1 min
Display
Displayed
Parameters and
Events
Monitoring
parameters when the
screen is displayed
Trend Parameter
at the start of
Setting
monitoring and the
Same as Trend 1 7 priority.
Trend 3 ASYSTOLE,
Event Setting
Arrhythmia V FIB,
V TACHY
Limit NONE
Technical NONE
Display
MAX-MIN, AVE MAX-MIN
Setting
VPC
Display

Copy Copy
Setting Settings
Settings Settings
Displayed
Parameters and
Events
Monitoring
parameters when the
screen is displayed
Trend Parameter
at the start of
Setting
monitoring and the
Common
Scale
Same as Trend 1 4 priority.
Trend
OK OK NO
ASYSTOLE,
Event Setting
Arrhythmia V FIB,
V TACHY
Limit NONE
Technical NONE
Displayed time width 12 hours, 24 hours, 48 hours, 8 hours
96 hours, 120 hours
Tabular Trend
Copy Copy
Setting Settings
Settings Settings
Vital Sign 1, Vital Sign 2,
Displayed tabular trend Vital Sign 1
Vital Sign 3, Vital Sign 4, NIBP
Select from the monitoring
parameters and parameters set on Monitoring
[Parameter Selection] of System parameters when
Trend Parameter
Setup screen. the screen is
Setting
Excluding the parameters which displayed at the
Vital Sign 1 cannot be displayed on this central start of monitoring.
to monitor.
Vital Sign 4
+ NIBP ON, OFF OFF 16
Tabular Trend
VPC OK OK NO
Display
1 min, 2 min, 5 min, 10 min,
Displayed time width 5 min
15 min, 30 min, 60 min
Select from the monitoring
parameters and parameters set on
[Parameter Selection] of System Monitoring
Setup screen. parameters when
Trend Parameter
NIBP NIBP SYS, NIBP DIA, NIBP MAP the screen is
Setting
display is fixed. displayed at the
Excluding the parameters which start of monitoring.
monitor.

Full Disclosure
Copy Copy
Setting Settings
Settings Settings
Displayed expanded Single Wave, ECG 12 Lead, All
Single Wave
waveform Waves, Custom
Stored Waveform Setting
1-16 (common setting for Auto, Manual Auto OK OK NO
each window)
Sensitivity/Scale
Same as the All Beds Screen Setup.
Setting
Displayed Select from the parameters that 1: TRACE 1
NO NO NO
Single Wave 1 to 16 have the waveform data. 2 to 16: NONE
Wave Waveform
ON, OFF OFF
Alarm Color
Display Pacing
ON, OFF ON OK OK NO
Mark
Sensitivity/Scale
Setting
1: I 2: II
3: III 4: aVR
5: aVL 6: aVF
Displayed Select from the parameters that
7: V1 8: V2 NO NO NO
ECG 12 Wave 1 to 16 have the waveform data.
9: V3 10: V4
Lead
Full Disclosure
11: V5 12: V6
13 to 16: NONE
Waveform
ON, OFF OFF
Alarm Color
Display Pacing
ON, OFF ON OK OK NO
Mark
Sensitivity/Scale
Setting
16 monitoring
Displayed Select from the parameters that parameters
NO NO NO
All Wave 1 to 16 have the waveform data. according to the
Waves priority
Waveform
ON, OFF OFF
Alarm Color
Display Pacing
ON, OFF ON
Mark
Sensitivity/Scale
Setting
Displayed Select from the parameters that 1: I OK OK NO
Wave 1 to 16 have the waveform data. 2 to 16: NONE
Custom
Waveform
ON, OFF OFF
Alarm Color
Display Pacing
ON, OFF ON
Mark
Interval 10 s, 20 s, 30 s, 60 s, 90 s 60 s

Expanded Waveform
Copy Copy
Setting Settings
Settings Settings
Displayed expanded Single Wave, ECG 12 Lead, All
All Stored Waves
waveform Waves, Custom
OK OK NO
Sensitivity/Scale
Same as the All Beds Screen Setup
Setting
Displayed Select from the parameters that 1: TRACE 1
NO NO NO
Single
Wave Sweep Speed* 6.25 mm/s, 25 mm/s, 50 mm/s 25 mm/s
Waveform
ON, OFF OFF
Alarm Color
Display Pacing OK OK NO
ON, OFF ON
Mark
Sensitivity/Scale
Setting
1: I 2: II
3: III 4: aVR
5: aVL 6: aVF
Displayed Select from the parameters that
7: V1 8: V2 NO NO NO
Wave 1 to 16 have the waveform data.
ECG 12 9: V3 10: V4
Lead 11: V5 12: V6
13 to 16: NONE
Expanded Waveform
Sweep Speed* 6.25 mm/s, 25 mm/s, 50 mm/s 25 mm/s

Waveform
ON, OFF OFF
Alarm Color
Display Pacing OK OK NO
ON, OFF ON
Mark
Sensitivity/Scale
Setting
16 monitoring
Displayed Select from the parameters that parameters
NO NO NO
Wave 1 to 16 have the waveform data. according to the
All priority
Waves
Sweep Speed* 6.25 mm/s, 25 mm/s, 50 mm/s 25 mm/s
Waveform
ON, OFF OFF
Alarm Color
Display Pacing
16
ON, OFF ON
Mark
Sensitivity/Scale
Setting
Displayed Select from the parameters that 1: I OK OK NO
Custom Sweep Speed* 6.25 mm/s, 25 mm/s, 50 mm/s 25 mm/s
Waveform
ON, OFF OFF
Alarm Color
Display Pacing
ON, OFF ON
Mark
Display Zoom* × 1, × 2, × 4 ×1
* The sweep speed can be set when the window is displayed in full size.

Event List
Copy Copy
Setting Settings
Settings Settings
Event Arrhythmia, Limit, Technical, System,
Displayed event ALL OK OK NO
List Comment, Caliper, ALL
ST Recall
Copy Copy
Setting Settings
Settings Settings
I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V1 to 6, V, I, II, III, aVR, aVL,
Displayed lead
MCL, ECG1, ECG2 aVF, V1 to 6
ST Recall
× 1/4, × 1/2, × 3/4, × 1, × 2/3,

Displayed sensitivity ×1 OK OK NO
× 2, × 4
1 min, 5 min, 10 min, 30 min,
Interval 5 min
60 min
Arrhythmia Recall
Copy Copy
Setting Settings
Settings Settings
Display pattern Waveform Display, List Display Waveform Display
ASYSTOLE, V FIB, V TACHY,

ALL
Arrhythmia Recall
Displayed arrhythmia EXT TACHY, EXT BRADY,

VPC RUN, V BRADY, SV TACHY,
PAUSE, TACHYCARDIA,
BRADYCARDIA, COUPLET, OK OK NO
EARLY VPC, MULTIFORM, Depends on the
Create Recall V RHYTHM, BIGEMINY, settings at the bedside
Waveform TRIGEMINY, VPC, A-FIB, monitor
IRREGULAR RR, PROLONGED
RR, NO PACER PULSE, PACER
NON-CAPTURE, MANUAL*, ALL
* Can be set on displayed arrhythmia.

SpO2 Trend
Copy Copy
Setting Settings
Settings Settings
SpO2 Trend 1, SpO2 Trend 2 SpO2 Trend 1 NO NO NO
Displayed trendgraph
Displayed parameters Trendgraph: 3 parameters
— — NO
and events Event trendgraph: 5 events
Select from the monitoring parameters
and parameters set on [Parameter
Trend Parameter Selection] of System Setup screen.
SpO2, RR, HR
Setting Excluding the parameters which
monitor.
ASYSTOLE, V FIB, V TACHY,
EXT TACHY, EXT BRADY,
VPC RUN, V BRADY, SV TACHY,
PAUSE, TACHYCARDIA,
BRADYCARDIA, COUPLET,
Arrhythmia EARLY VPC, MULTIFORM,
V RHYTHM, BIGEMINY,
TRIGEMINY, FREQ. VPC, VPC,
SpO2 A-FIB, End A-FIB, IRREGULAR
Trend 1 RR, PROLONGED RR, NO PACER SpO2, SpO2 fall,
APNEA, OK OK NO
Event
PULSE, PACER NON-CAPTURE

V TACHY,
HR, PR, ST, RR, APNEA, NIBP,
V BRADY
SpO2, ART (ART2, RAD, DORS, AO,
Limit FEM), CVP, PAP, ICP ALL, TEMP
SpO2 Trend
ALL, O2, CO2, GAS ALL, BIS, EEG,

SpO2 fall, rSO2
ECG Technical, SpO2 Technical,
ART+NIBP, TEMP Technical,
Technical CO2 Technical, SIGNAL LOSS,
COMMUNICATION LOSS,
BATTERY
Display Setting MAX - MIN, AVE MAX - MIN
Threshold Calm: 0 to 100% 95%
Setting Fall: 0 to 100% 4%
Displayed parameters Trendgraph: 5 parameters 16
— — NO
and events Event trendgraph: 3 events
Trend Parameter SpO2, RR, HR,
Setting NIBP
Arrhythmia Same as SpO2 Trend 1
SpO2, SpO2 fall,
Event
SpO2 Limit
Trend 2 APNEA
Technical
OK OK NO
Display Setting MAX - MIN, AVE MAX - MIN
Threshold Calm: 0 to 100% 95%
Setting Fall: 0 to 100% 4%
Displayed time width 8 hours
12 hours, 24 hours
End Time 0:00 to 23:59 17:00

Copy Copy
Setting Settings
Settings Settings
Analysis Wave (3 rows × 4 column),
Analysis Wave (6 rows × 2 column),
ECG 12 Lead
Analysis Wave (12 rows × 1 column), Analysis Wave

NO NO NO
Analysis
Displayed window Averaged Wave (3 rows × 4 column), (3 rows × 4 column)

Analysis Wave Comparison, Averaged
Wave Comparison
Sensitivity × 1/4, × 1/2, × 3/4, × 1, × 2/3, × 2, × 4 ×1
OK OK NO
Rhythm lead I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V1 to 6 II
Alarm Events
Factory Copy Copy

Backup
Settings
Displayed window Limit or Tech, Arrhy or Tech Limit or Tech
Frame Name Arrhy or Tech (fixed)

Alarm Events
Arrhy or Tech
Display event Refer to Section 9.
Frame Name Limit or Tech (fixed) OK OK NO
Limit or Tech
Displayed event Refer to Section 9.
Displayed time width 12 hours, 24 hours, 48 hours, 8 hours
96 hours, 120 hours
All Beds Alarms
Copy Copy
Setting Settings
Settings Settings
Display Setting Admitted Patient, Group A to J*1 Admitted Patient
All Beds Alarm Events
Vital Alarm Event, Arrhythmia Alarm NO NO

Alarm Types Vital Alarm Event
Event, Technical Alarm Event
NO
Main Display, Second Display,
Change Disp.*2 All Display OK OK
All Display
Display time width 12 hours, 24 hours, 48 hours, 8 hours NO NO
96 hours, 120 hours
Display Setting Admitted Patient, Group A to J*1 Admitted Patient NO NO
All Beds Limits
Main Display, Second Display, NO

Change Disp.*2 All Display OK OK
All Display
*1 Group name is displayed as set in [Pre-registration] → [Group Color] of the System Setup screen.
*2 Only available when monitoring with dual displays.

System Setup
Sound Control
Factory Copy
Copy Bed Backup
Item Settings Default System
Settings Settings
Setting Settings
Alarm Alarm Volume 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 3
Sound Control
Sync Sound ON, OFF OFF OK OK

Sync Sound Pitch High, Low High
NO
Sync Sound Sync Sound Bed Current Bed, Selected Bed Current Bed NO NO
Sync Sound
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 3 OK OK
Volume
16

Section 17 Reference
Specifications..................................................................................................................................................... 17.2
Display...................................................................................................................................................... 17.2
Full Disclosure Window............................................................................................................................ 17.3
Arrhythmia Recall Window....................................................................................................................... 17.3
ST Recall Window.................................................................................................................................... 17.3
Trend Window........................................................................................................................................... 17.3
Hemodynamics List Window.................................................................................................................... 17.3
ECG 12 Lead Analysis Window................................................................................................................ 17.4
Report Window......................................................................................................................................... 17.4
Overview Bed Window............................................................................................................................. 17.4
Alarm........................................................................................................................................................ 17.4
Recording................................................................................................................................................. 17.4
Printing..................................................................................................................................................... 17.5
Operation.................................................................................................................................................. 17.5
Sound and Light Output........................................................................................................................... 17.5
Data Output.............................................................................................................................................. 17.5
Network.................................................................................................................................................... 17.5
System Settings....................................................................................................................................... 17.5
Saving Data.............................................................................................................................................. 17.6
Performance............................................................................................................................................. 17.6
LCD Display............................................................................................................................................. 17.6
Environment............................................................................................................................................. 17.6
Power Requirements................................................................................................................................ 17.6
Acoustic Energy (noise)........................................................................................................................... 17.7
Mechanical Strength................................................................................................................................. 17.7 17
Dimensions and Weight (approximate, without protrusion)...................................................................... 17.7
Safety Standard........................................................................................................................................ 17.7
Electromagnetic Compatibility.................................................................................................................. 17.8
Electromagnetic Emissions...................................................................................................................... 17.8
Electromagnetic Immunity........................................................................................................................ 17.9
Recommended Separation Distances between Portable and Mobile RF Communications
Equipment.............................................................................................................................................. 17.11
System Composition for EMC Test......................................................................................................... 17.11
European Community CE Notice........................................................................................................... 17.12
Standard Accessories...................................................................................................................................... 17.13
PU-621R Central Monitor Processing Unit............................................................................................. 17.13
Options and Consumables............................................................................................................................... 17.13
PU-621R Central Monitor Processing Unit............................................................................................. 17.13
LCD Display........................................................................................................................................... 17.14
WS-960P Recorder Unit......................................................................................................................... 17.14
General Requirements for Connecting Medical Electrical Systems................................................................. 17.15

17. REFERENCE
Specifications
Display
All Beds screen
Number of patients: Up to 32 patients
Number of waveform traces: More than 1 trace/patient (Up to 16 patients)
Sweep speed: 6.25, 25, 50 mm/s (when 24 inch LCD display is used)
Waveform selection: Maximum 16 traces/auto
Waveform display: ECG, IBP, respiration wave, EEG, ETCO2, external input, pulse wave (SpO2),
FLOW/Paw, others depends on the connected bedside monitor or transmitter
Number of numeric data: More than 3 parameters/patient (less than 3 parameters are also available)
Numerical selection: Up to 17 parameters/auto
Numeric data display: Heart rate, VPC rate, respiration rate, pulse rate, IBP (systolic, diastolic, mean),
NIBP (systolic, diastolic, MAP), temperature, ΔT, blood temperature, ETCO2,
tcPO2, tcPCO2, SpO2, ST level, O2, CO, CCO, PiCCO, PCCO, PCCI, ScvO2,
AP-Sys, AP-Dias, AP-Mean, Tb (EXT), ventilator, anesthetic gas, BIS, others
depends on the connected bedside monitor or transmitter
Numeric data display size: Numeric data display size depends on the parameters
Waveform and numeric data display color: 32 colors
Alarm indication: Displays for each bed. Frame of alarmed bed lights or blinks*, highlighted
message for arrhythmia (when arrhythmia is detected)*, highlighted numeric
data (when vital signs alarms are generated)*, alarm sound* (Volume can be
adjusted.* Minimum volume is more than 45 dB. Minimum volume can be set
by the administrator.), alarm indicator lights
Alarm silence: Displays alarm silence icon or silence icon with remaining minutes.
Alarm can be silence for each patient.
Alarm reset: Displays alarm reset (audio off) icon when the monitored bed is a vital sign
telemeter.
Recording: Alarm recording, manual recording, all beds recording
Alarm recording starts when an alarm is generated even which screen is
displayed.
Sync sound: Displays QRS sync icon at the selected patient data display area. Sync sound is
generated from the speaker (volume can be adjusted). Sync sound is generated
even which screen is displayed. Alarm indicator lights.

Number of waveform traces: Up to 16 traces. Display area can be selected.
Waveform sensitivity: Selectable
Blood pressure scale: Separate, common, high/low
Learning ECG: Available by touching the LEARN ECG key
Numeric data display: Monitoring numeric data can be displayed on the left side of the individual bed
window. All monitoring vital signs numeric data are displayed on the individual
numeric vital signs window.
Alarm indication: Highlighted message for arrhythmia (when arrhythmia is detected)*, highlighted
numeric data (when vital signs alarms are generated)*, alarm sound*, alarm
indicator lights
17. REFERENCE
Alarm silence: Displays alarm silence icon or silence icon with remaining minutes.
Alarm can be silence for each bed.
Alarm reset: Displays alarm reset (audio off) icon when the monitored bed is a vital sign
telemeter.
Patient settings: Patient information can be entered when admitting or discharging the patient.
Receiving channel number can be set when using the multiple patient receiver.
Alarm settings can be changed.
Recording: 10 seconds of waveforms (on the network printer), manual recording
Full Disclosure Window

Display formats: Zoom display, expanded waveform display
Saved data: 120 hours/bed
Number of saved waveforms: Up to 16 waveforms
Arrhythmia alarm and waveform color: Depends on the alarm level
Waveform zoom display: Available
Automatic scroll: Available
Full disclosure waveform recording: Available on network printer
Expanded waveform recording: Recorder, network printer
Caliper function: Available
Divider function: Available
Arrhythmia Recall Window

Display formats: List display, waveform display
Number of recall files: 1500 files/bed*
* The data is deleted after 120 hours even the files are less than a maximum
number.
Waveform length: More than 8 seconds (depends on the connected bedside monitor)
Arrhythmia recall recording: Recorder, network printer
ST Recall Window
Display formats: ST file display, comparison display 17
Number of recall files: Up to 120 hours/bed
ST recall file recording: Recorder, network printer
Trend Window
Display formats: Trendgraph, tabular trend
Display times: Up to 120 hours/bed
Zoom in display: 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, 24, 48, 96 or 120 hours
Display interval: 1, 2, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 minutes at NIBP measurement
Parameters: Depends on the connected bedside monitor
Trend recording: Network printer
Tabular trend recording: Network printer
NIBP trend recording: Network printer
Hemodynamics List Window

Display format: Tabular trend
Number of files: 256 files/bed*
number.

17. REFERENCE
Parameters: Depends on the connected bedside monitor

Recording: Network printer
ECG 12 Lead Analysis Window

Display formats: Analyzed waveform, averaged waveform, comparison, report, analyzed numeric
data
Number of files: 200 files/bed*
number.
Displayed data: Depends on the connected bedside monitor
Recording: Network printer
Caliper function: Available
Divider function: Available
Report Window
Printing: Network printer
Printing type: Manual, periodic
Printing items: Bed name, patient information, comment, tabular trend, trendgraph, full
disclosure waveform, expanded waveform, event list, arrhythmia
recall, ST recall, hemodynamics list, ECG 12 lead analysis, alarm event
Printing settings: Interval, printing start time, printing end time
Overview Bed Window

With overview bed function, up to 32 patients plus one other patient’s waveform can be viewed.
Alarm
Alarm indication: Frame of alarmed bed lights or blinks*, highlighted message*, highlighted
numeric data*, alarm sound* and alarm indicator
Alarm type: Arrhythmia, vital signs, technical
Setting method: Default setting applies unless the setting is changed. Settings can be changed on
the Alarm Master window. A group of alarm items can be set all together to one
group of preset setting.
Alarm silence: Alarm silence key is available on each screen.
Alarm On/Off: Available on each bed
Alarm setting range: Depends on the connected bedside monitor
Alarm history: Displayed by event list
Alarm volume: 45 to 85 dB (A) (Requirement of IEC 60601-2-49: 2001) (at 1 m in front of
central monitor) Crisis ≥ Warning ≥ Advisory
Alarm delay time
Delay between alarm occurrence on the central monitor and output of the alarm signal from a device that generates
alarm in the network: ≤5s
Recording
Record unit: WS-960P Recorder Unit
Record type: Manual recording, automatic alarm recording, periodic recording, remote
recording
Recorded items: Patient information, 3 traces of waveforms, waveform information, measurement
data, date and time, recording type and paper speed

17. REFERENCE
Record color: Monochrome
Printing
Print device: Network printer
Print type: Manual recording or periodic recording
Printed items: Patient information, up to 16 traces of waveforms, waveform information,
measurement data, date and time, print type, paper speed
Print color: Monochrome, color
Operation
Touch panel (touch panel/LCD display with speaker), keyboard (option) and
mouse (option)
Sound and Light Output

Sound type: Alarm sound*, QRS sync sound and key clicking sound
Light type: Alarm indicator blinks in green synchronizing with a QRS sync sound.
Alarm indicator blinks or lights in alarm color (red, yellow and cyan)
synchronizing with an alarm sound.
* Essential performance in EMC standard.
Data Output
Available through network
Network
This central monitor has a LS-NET interface and connect to other LS-NET
communication devices and display patient data. Through the LS-NET interface,
data can be output. The communication method complies with the Ethernet
standard.
System Settings
Information: Displays the version and password window. 17
Environment: Settings for the system such as unit settings.
Bed composition: Select the bed to be monitored always or only displays waveform.
ORG Setting: Settings for the ORG-9100 series multiple patient receiver.
GZ Setting: Settings for the vital sign telemeter.
Recorder: Settings for recording.
Mouse: Setting the available range of network mouse.
Parameters: Selecting parameters.
Name registration: Editing the group name.
Waveform color: Setting for waveform display color.
Alarm master: Registering or changing the alarm master.
Function keys: Assigning functions to function keys.
Alarm volume: Setting for the alarm volume.
QRS sync sound: Setting for the QRS sync sound.
Touch panel: Calibrating the touch panel.
Date & Time: Setting for the date and time.
Maintenance: Displays the Maintenance window.

17. REFERENCE
Saving Data
When monitoring a bedside monitor with several central monitors, the data is saved in the one central monitor and other
central monitor refer the data from the central monitor.
Performance
Display type: 24 inch LCD
Resolution (Maximum): 1920 × 1200 dots
Sweep speed: 6.25, 25, 50 mm/s
Memory: More than 1 GB
Processor: Core2Duo 2.2 GHz or better
Bulit-in display interface (compatible with WUXGA)
Built-in USB interface
Built-in sound interface
Built-in network interface
Large-capacity HDD: More than 250 GB
3-ch Recorder (option)
Recording paper: 50 mm width
Paper speed: 25, 50 mm/s
Number of channels: 3
Network printer
Paper size: A4, letter
USB I/F: Touch panel, mouse, bar code reader, USB-serial conversion cable
COM I/F: Alarm indicator, 3-ch recorder
PS/2 I/F: Keyboard
OS: Windows XP Embedded or later
Keyboard, mouse and bar code reader: Available as an option
LCD Display
LCD display: Local purchase
Environment
Operating environment
Temperature: 10 to 40°C (50 to 104°F)
Humidity: 30 to 85%
30 to 80% (PU-621R)
(10 to 40°C, noncondensing)
Atmospheric pressure: 700 to 1060 hPa
Transport and storage environment
Temperature: –20 to +65°C (–4 to +149°F)
–20 to +60°C (PU-621R) (–4 to +140°F)
–15 to +55°C (recording paper) (5 to 131°F)
Humidity: 10 to 95%
20 to 80% (noncondensing) (PU-621R)
Atmospheric pressure: 700 to 1060 hPa
Power Requirements
PU-621R Type I Central Monitor Processing Unit
Line voltage: AC 100 to 240 V
Line frequency: 50, 60 Hz

17. REFERENCE
Power consumption: 180 VA

Rated current: 4.8 to 1.9 A
PU-621R Type II Central Monitor Processing Unit
Line voltage: AC 100 to 240 V
Line frequency: 50, 60 Hz
Power consumption
PU-621R: 180 VA
LCD display
ET2400L-8CJM-1-RMJC-G display from Elo Touch Solutions:
80 VA
ET2403LM-2CWA-1-MT-W-WH-NS-CL-RMJC display from Elo Touch Solutions:
80 VA
WS-960P + SC-611R: 60 VA
Rated current
PU-621R: 2.4 to 1.0 A
LCD display
ET2400L-8CJM-1-RMJC-G display from Elo Touch Solutions:
1.27 to 0.55 A
ET2403LM-2CWA-1-MT-W-WH-NS-CL-RMJC display from Elo Touch Solutions:
2.00 to 1.00 A
WS-960P + SC-611R
Rev. AA to AZ: 1.0 A
Rev. BA or later: 0.63 to 1.20 A
Acoustic Energy (noise)

Equipment used in medically used room
Less than 48 dB
Mechanical Strength
STATIONARY type
17
Dimensions and Weight (approximate, without protrusion)
PU-621R Type I Central Monitor Processing Unit:
115 (W) × 350 (H) × 380 (D) mm, 11 kg
PU-621R Type II Central Monitor Processing Unit:
93 (W) × 335 (H) × 457 (D) mm, 9 kg
Safety Standard
Safety standard: IEC 60601-1: 2012 clause 16 only
IEC 60950-1: 2005*1
IEC 60950-1 Amendment 1: 2009*1
IEC 60950-1 Amendment 2: 2013*1
IEC 60601-1: 1988*2
IEC 60601-1 Amendment 1: 1991*2
IEC 60601-1 Amendment 2: 1995*2
IEC 60601-1: 2005*3
IEC 60601-1 Amendment 1: 2012*3
IEC 60601-1-2: 2007
IEC 62304: 2006

17. REFERENCE
IEC 62366: 2007

*1 IEC 60950-1 applies to the following items.
• PU-621R Central Monitor Processing Unit (Op No. 21K)
• YL-611P/YL-612P Alarm Indicator
• YS-098P1/YS-098P2 Additional Alarm Indicator Unit
• YS-097P5/YS-097P6 VL Cable Set (Main)
• YS-097P8/YS-097P9 VL Cable Set (Second) for Type I
• YS-113P8/YS-113P9 VL Cable Set (Second) for Type II
*2 IEC 60601-1: 1988, IEC 60601-1 Amendment 1: 1991 and IEC 60601-1
Amendment 2: 1995 apply to the following items.
• SC-611R WS-960P Power Supply (Rev. AA to AZ)
*3 IEC 60601-1: 2005 and IEC 60601 Amendment 1: 2012 apply to the
following items.
• SC-611R WS-960P Power Supply (Rev. BA or later)
Type of protection against electrical shock:
CLASS I EQUIPMENT
Degree of protection against harmful ingress of water:
IPX0 (non-protected)
Degree of safety of application in the presence of a FLAMMABLE ANESTHETIC MIXTURE WITH AIR, OR WITH
OXYGEN OR NITROUS OXIDE: Equipment NOT suitable for use in the presence of a FLAMMABLE ANESTHETIC
MIXTURE WITH AIR, OR WITH OXYGEN OR NITROUS OXIDE
Mode of operation: CONTINUOUS OPERATION
Method of cleaning and disinfecting or sterilization:
Equipment NOT suitable for sterilization
ME EQUIPMENT type: STATIONARY type
Electromagnetic Compatibility
IEC 60601-1-2: 2007
Electromagnetic Emissions
This Model CNS-6201 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below.
The customer or the user of the CNS-6201 should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Emissions test Compliance Electromagnetic environment guidance

RF emissions Group 1 The CNS-6201 uses RF energy only for its internal function. Therefore,
CISPR 11 its RF emissions are very low and are not likely to cause any
interference in nearby electronic equipment.
RF emissions Class A The CNS-6201 is suitable for use in all establishments, excluding
CISPR 11 domestic establishments and those directly connected to the public low-
Harmonic emissions Class A voltage power supply network that supplies buildings used for domestic
IEC 61000-3-2 purposes.
Voltage fluctuations/ Applicable
flicker emissions
IEC 61000-3-3

17. REFERENCE
Electromagnetic Immunity
This Model CNS-6201 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below.
The customer or the user of the CNS-6201 should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Immunity test IEC 60601 test level Compliance level Electromagnetic environment - guidance
Electrostatic discharge ±6 kV contact ±6 kV contact Floors should be wood, concrete or ceramic
(ESD) ±8 kV air ±8 kV air tiles. If floors are covered with synthetic
IEC 61000-4-2 material, the relative humidity should be at least
30%.
Electrical fast ±2 kV for power ±2 kV for power Mains power quality should be that of a typical
transient/ burst supply lines supply lines commercial or hospital environment.
IEC 61000-4-4 ±1 kV for input/output ±1 kV for input/output
lines lines
Surge ±1 kV differential ±1 kV differential Mains power quality should be that of a typical
IEC 61000-4-5 mode mode commercial or hospital environment.
±2 kV common mode ±2 kV common mode
Voltage dips, short <5% UT (>95% dip in <5% UT (>95% dip in Mains power quality should be that of a typical
interruptions and UT) for 0.5 cycles UT) for 0.5 cycles commercial or hospital environment.
voltage variations on If the user of the CNS-6201 requires continued
power supply input 40% UT (60% dip in 40% UT (60% dip in operation during power mains interruptions, it
lines UT) for 5 cycles UT) for 5 cycles is recommended that the CNS-6201 be powered
IEC 61000-4-11 from an uninterruptible power supply or a
70% UT (30% dip in 70% UT (30% dip in battery.
UT) for 25 cycles UT) for 25 cycles
<5% UT (>95% dip in <5% UT (>95% dip in

UT) for 5 s UT) for 5 s
Power frequency 3 A/m 3 A/m Power frequency magnetic fields should be at
(50/60 Hz) levels characteristic of a typical location in a
magnetic field typical commercial or hospital environment.
IEC 61000-4-8
NOTE: UT is the AC mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
17

17. REFERENCE
IEC 60601 test

Immunity test Compliance level Electromagnetic environment - guidance
level
Portable and mobile RF communications equipment
should be used no closer to any part of the CNS-6201,
including cables, than the recommended separation
distance calculated from the equation applicable to the
frequency of the transmitter.
Recommended separation distance
Conducted RF 3 Vrms 3 Vrms d = 1.2 P

IEC 61000-4-6
Radiated RF 3 V/m 3 V/m d = 1.2 P 80 MHz to 800 MHz

IEC 61000-4-3 80 MHz to 2.5 GHz d = 2.3 P 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
where P is the maximum output power rating of the

transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter
manufacturer and d is the recommended separation
distance in meters (m).
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as determined

by an electromagnetic site survey*1, should be less than
the compliance level in each frequency range*2.
Interference may occur in the vicinity of equipment

marked with the following symbol:
NOTE 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and
reflection from structures, objects and people.
*1 Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and land mobile
radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy.
To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be
considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which the CNS-6201 is used exceeds the applicable RF
compliance level above, the CNS-6201 should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is
observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as re-orienting or relocating the CNS-6201.
*2 Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than 3 V/m.

17. REFERENCE
Recommended Separation Distances between Portable and Mobile RF

Communications Equipment
The CNS-6201 is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbances are controlled. The
customer or the user of the CNS-6201 can help prevent electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance
between portable and mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and the CNS-6201 as recommended below,
according to the maximum output power of the communications.
Rated maximum output Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter (m)

power of transmitter 150 kHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
(W) d = 1.2 P d = 1.2 P d = 2.3 P
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23
0.1 0.38 0.38 0.73
1 1.2 1.2 2.3
10 3.8 3.8 7.3
100 12 12 23
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation distance d in meters (m)
can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter, where P is the maximum output power
rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and
reflection from structures, objects and people.
System Composition for EMC Test

The CNS-6201 Central Monitor is tested to comply with IEC 60601-1-2: 2007 with the following composition. If any part
which is not specified by Nihon Kohden is used, the EMC specifications might not comply.
PU-621R Type I central monitor processing unit PU-621R Type II central monitor processing unit
Cable Cable
Units Units
Length Length
PU-621R Central Monitor Processing Unit — PU-621R Central Monitor Processing Unit —
VL-611R LCD Unit — ET2403LM-2CWA-1-MT-W-WH-NS-CL-
—
YL-612P Alarm Indicator 5.0 m RMJC display from Elo Touch Solutions
YS-098P2 Alarm Indicator Additional Kit 5.0 m YL-612P Alarm Indicator 5.0 m 17
WS-960P Recorder Unit — YS-098P2 Alarm Indicator Additional Kit 5.0 m
SC-611R WS-960P Power Supply WS-960P Recorder Unit —
WS split cable 2.8 m SC-611R WS-960P Power Supply
HES49-240125 LF or WS split cable 2.8 m
1.98 m
HEMG56-S240215-7 AC adapter HES49-240125 LF or
1.98 m
ND01-AC2500-JPNK Power cord W 2.5 m HEMG56-S240215-7 AC adapter
YS-097P6 VL Cable Set (Main) ND01-AC2500-JPNK Power cord W 2.5 m
RGB cable (DVI-DVI) 5.0 m YS-097P6 VL Cable Set (Main)
USB cable (A-B) 5.0 m RGB cable (DVI-DVI) 5.0 m
Stereo Cable 5.0 m USB cable (A-B) 5.0 m
YS-097P9 VL Cable Set (Second) Stereo Cable 5.0 m
RGB cable (DSUB(S)-DSUB(S)) 5.0 m YS-113P9 VL Cable Set (Second)
USB cable (A-B) 5.0 m RGB cable (DVI-DVI) 5.0 m
RY-910PA Remote Controller — USB cable (A-B) 5.0 m
NE0100 Realforce91 keyboard 1.6 m RY-910PA Remote Controller —
Basic optical mouse 1.7 m NE0100 Realforce91 keyboard 1.6 m
LS2208 Bar Code Reader 2.1 m Basic optical mouse 1.7 m
907012 USB-RS232C CG-USBRS232R 0.4 m LS2208 Bar Code Reader 2.1 m
907012 USB-RS232C CG-USBRS232R 0.4 m

17. REFERENCE
European Community CE Notice

Marking by the symbol indicates compliance of this equipment with the Medical Device Directive (MDD) 93/42/EEC.
Such marking indicates that this equipment meets the following technical standards:
MDD essential requirement
Safety: IEC 60601-1: 2005
IEC 60601-1 Amendment 1: 2012
IEC 60950-1: 2005
Electromagnetic compatibility: IEC 60601-1-2: 2007
Pollution degree (PD): PD2
Over voltage category (OVC): OVC II
Altitude during operation: ≤2000 m

17. REFERENCE
Standard Accessories
NOTE
Use only Nihon Kohden specified parts and accessories to assure
maximum performance from your instrument.

Name Qty
Microsoft Windows license agreement 1
Recovery DVD 1
Ferrite core 1
Operator’s manual 1
Administrator’s guide 1
Service manual 1
Options and Consumables
NOTE
• Use only Nihon Kohden specified options and consumables to assure
maximum performance from your instrument.
• When ordering the following items, specify the supply code. When the
supply code is not provided with the item, specify the model or code
number. 17

CE marking (as of Mar 2015)
Name Qty Model/Code No. Supply Code

For LCD display VL cable set (Main), cable length
1 YS-097P5 ––
(Main) 2.5 m
VL cable set (Main), cable length
1 YS-097P6 ––
5m

17. REFERENCE

For LCD display VL cable set
(Second) (Second), cable 1 YS-097P8 ––
length 2.5 m
Type I
VL cable set
(Second), cable 1 YS-097P9 ––
length 5 m
VL cable set
length 2.5 m
Type II
VL cable set
length 5 m
Alarm indicator Alarm indicator, cable length 2.5 m 1 YL-611P ––
Alarm indicator, cable length 5 m 1 YL-612P ––
Additional alarm indicator unit,
1 YS-098P1 ––
cable length 2.5 m
Additional alarm indicator unit,
1 YS-098P2 ––
cable length 5 m
Recorder unit Recorder unit 1 WS-960P ––
WS-960P power supply 1 SC-611R ––
Software 16 patient software 1 QP-625P ––
24 patient software 1 QP-626P ––
32 patient software 1 QP-627P ––
Software kit 1 QS-056PK ––
Keyboard , Realforce91 (NE-0100) 1 –– ––
Mouse (Basic optical mouse) 1 908109 ––
LS2208 bar code reader 1 –– ––
Remote controller 1 RY-910PA ––
Alkaline batteries, AAA 40 –– X093A
Network printer 1 –– ––
Multiple patient receiver 1 ORG-9100K ––
LCD Display
Name Qty
Power supply adapter 1
Power cord N 1

CE marking (as of Mar 2015)

Recording paper 1 FQW50-2-100 A226
Thermal head cleaner pen 1 40461 ––

17. REFERENCE
General Requirements for Connecting Medical Electrical Systems
When more than one electrical instrument is used, there may be electrical potential difference between the instruments.
Potential difference between instruments may cause current to flow to the patient connected to the instruments, resulting
in electrical shock. Therefore, electrical instruments must be appropriately installed as specified in IEC 60601-1-1: 2000
Second edition.
The following is an extract from IEC 60601-1-1 “Medical electrical equipment Part 1-1: General requirements for safety”,
For details, refer to IEC 60601-1-1 and consult with a biomedical engineer.
Examples of combinations of MEDICAL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT and non-medical electrical equipment
Medically used room

Feasible solution (See
Outside the Non-medically used
Situation No. Inside the PATIENT clause 19 in all
PATIENT room
ENVIRONMENT situations)
ENVIRONMENT
1 1a Items A and B in
PATIENT A B
ENVIRONMENT
IEC IEC
60601 60601
1b Items A and B in For B: Additional

PATIENT A B protective earth or
ENVIRONMENT separating transformer
IEC IEC
60601 XXXXX
1c Item A powered For B: Additional
from specified power A protective earth or
IEC 60601
supply in item B in separating transformer
PATIENT B
ENVIRONMENT IEC XXXXX
2 2a Item A in
PATIENT A B
ENVIRONMENT and 17
IEC IEC
item B in medically
60601 60601
used room
2b Item A in For B: See 19.201 and its
PATIENT A B rationale
ENVIRONMENT and
IEC IEC
item B in medically
60601 XXXXX
used room
3 3a Item A in For B: See 19.201 and its
PATIENT A B rationale
ENVIRONMENT and IEC 60601
IEC or
item B in non-medically
60601 IEC XXXXX
used room
common protective earth
3b Item A in For B: Additional
A B
PATIENT protective earth or
IEC 60601
ENVIRONMENT and SEPARATION DEVICE
IEC or
item B in non-medically
60601 IEC XXXXX
used room
protective earth with
protective earth
potential difference

17. REFERENCE
KEY TO TABLE
• Additional protective earth: If necessary, provide additional protective earthing, which is permanently connected (see also
58.201).
NOTE: Equipment modification may be required.
• Separating transformer: If necessary, limit the ENCLOSURE LEAKAGE CURRENT, by using an additional separating
transformer according to annex EEE.
NOTE 1: No equipment modification is required.
NOTE 2: A separating transformer is a transformer with one or more input winding(s) separated from the output
winding(s) by at least basic insulation [IEC 60989].
• SEPARATION DEVICE: If necessary, apply SEPARATION DEVICE.
• IEC 60601: MEDICAL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT in compliance with IEC 60601.
• IEC XXXXX: Non-medical equipment in compliance with relevant IEC safety standards.
Example of PATIENT ENVIRONMENT

The following is an extract from IEC 60601-1:2005+Amendment 1:2012 Clause 3 Subclause 3.79 Figure A.9.
It is difficult for this standard to define dimensions for the volume in which diagnosis, monitoring or treatment occurs. The
dimensions for the PATIENT ENVIRONMENT given in Figure A.9 have been justified in practice.
1.5 m
1.5 m
1.5 m
NOTE: The dimensions in the figure show minimum extent of the PATIENT ENVIRONMENT in a free surrounding.
Figure A.9 - Example of PATIENT ENVIRONMENT

Manufacturer
NIHON KOHDEN CORPORATION NIHON KOHDEN ITALIA S.r.l.
1-31-4 Nishiochiai, Shinjuku-ku Tokyo 161-8560, Japan Via Fratelli Bronzetti 28, 24124 Bergamo, Italy
Phone +81 3- 5996 -8041 Phone + 39 035-219543
Fax + 39 035-232546
North and South America NIHON KOHDEN UK LTD.

Trident Court 118, 1 Oakcroft Road
NIHON KOHDEN AMERICA, INC. Chessington, Surrey KT9 1BD, UK
15353 Barranca Parkway, Irvine, CA 92618, U.S.A. Phone + 44 20-8391-6800
Toll-free +1-800-325-0283 Fax + 44 20-8391- 6809
Phone +1 949- 580 -1555
Fax +1 949- 580 -1550
Asia
NIHON KOHDEN MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.
Insurgentes Sur 730, Piso 9 Oriente, Col. Del Valle SHANGHAI KOHDEN
C.P. 03100, Delegacion Benito Juarez, Ciudad de Mexico MEDICAL ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENT CORP.
Phone +52 55-8851-5550 No. 567 Huancheng Bei Road
Fax +52 55-8851-5580 Shanghai Comprehensive Industrial Development Zone
Fengxian District, Shanghai 201401, China
NIHON KOHDEN DO BRASIL LTDA. Phone + 86 21-5743-6998
Rua Diadema, 89, 1º andar, conjuntos 11 a 17, bairro Mauá Fax + 86 21-5743-6939
no Município de São Caetano do Sul, Estado de São Paulo
CEP 09580-670, Brasil NIHON KOHDEN SINGAPORE PTE LTD
Phone +55 11-3044-1700 1 Maritime Square, #10-34 HarbourFront Centre
Fax +55 11-3044- 0463 Singapore 099253
Phone + 65 6376-2210
Fax +65 6376-2264
Europe
European Representative NIHON KOHDEN INDIA PVT. LTD.
308, Tower A, Spazedge, Sector 47, Sohna Road
NIHON KOHDEN EUROPE GmbH Gurgaon-122 002 Haryana, India
Raiffeisenstrasse 10, D-61191 Rosbach, Germany
Toll-free +91 1800-103-8182
Phone + 49 6003- 827- 0
Phone + 91 124-493 -1000
Fax + 49 6003- 827- 599
Fax + 91 124-493 -1029
NIHON KOHDEN DEUTSCHLAND GmbH NIHON KOHDEN MIDDLE EAST FZE

Raiffeisenstrasse 10, D-61191 Rosbach, Germany
JAFZA One Tower A, 19th floor, Office No. 1912
Phone + 49 6003- 827- 0
P.O. Box 261516, Jebel Ali Free Zone, Dubai, U.A.E.
Fax + 49 6003- 827- 599
Phone + 971 4- 884-0080
Fax +971 4- 880-0122
NIHON KOHDEN FRANCE SARL
Centre d’Affaires La Boursidière, Bât C – RDC,
92357 LE Plessis Robinson, France
NIHON KOHDEN KOREA, INC.
3F, Cheongok Bldg., 88, Dongmak-ro, Mapo-gu,
Phone +33 1- 49- 08 -05 -50
Seoul, 04075, Republic of Korea
Fax + 33 1- 49- 08- 93 -32
Phone + 82 2-3273-2310
Fax + 82 2-3273-2352
NIHON KOHDEN IBERICA S.L.
C/Ulises 75A, E-28043 Madrid, Spain
Phone +34 917-161-080
Fax + 34 913- 004-676
Contact information is accurate as of September 2019. Visit https://www.nihonkohden.com/ for the latest information.
The model and serial number of your device are identified on the rear or bottom of the unit.
Write the model and serial number in the spaces provided below. Whenever you call your representative concerning this device,
mention these two pieces of information for quick and accurate service.
Model Serial Number
Your Representative
Note for users in the territory of the EEA and Switzerland:

Any serious incident that has occurred in relation to the device should be reported to the European Representative designated by the
manufacturer and the Competent Authority of the Member State of the EEA and Switzerland in which the user and/or patient is established.
CNS-6201_0614-907490O
1st Edition: 23 Apr 2015
16th Edition:12 Sep 2019

Manual Del Operador CNS-6201

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Del Operador CNS-6201

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operator’s Manual

Operator’s Manual (this manual)

GENERAL HANDLING PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................. i 3

Operator’s Manual CNS-6201 C.1

Review Data Transfer............................................................................................ 1.25

Section 2 Panel and Parts Descriptions............................................... 2.1

C.2 Operator’s Manual CNS-6201

Section 3 Preparation............................................................................. 3.1 1

Section 4 Admitting and Discharging Patients.................................... 4.1

Operator’s Manual CNS-6201 C.3

Transfer Limitation................................................................................................ 4.21

Section 5 Alarm Function....................................................................... 5.1

C.4 Operator’s Manual CNS-6201

Using an Alarm Notice.......................................................................................... 5.35 1

Section 7 All Beds Alarms Window....................................................... 7.1

Section 8 Individual Bed Window.......................................................... 8.1

Operator’s Manual CNS-6201 C.5

Section 9 Review Windows.................................................................... 9.1

C.6 Operator’s Manual CNS-6201

Operator’s Manual CNS-6201 C.7

Analysis Wave Window......................................................................................... 9.65

Section 10 Recording............................................................................. 10.1

C.8 Operator’s Manual CNS-6201

Starting All Beds Waveforms Printing....................................................... 10.10 1

Section 12 Parameter Setup................................................................... 12.1

Operator’s Manual CNS-6201 C.9

Main Settings...................................................................................................... 12.17

Section 13 System Setup Screen.......................................................... 13.1

Section 14 Error Messages and Troubleshooting................................ 14.1

C.10 Operator’s Manual CNS-6201

Messages from Central Monitor......................................................................... 14.20 1

Section 16 Factory Default Settings...................................................... 16.1

Operator’s Manual CNS-6201 C.11

Parameter Setup........................................................................................ 16.7

Section 17 Reference.............................................................................. 17.1

C.12 Operator’s Manual CNS-6201

Recommended Separation Distances between Portable and Mobile RF 1

Operator’s Manual CNS-6201 C.13

This device is intended for use only by qualified medical personnel.

2. When installing or storing the instrument, take the following precautions:

5. To Shutdown After Use

7. The instrument must not be altered or modified in any way.

8. Maintenance and Inspection

Operator’s Manual CNS-6201 i

In the USA and Canada other warranty policies may apply.

ii Operator’s Manual CNS-6201

3. Effect of direct or indirect electrostatic discharge:

6. Use with other equipment:

7. Use of unspecified accessory, transducer and/or cable:

Operator’s Manual CNS-6201 iii

9. Measurement with excessive sensitivity:

10. Use with radiation therapy equipment:

iv Operator’s Manual CNS-6201

Warnings, Cautions and Notes

Text Conventions in this Manual

Operator’s Manual CNS-6201 v

Symbol Description Symbol Description

Non-paced Change window

Record Filter display

QRS/pulse sync icon Display setup/change window

Return to previous window/All Beds

Display a comment Alarm notice

Close a window Alarm silence

Alarm silence with remaining minutes